10 - 0 - D-Copia 5001-6001mf-En
10 - 0 - D-Copia 5001-6001mf-En
10 - 0 - D-Copia 5001-6001mf-En
d-COPIA5001MF/d-COPIA6001MF
Code: 600903en
PUBLICATION ISSUED BY:
Olivetti S.p.A.
Gruppo Telecom Italia
Via Jervis, 77 - 10015 Ivrea (ITALY)
www.olivetti.com
Your attention is drawn to the following actions which could compromise the conformity attested to above, as well as
the characteristics of the product:
• incorrect electrical power supply;
• incorrect installation, incorrect or improper use or use not in compliance with the warnings provided in the
User’s Manual supplied with the product;
• replacement of original components or accessories with others of a type not approved by the manufacturer, or
performed by unauthorised personnel.
CAUTION CAUTION
moving fan blade DOUBLE POLE / Alternating current
NEUTRAL FUSING
The manufacturer reserves the right to carry out modifications to the product described in this manual at any time and
without any notice.
All rights reserved. No part of this material may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means,
electronic or mechanical, including photocopying, recording or by any information storage and retrieval system,
without permission in writing from the Publisher.
> Preface
Preface
Thank you for purchasing this machine.
This Operation Guide is intended to help you operate the machine correctly, perform routine maintenance, and take
simple troubleshooting measures as needed so that the machine can always be used in the optimum condition.
Please read this Operation Guide before using the machine.
We recommend the use of our genuine toner containers, which have passed rigorous quality
control testing, to maintain quality.
The use of non-genuine toner containers may cause failure.
We will not be liable for any damages caused by the use of third party supplies in this machine.
You'll need the equipment's serial number when contacting your Service Representative. Please check the number
before contacting your Service Representative.
i
Contents
Preface ..................................................................................................................................... i
Contents .................................................................................................................................. ii
Overview ............................................................................................................................... xii
Machine Features ................................................................................................................ xiii
Color and Image Quality Functions ................................................................................... xix
Basic Color Modes ...................................................................................................... xix
Adjusting Image Quality and Color............................................................................... xx
Guides Provided with the Machine .................................................................................... xxi
About the Operation Guide (this Guide) ......................................................................... xxiii
Structure of the guide ................................................................................................. xxiii
Conventions Used in This Guide............................................................................... xxiv
Menu Map .......................................................................................................................... xxvii
ii
Display for Device Information ................................................................................ 2-18
Display Setting Screen ............................................................................................ 2-18
Functions Key ......................................................................................................... 2-19
Using the Screen ..................................................................................................... 2-19
Display of Keys That Cannot Be Set ....................................................................... 2-20
Original Preview ...................................................................................................... 2-20
Entering Numbers ................................................................................................... 2-23
Using the Enter Key ................................................................................................ 2-24
Using the Quick No. Search Key ............................................................................. 2-24
Help Screen ............................................................................................................ 2-25
Accessibility Functions (Magnifying the View) ........................................................ 2-26
Login/Logout ................................................................................................................... 2-27
Login ....................................................................................................................... 2-27
Logout ..................................................................................................................... 2-28
Default Settings of the Machine ..................................................................................... 2-29
Setting Date and Time ............................................................................................ 2-29
Network Setup ................................................................................................................. 2-30
Configuring the Wired Network ............................................................................... 2-30
Configuring the Wireless Network ........................................................................... 2-32
Setting Wi-Fi Direct ................................................................................................. 2-36
Configuring NFC ..................................................................................................... 2-38
Motion Sensor ................................................................................................................. 2-39
Energy Saver Function ................................................................................................... 2-40
Low Power Mode .................................................................................................... 2-40
Sleep ....................................................................................................................... 2-41
Auto Sleep ............................................................................................................... 2-41
Sleep Rules (models for Europe) ............................................................................ 2-41
Sleep Level (Energy Saver) (models except for Europe) ........................................ 2-42
Energy Saver Recovery Level ................................................................................. 2-42
Weekly Timer Settings ............................................................................................ 2-42
Power Off Timer (models for Europe) ..................................................................... 2-42
Quick Setup Wizard ......................................................................................................... 2-43
Installing Software .......................................................................................................... 2-46
Software on DVD (Windows) .................................................................................. 2-46
Installing Software in Windows ............................................................................... 2-47
Uninstalling the Software ........................................................................................ 2-53
Installing Software in Mac Computer ...................................................................... 2-54
Setting TWAIN Driver .............................................................................................. 2-56
Setting WIA Driver ................................................................................................... 2-58
Checking the Counter ..................................................................................................... 2-59
Additional Preparations for the Administrator ............................................................. 2-60
Sending Documents to a PC ................................................................................... 2-60
Strengthening the Security ...................................................................................... 2-60
Embedded Web Server RX .............................................................................................. 2-62
Accessing Embedded Web Server RX .................................................................... 2-63
Changing Security Settings ..................................................................................... 2-64
Changing Device Information .................................................................................. 2-65
E-mail Settings ........................................................................................................ 2-66
Registering Destinations ......................................................................................... 2-69
Creating a New Custom Box ................................................................................... 2-70
Printing a document stored in a Custom Box .......................................................... 2-71
Transferring Data from Our Other Products ................................................................. 2-72
Migrating the Address Book .................................................................................... 2-72
iii
Loading in Cassette 2 ............................................................................................... 3-7
Loading Envelopes or Cardstock in the Cassettes ................................................. 3-10
Loading in the Large Capacity Feeder .................................................................... 3-14
Loading in the Side Feeder ..................................................................................... 3-16
Precautions for Outputting Paper .................................................................................. 3-18
Paper Stopper ......................................................................................................... 3-18
Envelope Stack Guide ............................................................................................. 3-18
Stack Level Adjuster ............................................................................................... 3-19
Folding Unit (For 4,000-sheet Finisher) .................................................................. 3-20
Folding Unit (For 100-sheet Staple Finisher) .......................................................... 3-21
Preparation for Sending a Document to a Shared Folder in a PC .............................. 3-22
Making a note of the computer name and full computer name ............................... 3-22
Making a note of the user name and domain name ................................................ 3-22
Creating a Shared Folder, Making a Note of a Shared Folder ................................ 3-24
Configuring Windows Firewall ................................................................................. 3-27
Scan to Folder Setup Tool for SMB ........................................................................ 3-31
Registering Destinations in the Address Book ............................................................ 3-35
Adding a Destination (Address Book) ..................................................................... 3-35
Adding a Destination on One Touch Key (One Touch Key) .................................... 3-42
iv
5 Operation on the Machine ........................................................................ 5-1
Loading Originals .............................................................................................................. 5-2
Placing Originals on the Platen ................................................................................. 5-2
Loading Originals in the Document Processor .......................................................... 5-4
Loading Paper in the Multipurpose Tray ......................................................................... 5-6
Program ............................................................................................................................ 5-10
Registering Programs ............................................................................................. 5-11
Recalling Programs ................................................................................................. 5-11
Editing Programs ..................................................................................................... 5-12
Deleting Programs .................................................................................................. 5-12
Application ....................................................................................................................... 5-13
Installing Applications .............................................................................................. 5-13
Activating Applications ............................................................................................ 5-14
Deactivating Applications ........................................................................................ 5-15
Uninstalling Applications ......................................................................................... 5-15
Registering Shortcuts
(Copy, Send, and Document Box Settings) .................................................................. 5-16
Adding Shortcuts ..................................................................................................... 5-16
Editing Shortcuts ..................................................................................................... 5-17
Deleting Shortcuts ................................................................................................... 5-17
Copying ............................................................................................................................ 5-18
Basic Operation ....................................................................................................... 5-18
Proof Copy .............................................................................................................. 5-20
Interrupt Copy ......................................................................................................... 5-21
Canceling Jobs ........................................................................................................ 5-21
Frequently-Used Sending Method ................................................................................. 5-22
Sending Document via E-mail ........................................................................................ 5-23
Configuring Settings before Sending ...................................................................... 5-23
Sending Scanned Document via E-mail .................................................................. 5-23
Sending Document to Desired Shared Folder on a Computer (Scan to PC) ............. 5-24
Configuring Settings before Sending ...................................................................... 5-24
Sending Document to Desired Shared Folder on a Computer ................................ 5-24
Sending Document to Folder on an FTP Server (Scan to FTP) ................................... 5-27
Configuring Settings before Sending ...................................................................... 5-27
Sending Document to Folder on an FTP Server ..................................................... 5-27
Scanning using TWAIN or WIA ...................................................................................... 5-29
Configuring Settings before Sending ...................................................................... 5-29
Scanning Document Using Application ................................................................... 5-29
Scanning Document stored in a Custom Box .............................................................. 5-30
Configuring Settings before Sending ...................................................................... 5-30
Scanning Document Stored in a Box ...................................................................... 5-30
Useful Sending Method .................................................................................................. 5-31
WSD Scan ........................................................................................................................ 5-32
Installing the Driver ................................................................................................. 5-32
Executing WSD scan .............................................................................................. 5-33
DSM Scan ......................................................................................................................... 5-35
Configuring Settings before Sending ...................................................................... 5-35
Executing DSM Scan .............................................................................................. 5-35
Scanning with File Management Utility ......................................................................... 5-37
Configuring Settings before Sending ...................................................................... 5-37
Using FMU Connection to Scan an Original ........................................................... 5-37
Sending to Different Types of Destinations (Multi Sending) ....................................... 5-38
Send to Me (E-mail) ......................................................................................................... 5-39
Configuring Settings before Sending ...................................................................... 5-39
Sending a Document to the Mail Address of the Logged In User ........................... 5-39
Using a FAX Server to Send (FAX Server Send) .......................................................... 5-40
Canceling Sending Jobs ................................................................................................. 5-42
Handling Destination ...................................................................................................... 5-43
Specifying Destination ............................................................................................. 5-43
Choosing from the Address Book ........................................................................... 5-43
v
Choosing from the One Touch Key ......................................................................... 5-45
Choosing from the Speed Dial ................................................................................ 5-45
Choosing from the Destination History .................................................................... 5-46
Checking and Editing Destinations ......................................................................... 5-47
Confirmation Screen of Destinations ....................................................................... 5-48
Recall ...................................................................................................................... 5-49
How to use the FAX Function ........................................................................................ 5-50
Using Document Boxes .................................................................................................. 5-51
What is Custom Box? .............................................................................................. 5-51
What is Job Box? .................................................................................................... 5-51
What is USB Drive Box? ......................................................................................... 5-52
Fax Box ................................................................................................................... 5-52
Basic Operation for Document Box ......................................................................... 5-52
Creating a New Custom Box ................................................................................... 5-56
Editing Custom Box ................................................................................................. 5-57
Deleting Custom Box .............................................................................................. 5-58
Storing Documents to a Custom Box ...................................................................... 5-58
Printing Documents in Custom Box ........................................................................ 5-59
Saving Scanned Documents to a Custom Box ....................................................... 5-60
Sending Documents in Custom Box ....................................................................... 5-60
Sending Documents in Custom Box to E-mail Address of Logged In User. ........... 5-61
Moving Documents in Custom Box ......................................................................... 5-63
Copying Documents in Custom Box into Other Boxes ............................................ 5-63
Copying Documents in Custom Box to USB Drive .................................................. 5-64
Joining Documents in Custom Box ......................................................................... 5-64
Deleting Documents in Custom Box ....................................................................... 5-65
Job Box ............................................................................................................................ 5-66
Outputting Repeat Copy Jobs ................................................................................. 5-66
Form for Form Overlay ............................................................................................ 5-66
Operating using Removable USB Drive ........................................................................ 5-68
Printing Documents Stored in Removable USB Drive ............................................ 5-68
Saving Documents to USB Drive (Scan to USB) .................................................... 5-70
Check the USB Drive Information ........................................................................... 5-71
Removing USB Drive .............................................................................................. 5-71
Using the Internet Browser ............................................................................................ 5-72
Launching and Exiting the Browser ......................................................................... 5-72
Using the Browser Screen ...................................................................................... 5-73
Manual Staple .................................................................................................................. 5-74
vi
EcoPrint ................................................................................................................... 6-34
Color Selection ........................................................................................................ 6-35
Sharpness ............................................................................................................... 6-36
Contrast ................................................................................................................... 6-36
Background Density Adj. (Background Density Adjustment) .................................. 6-37
Prevent Bleed-thru .................................................................................................. 6-37
Erase Colors ........................................................................................................... 6-37
Zoom ....................................................................................................................... 6-38
Combine .................................................................................................................. 6-41
Margin/Centering, Margin, Centering ...................................................................... 6-43
Border Erase, Border Erase/Full Scan .................................................................... 6-44
Booklet .................................................................................................................... 6-46
Duplex ..................................................................................................................... 6-49
Cover ....................................................................................................................... 6-52
Form Overlay .......................................................................................................... 6-53
Erase Shadowed Areas .......................................................................................... 6-54
Page # ..................................................................................................................... 6-55
Insert Sheets/Chapters ........................................................................................... 6-57
Memo Page ............................................................................................................. 6-58
Image Repeat .......................................................................................................... 6-60
Text Stamp .............................................................................................................. 6-61
Bates Stamp ............................................................................................................ 6-64
Continuous Scan ..................................................................................................... 6-67
Auto Image Rotation ............................................................................................... 6-67
Negative Image ....................................................................................................... 6-68
Mirror Image ............................................................................................................ 6-68
Job Finish Notice ..................................................................................................... 6-68
File Name Entry ...................................................................................................... 6-69
Priority Override ...................................................................................................... 6-69
Repeat Copy ........................................................................................................... 6-70
DP Read Action ....................................................................................................... 6-71
Skip Blank Page ...................................................................................................... 6-71
2-sided/Book Original, Book Original ...................................................................... 6-72
Sending Size ........................................................................................................... 6-73
File Format .............................................................................................................. 6-74
File Separation ........................................................................................................ 6-79
Scan Resolution ...................................................................................................... 6-79
E-mail Subject/Body ................................................................................................ 6-80
Send and Print ........................................................................................................ 6-80
Send and Store ....................................................................................................... 6-80
FTP Encrypted TX ................................................................................................... 6-81
File Size Confirmation ............................................................................................. 6-81
Delete after Printed ................................................................................................. 6-81
Delete after Transmitted .......................................................................................... 6-81
Storing Size ............................................................................................................. 6-82
Long Original ........................................................................................................... 6-82
Encrypted PDF Password ....................................................................................... 6-83
JPEG/TIFF Print ...................................................................................................... 6-83
XPS Fit to Page ....................................................................................................... 6-83
vii
Canceling of Jobs .................................................................................................... 7-11
Priority Override for Waiting Jobs ........................................................................... 7-11
Reordering Print Jobs ............................................................................................. 7-12
Device/Communication ................................................................................................... 7-13
Checking the Remaining Amount of Toner and Paper (Paper/Supplies) ................... 7-14
viii
Enabling Job Accounting ............................................................................................... 9-34
Job Accounting Access ........................................................................................... 9-35
Job Accounting (Local) .................................................................................................. 9-36
Adding an Account .................................................................................................. 9-36
Restricting the Use of the Machine ......................................................................... 9-37
Editing an Account .................................................................................................. 9-38
Deleting an Account ................................................................................................ 9-39
Job Accounting for Printing ..................................................................................... 9-40
Job Accounting for Scan Using TWAIN .................................................................. 9-41
Job Accounting for Scan Using WIA ....................................................................... 9-42
Job Accounting for the FAX Transmitted from a Computer .................................... 9-43
Configuring Job Accounting .......................................................................................... 9-44
Default Setting ......................................................................................................... 9-44
Counting the Number of Pages Printed .................................................................. 9-46
Print Accounting Report .......................................................................................... 9-48
Using Job Accounting .................................................................................................... 9-49
Login/Logout ........................................................................................................... 9-49
Apply Limit ....................................................................................................................... 9-50
Copy/Printer Count ......................................................................................................... 9-51
Unknown User Settings .................................................................................................. 9-52
Unknown ID Job ...................................................................................................... 9-52
Registering Information for a User whose ID is Unknown ....................................... 9-53
ix
Remove any jammed paper in Cassette 5 (Side Feeder) ..................................... 10-73
Remove any jammed paper in the Multipurpose Tray .......................................... 10-75
Remove any jammed paper in Right Cover 1 ....................................................... 10-76
Remove any jammed paper in Right Cover 2 (500-sheet×2) ................................ 10-80
Remove any jammed paper in Right Cover 2 (1,500-sheet×2) ............................. 10-81
Remove any jammed paper in the Bridge Unit ..................................................... 10-83
Remove any jammed paper in the Mailbox ........................................................... 10-84
Remove any jammed paper in the Inner Finisher ................................................. 10-85
Remove any jammed paper in the Document Processor (Reverse Automatic) .... 10-86
Remove any jammed paper in the Document Processor (Dual Scan) .................. 10-88
Remove any jammed paper in the 1,000-sheet Finisher ...................................... 10-89
Remove any jammed paper in the 4,000-sheet Finisher/100-sheet Staple Finisher
(Inner) .................................................................................................................... 10-92
Remove any jammed paper in the 4,000-sheet Finisher/100-sheet Staple Finisher (Tray
A) ........................................................................................................................... 10-93
Remove any jammed paper in the 4,000-sheet Finisher/100-sheet Staple Finisher (Tray
B) ........................................................................................................................... 10-97
Remove any jammed paper in the Folding Unit (4,000-sheet Finisher) .............. 10-100
Remove any jammed paper in the Folding Tray (4,000-sheet Finisher) ............. 10-105
Remove any jammed paper in the Folding Unit (100-sheet Staple Finisher) ...... 10-109
Remove any jammed paper in the Folding Tray (100-sheet Staple Finisher) ..... 10-115
Clearing a Staple Jam ................................................................................................. 10-119
Clearing a Staple Jam of the Inner Finisher ........................................................ 10-119
Clearing a Staple Jam of the 1,000-sheet Finisher ............................................. 10-121
Clearing a Staple Jam of the 4,000-sheet Finisher ............................................. 10-124
Clearing a Staple Jam of the 100-sheet Staple Finisher ..................................... 10-126
Clearing a Staple Jam of the Folding Unit (4,000-sheet Finisher) ...................... 10-129
Clearing a Staple Jam of the Folding Unit (100-sheet Staple Finisher) .............. 10-133
x
Folding Unit (For 100-sheet Staple Finisher) ........................................................ 11-31
Job Separator Tray ............................................................................................... 11-32
Banner Tray .......................................................................................................... 11-32
Glossary ......................................................................................................................... 11-33
Index ............................................................................................................................ Index-1
xi
> Overview
Overview
Input Data Security
Original Electronic data USB drive Fax data You can apply the various machine security
levels to your specific needs.
Strengthen security (page xvi)
Application
You can expand the machine functions
Operations from your PC according to your needs.
Application (page 5-13)
Embedded Web Server RX (page 2-62) Printing Data Saved in the Printer
(page 4-18)
Embedded Web Server RX
User Guide Creating a New Custom Box
(page 5-56)
Output Data
Copy functions Printer functions Send functions USB drive Fax functions
NOTE
• Before using the machine, be sure to read the following:
Legal and Safety Information (page 1-1)
• To prepare the device for use, including setting up cable connections and installing software.
Installing and Setting up the Machine (page 2-1)
• To learn how to load paper, set up shared folders, and add addresses to the address book, refer to the following:
Preparation before Use (page 3-1)
xii
> Machine Features
Machine Features
The machine is equipped with many useful functions.
Using Various Functions (page 6-1)
Here are some examples.
Access to frequently used Interrupt other running jobs and Check the finishing before copying
functions with just one touch execute your copy job immediately a large number of sheets
(Favorites) (Interrupt Copy) (Proof Copy)
Scan originals of different sizes at Scan a large number of originals in Send one time with multiple
a time (Mixed Size Originals) separate batches and produce as sending options (Multi Sending)
one job (Continuous Scan)
1 11 21 1
xiii
> Machine Features
Save energy as needed Reduce paper use Skip blank pages when printing
(Energy Saver function) (Paper Saving Printing) (Skip Blank Page)
The machine is equipped with Energy You can print originals on both sides When there are blank pages in a
Saver function that automatically of the paper. You can also print scanned document, this function
switched into Low Power Mode or multiple originals onto one sheet. skips the blank pages and prints only
Sleep Mode. You can set appropriate Program (page 5-10) pages that are not blank.
Energy Saver Recovery Level Skip Blank Page (page 6-71)
depending on the operation.
In addition, the machine can
automatically be switched into Sleep
and recovered at a specified time for
each day of the week.
Energy Saver Function
(page 2-40)
xiv
> Machine Features
Prevent image bleed-through Erase the extra shaded area Create a booklet (Booklet)
(Prevent Bleed-through) (Erase Shadowed Areas)
xv
> Machine Features
Strengthen security
Password-protect a PDF file Protect data on the hard disk/SSD Prevent loss of finished
(PDF Encryption Functions) (Encryption / Overwrite) documents (Private Print)
Use the PDF format's password You can overwrite the unnecessary
security options to restrict document data that remains on the hard disk/ Temporarily saving print jobs in the
viewing, printing and editing. SSD automatically. main unit document box and
outputting them when in front of the
Encrypted PDF Password To prevent an external leakage, the
device can prevent documents from
(page 6-83) machine is able to encrypt data
being taken by others.
before writing it to the hard disk/SSD.
Printing Data Saved in the Printer
Data Security (page 8-70)
(page 4-18)
Strengthen security
OK !
You can log in simply by touching an Various functions are available for
ID card. You don't need to enter your administrators to strengthen security.
user name and password. Strengthening the Security
Card Authentication Kit(B) "Card (page 2-60)
Authentication Kit" (page 11-6)
xvi
> Machine Features
Expand functions as necessary Display file size before sending / Install the machine without
(Application) storing a job concerning the network cables
(File Size Confirmation) (Wireless Network)
1 MB
Use USB drive Specify image file format Scan the long originals
(USB Drive) (File Format) (Long Original)
It is useful when you need to print You can select the various file You can scan the long originals such
documents outside your office or you formats when sending/storing as Contract and Data log.
cannot print documents from your images. Long Original (page 6-82)
PC. File Format (page 6-74)
You can print the document from the
USB drive by plugging it directly into
the machine.
Original scanned at the machine can
be saved in the USB drive also.
Printing Documents Stored in
Removable USB Drive
(page 5-68)
Saving Documents to USB Drive
(Scan to USB) (page 5-70)
xvii
> Machine Features
When paper empty error occurs at You can access to the machine
the cassette by specifying the special remotely to print, send or download
paper size or type, the machine skips data.
the error job and perform the next Administrators can configure the
job. machine behavior or management
Error Job Skip (page 8-77) settings.
Embedded Web Server RX
(page 2-62)
xviii
> Color and Image Quality Functions
Black & White Scans a document in black & white. page 6-35
xix
> Color and Image Quality Functions
Sample image
I want to... Function Page
Before After
xx
> Guides Provided with the Machine
Printed Guides
Quick Guide
Start using the Explains how to use basic functions of the machine, how to use convenient
machine quickly features, how to perform routine maintenance, and what to do when problems
occur.
Safety Guide
Provides safety and cautionary information for installation environment and use of
the machine. Be sure to read this guide before using the machine.
For safe use of the
machine Safety Guide (d-COPIA 5001MF/d-COPIA 6001MF)
Indicates the space required for machine installation, and describes the
cautionary labels and other safety information. Be sure to read this guide before
using the machine.
xxi
> Guides Provided with the Machine
Install the following versions of Adobe Reader to view the manuals on the DVD.
Version 8.0 or later
xxii
> About the Operation Guide (this Guide)
Chapter Contents
1 Legal and Safety Information Provides precautions regarding use of the machine and trademark information.
2 Installing and Setting up the Explains part names, cable connections, installation of the software, login,
Machine logout, and other matters related to administration of the machine.
3 Preparation before Use Explains preparations and settings that are required in order to use the
machine, such as how to load paper and create an address book.
4 Printing from PC Explains functions that are available when the machine is used as a printer.
5 Operation on the Machine Explains the basic procedures for using the machine, such as placing originals,
making copies, sending documents, and using document boxes.
6 Using Various Functions Explains convenient functions that are available on the machine.
7 Status/Job Cancel Explains how to check the status of a job and the job history, and how to cancel
jobs being printed or waiting to print. Also explains how to check paper and
toner levels, how to check the device status, and how to cancel fax
transmission.
8 Setup and Registration Explains System Menu and how it relates to the operation of the machine.
(System Menu)
10 Troubleshooting Explains what to do when toner runs out, an error is displayed, or a paper jam
or other problem occurs.
11 Appendix Describes convenient options that are available for the machine. Provides
information on media types and paper sizes, and gives a glossary of terms.
Explains how to enter characters, and lists the specifications of the machine.
xxiii
> About the Operation Guide (this Guide)
Click an item in the Table of Click to move from the current page to the previously
Contents to jump to the displayed page. This is convenient when you want to
corresponding page. return to the page from which you jumped to the
current page.
IMPORTANT
Indicates operational
requirements and restrictions to
operate the machine correctly,
and avoid damage to the
machine or property.
NOTE
Indicates supplemental
explanations and reference
information for operations.
Refer to
Click the underlined text to jump
to the corresponding page.
CAUTION
Indicates that personal injury or
mechanical damage may result
from insufficient attention to or
incorrect compliance with the
related points.
NOTE
The items that appear in Adobe Reader vary depending on how it is used. If the Table of Contents or tools do not
appear, refer to Adobe Reader Help.
Certain items are indicated in this guide by the conventions described below.
Convention Description
xxiv
> About the Operation Guide (this Guide)
Select the [System Menu/Counter] key. [System Menu/Counter] key > [Common Settings] >
[Sound]
Select [ ].
Select [Common Settings].
Select [Sound].
Select [Next] of "Job Accounting Settings". "Job Accounting Settings" [Next] > "Job Accounting"
[Change]
User Login/Job Accounting
Close
Status m020168
Select [Change] of "Job Accounting ".
User Login/Job Accounting - Job Accounting Setting
Close
Status m020174
xxv
> About the Operation Guide (this Guide)
Original Original
Paper
Paper Paper
Original Original
Paper
Paper Paper
*1 Original/paper sizes that can be used vary depending on the function and source tray. For details, refer to the
following.
Specifications (page 11-20)
xxvi
> Menu Map
Menu Map
This is a list of menus displayed on the touch panel. Depending on the settings, some menus may not be displayed.
Some menu names may differ from their reference titles.
Copy
xxvii
> Menu Map
xxviii
> Menu Map
Send
xxix
> Menu Map
xxx
> Menu Map
Custom Box
xxxi
> Menu Map
xxxii
> Menu Map
FAX TX Resolution
(refer to FAX Operation Guide)
i-FAX Subject/Body
(refer to FAX Operation Guide)
FAX TX Report
(refer to FAX Operation Guide)
xxxiii
> Menu Map
xxxiv
> Menu Map
Job Box
xxxv
> Menu Map
USB Drive
Up (page 5-69)
xxxvi
> Menu Map
xxxvii
> Menu Map
Status/
Job Cancel
or
Status/
Job Cancel I
S
xxxviii
> Menu Map
System Menu
/Counter
or
System
Menu
xxxix
> Menu Map
xl
> Menu Map
xli
> Menu Map
xlii
> Menu Map
xliii
> Menu Map
xliv
> Menu Map
xlv
> Menu Map
xlvi
> Menu Map
User Login/Job Accounting User Login Setting User Login (page 9-3)
Additional Authentication
(page 9-31)
xlvii
> Menu Map
xlviii
> Menu Map
xlix
1 Legal and Safety
Information
Please read this information before using your machine. This chapter provides information on the following topics.
Notice ................................................................................................................................................................. 1-2
Safety Conventions in This Guide ........................................................................................................... 1-2
Environment ............................................................................................................................................. 1-3
Precautions for Use ................................................................................................................................. 1-4
Laser Safety (Europe) .............................................................................................................................. 1-5
SAFETY OF LASER BEAM (USA) .......................................................................................................... 1-6
Safety Instructions Regarding the Disconnection of Power ..................................................................... 1-7
Compliance and Conformity .................................................................................................................... 1-7
Radio Tag Technology ............................................................................................................................. 1-8
Other precautions (for users in California, the United States) .................................................................. 1-8
Legal Restriction on Copying/Scanning ................................................................................................... 1-8
EN ISO 7779 ............................................................................................................................................ 1-8
EK1-ITB 2000 .......................................................................................................................................... 1-8
Wireless Connection (Mexico only) ......................................................................................................... 1-8
Security Precautions when Using Wireless LAN (If equipped) ................................................................ 1-8
Limited Use of This Product (If equipped) ............................................................................................... 1-9
Legal Information ................................................................................................................................... 1-10
Energy Saving Control Function ............................................................................................................ 1-16
Automatic 2-Sided Print Function .......................................................................................................... 1-16
Resource Saving - Paper ....................................................................................................................... 1-16
Environmental benefits of "Power Management" ................................................................................... 1-16
1-1
Legal and Safety Information > Notice
Notice
Safety Conventions in This Guide
The sections of this guide and parts of the machine marked with symbols are safety warnings meant to protect the user,
other individuals and surrounding objects, and ensure correct and safe usage of the machine. The symbols and their
meanings are indicated below.
WARNING: Indicates that serious injury or even death may result from insufficient
attention to or incorrect compliance with the related points.
CAUTION: Indicates that personal injury or mechanical damage may result from
insufficient attention to or incorrect compliance with the related points.
Symbols
The symbol indicates that the related section includes safety warnings. Specific points of attention are indicated
inside the symbol.
The symbol indicates that the related section includes information on prohibited actions. Specifics of the prohibited
action are indicated inside the symbol.
The symbol indicates that the related section includes information on actions which must be performed. Specifics of
the required action are indicated inside the symbol.
Please contact your service representative to order a replacement if the safety warnings in this Operation Guide are
illegible or if the guide itself is missing (fee required).
NOTE
An original which resembles a bank note closely may not be copied properly in some rare cases because this
machine is equipped with a counterfeiting prevention function.
1-2
Legal and Safety Information > Notice
Environment
The service environmental conditions are as follows:
Humidity 10 to 80%
(But temperature should be 86 °F (30 °C) or less when humidity is 80%.)
Avoid the following locations when selecting a site for the machine.
• Avoid locations near a window or with exposure to direct sunlight.
• Avoid locations with vibrations.
• Avoid locations with drastic temperature fluctuations.
• Avoid locations with direct exposure to hot or cold air.
• Avoid poorly ventilated locations.
If the floor is delicate against casters, when this machine is moved after installation, the floor material may be damaged.
During copying, some ozone is released, but the amount does not cause any ill effect to one's health. If, however, the
machine is used over a long period of time in a poorly ventilated room or when making an extremely large number of
copies, the smell may become unpleasant. To maintain the appropriate environment for copy work, it is suggested that
the room be properly ventilated.
1-3
Legal and Safety Information > Notice
CAUTION
Do not attempt to incinerate parts which contain toner. Dangerous sparks may cause burns.
Keep parts which contain toner out of the reach of children.
If toner happens to spill from parts which contain toner, avoid inhalation and ingestion, as well as contact with your eyes
and skin.
• If you do happen to inhale toner, move to a place with fresh air and gargle thoroughly with a large amount of water. If
coughing develops, contact a physician.
• If you do happen to ingest toner, rinse your mouth with water and drink 1 or 2 cups of water to dilute the contents of
your stomach. If necessary, contact a physician.
• If you do happen to get toner in your eyes, flush them thoroughly with water. If there is any remaining tenderness,
contact a physician.
• If toner does happen to get on your skin, wash with soap and water.
Do not attempt to force open or destroy parts which contain toner.
Other precautions
Return the exhausted toner container and waste toner box to your dealer or service representative. The collected toner
container and waste toner box will be recycled or disposed in accordance with the relevant regulations.
Store the machine while avoiding exposure to direct sunlight.
Store the machine in a place where the temperature stays below 40 °C while avoiding sharp changes of temperature
and humidity.
If the machine will not be used for an extended period of time, remove the paper from the cassette and the Multipurpose
(MP) Tray, return it to its original package and reseal it.
1-4
Legal and Safety Information > Notice
1-5
Legal and Safety Information > Notice
XXXXi
3. Optical unit
When checking the optical unit, avoid direct exposure to the laser beam, which is invisible. Shown at below is the label
located on the cover of the optical unit.
4. Maintenance
For safety of the service personnel, follow the maintenance instructions in the other section of this manual.
5. Safety switch
The power to the laser unit is cut off when the front cover is opened.
1-6
Legal and Safety Information > Notice
Module name, Option Software Ver. Frequency band in which the Maximum radio-frequency power
radio equipment operates: transmitted in the frequency band in
which the radio equipment operates:
This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class B digital device, pursuant to Part 15 and
Part 18 of the FCC Rules.
These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference in a residential installation. This
equipment generates, uses and can radiate radio frequency energy and, if not installed and used in accordance with the
instructions, may cause harmful interference to radio communications. However, there is no guarantee that interference
will not occur in a particular installation. If this equipment does cause harmful interference to radio or television
reception, which can be determined by turning the equipment off and on, the user is encouraged to try to correct the
interference by one or more of the following measures:
• Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna.
• Increase the separation between the equipment and receiver.
• Connect the equipment into an outlet on a circuit different from that to which the receiver is connected.
• Consult the dealer or an experienced radio/TV technician for help.
• The use of a non-shielded interface cable with the referenced device is prohibited.
CAUTION — The changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could void
the user's authority to operate the equipment.
This device complies with Part 15 of FCC Rules.
Operation is subject to the following two conditions; (1) this device may not cause harmful interference, and (2) this
device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation.
This device complies with Industry Canada licence-exempt RSS standard(s). Operation is subject to the following two
conditions: (1) this device may not cause interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference, including
interference that may cause undesired operation of the device.
The antenna(s) used for this transmitter must be installed to provide a separation distance of at least 20 cm from all
persons and must not be co-located or operating in conjunction with any other transmitter.
Industry Canada ICES-003 Compliance Label: CAN ICES-3B/NMB-3B
* The above statements are valid only in the United States of America and Canada.
NOTE — Use shielded interface cables.
1-7
Legal and Safety Information > Notice
Other precautions
(for users in California, the United States)
Perchlorate Material - special handling may apply. See www.dtsc.ca.gov/hazardouswaste/perchlorate.
EN ISO 7779
Maschinenlärminformations-Verordnung 3. GPSGV, 06.01.2004: Der höchste Schalldruckpegel beträgt 70 dB (A) oder
weniger gemäß EN ISO 7779.
EK1-ITB 2000
Das Gerät ist nicht für die Benutzung im unmittelbaren Gesichtsfeld am Bildschirmarbeitsplatz vorgesehen. Um
störende Reflexionen am Bildschirmarbeitsplatz zu vermeiden, darf dieses Produkt nicht im unmittelbaren Gesichtsfeld
platziert werden.
1-8
Legal and Safety Information > Notice
Illegal Intrusion
A third party with malicious intent may gain unauthorized access to personal or company networks and conduct the
following illegal actions.
• Extracting personal and confidential information (information leak)
• Entering into communication while impersonating a specific person and distributing unauthorized information
(spoofing)
• Modifying and retransmitting intercepted communications (falsification)
• Transmitting computer viruses and destroying data and systems (destruction)
Wireless LAN cards and wireless access points contain built-in security mechanisms to address these problems and to
reduce the possibility of these problems occurring by configuring the security settings of wireless LAN products when
the product is used.
We recommend that customers take responsibility and use their judgment when configuring the security settings and
that they ensure that they fully understand the problems that can occur when the product is used without configuring the
security settings.
1-9
Legal and Safety Information > Notice
Legal Information
Copying or other reproduction of all or part of this guide without the prior written consent of Olivetti S.p.A. is prohibited.
All other brands and product names are registered trademarks or trademarks of their respective companies. The
designations ™ and ® will not be used in this Operation Guide.
1-10
Legal and Safety Information > Notice
GPL/LGPL
This product contains GPL (http://www.gnu.org/licenses/gpl.html) and/or LGPL (http://www.gnu.org/licenses/lgpl.html)
software as part of its firmware. You can get the source code, and you are permitted to copy, redistribute and modify
it under the terms of GPL/LGPL.
OpenSSL License
Copyright (c) 1998-2006 The OpenSSL Project. All rights reserved.
Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without modification, are permitted provided that the following
conditions are met:
1. Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright notice, this list of conditions and the following
disclaimer.
2. Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright notice, this list of conditions and the following
disclaimer in the documentation and/or other materials provided with the distribution.
3. All advertising materials mentioning features or use of this software must display the following acknowledgment:
"This product includes software developed by the OpenSSL Project for use in the OpenSSL Toolkit.
(http://www.openssl.org/)"
4. The names "OpenSSL Toolkit" and "OpenSSL Project" must not be used to endorse or promote products derived
from this software without prior written permission.
For written permission, please contact [email protected].
5. Products derived from this software may not be called "OpenSSL" nor may "OpenSSL" appear in their names without
prior written permission of the OpenSSL Project.
6. Redistributions of any form whatsoever must retain the following acknowledgment: "This product includes software
developed by the OpenSSL Project for use in the OpenSSL Toolkit (http://www.openssl.org/)"
THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE OpenSSL PROJECT "AS IS" AND ANY EXPRESSED OR IMPLIED
WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND
FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE OpenSSL PROJECT OR
ITS CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR
CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR
SERVICES; LOSS OF USE, DATA, OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION) HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON
ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY, WHETHER IN CONTRACT, STRICT LIABILITY, OR TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE
OR OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE
POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE.
1-11
Legal and Safety Information > Notice
1. Redistributions of source code must retain the copyright notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer.
2. Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright notice, this list of conditions and the following
disclaimer in the documentation and/or other materials provided with the distribution.
3. All advertising materials mentioning features or use of this software must display the following acknowledgement:
"This product includes cryptographic software written by Eric Young ([email protected])"
The word 'cryptographic' can be left out if the routines from the library being used are not cryptographic related :-).
4. If you include any Windows specific code (or a derivative thereof) from the apps directory (application code) you must
include an acknowledgement: "This product includes software written by Tim Hudson ([email protected])"
THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY ERIC YOUNG "AS IS" AND ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES,
INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A
PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE AUTHOR OR CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE
FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES
(INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES; LOSS OF USE,
DATA, OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION) HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY,
WHETHER IN CONTRACT, STRICT LIABILITY, OR TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE) ARISING IN
ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE.
The licence and distribution terms for any publically available version or derivative of this code cannot be changed. i.e.
this code cannot simply be copied and put under another distribution licence [including the GNU Public Licence.]
1-12
Legal and Safety Information > Notice
10 You shall not sublicense, sell, lease, or otherwise transfer the Software and/or Typefaces without the prior written
consent of Monotype Imaging.
11 Use, duplication or disclosure by the Government is subject to restrictions as set forth in the Rights in Technical Data
and Computer Software clause at FAR 252-227-7013, subdivision (b)(3)(ii) or subparagraph (c)(1)(ii), as appropriate.
Further use, duplication or disclosure is subject to restrictions applicable to restricted rights software as set forth in
FAR 52.227-19 (c)(2).
12 You acknowledge that you have read this Agreement, understand it, and agree to be bound by its terms and
conditions. Neither party shall be bound by any statement or representation not contained in this Agreement. No
change in this Agreement is effective unless written and signed by properly authorized representatives of each party.
By opening this diskette package, you agree to accept the terms and conditions of this Agreement.
Knopflerfish License
This product includes software developed by the Knopflerfish Project.
http://www.knopflerfish.org
Copyright 2003-2010 The Knopflerfish Project. All rights reserved.
Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without modification, are permitted provided that the following
conditions are met:
- Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright notice, this list of conditions and the following
disclaimer.
- Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright notice, this list of conditions and the following
disclaimer in the documentation and/or other materials provided with the distribution.
- Neither the name of the KNOPFLERFISH project nor the names of its contributors may be used to endorse or
promote products derived from this software without specific prior written permission.
THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE COPYRIGHT HOLDERS AND CONTRIBUTORS "AS IS" AND ANY
EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF
MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE
COPYRIGHT OWNER OR CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL,
EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, PROCUREMENT OF
SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES; LOSS OF USE, DATA, OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION)
HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY, WHETHER IN CONTRACT, STRICT LIABILITY, OR
TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE OF THIS
SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE.
1-13
Legal and Safety Information > Notice
"Object" form shall mean any form resulting from mechanical transformation or translation of a Source form, including
but not limited to compiled object code, generated documentation, and conversions to other media types.
"Work" shall mean the work of authorship, whether in Source or Object form, made available under the License, as
indicated by a copyright notice that is included in or attached to the work (an example is provided in the Appendix
below).
"Derivative Works" shall mean any work, whether in Source or Object form, that is based on (or derived from) the
Work and for which the editorial revisions, annotations, elaborations, or other modifications represent, as a whole, an
original work of authorship. For the purposes of this License, Derivative Works shall not include works that remain
separable from, or merely link (or bind by name) to the interfaces of, the Work and Derivative Works thereof.
"Contribution" shall mean any work of authorship, including the original version of the Work and any modifications or
additions to that Work or Derivative Works thereof, that is intentionally submitted to Licensor for inclusion in the Work
by the copyright owner or by an individual or Legal Entity authorized to submit on behalf of the copyright owner. For
the purposes of this definition, "submitted" means any form of electronic, verbal, or written communication sent to the
Licensor or its representatives, including but not limited to communication on electronic mailing lists, source code
control systems, and issue tracking systems that are managed by, or on behalf of, the Licensor for the purpose of
discussing and improving the Work, but excluding communication that is conspicuously marked or otherwise
designated in writing by the copyright owner as "Not a Contribution."
"Contributor" shall mean Licensor and any individual or Legal Entity on behalf of whom a Contribution has been
received by Licensor and subsequently incorporated within the Work.
2. Grant of Copyright License. Subject to the terms and conditions of this License, each Contributor hereby grants to
You a perpetual, worldwide, non-exclusive, no-charge, royalty-free, irrevocable copyright license to reproduce,
prepare Derivative Works of, publicly display, publicly perform, sublicense, and distribute the Work and such
Derivative Works in Source or Object form.
3. Grant of Patent License. Subject to the terms and conditions of this License, each Contributor hereby grants to You a
perpetual, worldwide, non-exclusive, no-charge, royalty-free, irrevocable (except as stated in this section) patent
license to make, have made, use, offer to sell, sell, import, and otherwise transfer the Work, where such license
applies only to those patent claims licensable by such Contributor that are necessarily infringed by their
Contribution(s) alone or by combination of their Contribution(s) with the Work to which such Contribution(s) was
submitted. If You institute patent litigation against any entity (including a cross-claim or counterclaim in a lawsuit)
alleging that the Work or a Contribution incorporated within the Work constitutes direct or contributory patent
infringement, then any patent licenses granted to You under this License for that Work shall terminate as of the date
such litigation is filed.
4. Redistribution. You may reproduce and distribute copies of the Work or Derivative Works thereof in any medium, with
or without modifications, and in Source or Object form, provided that You meet the following conditions:
(a)You must give any other recipients of the Work or Derivative Works a copy of this License; and
(b)You must cause any modified files to carry prominent notices stating that You changed the files; and
(c)You must retain, in the Source form of any Derivative Works that You distribute, all copyright, patent, trademark,
and attribution notices from the Source form of the Work, excluding those notices that do not pertain to any part of
the Derivative Works; and
(d)If the Work includes a "NOTICE" text file as part of its distribution, then any Derivative Works that You distribute
must include a readable copy of the attribution notices contained within such NOTICE file, excluding those notices
that do not pertain to any part of the Derivative Works, in at least one of the following places: within a NOTICE text
file distributed as part of the Derivative Works; within the Source form or documentation, if provided along with the
Derivative Works; or, within a display generated by the Derivative Works, if and wherever such third-party notices
normally appear. The contents of the NOTICE file are for informational purposes only and do not modify the
License. You may add Your own attribution notices within Derivative Works that You distribute, alongside or as an
addendum to the NOTICE text from the Work, provided that such additional attribution notices cannot be
construed as modifying the License.
You may add Your own copyright statement to Your modifications and may provide additional or different license
terms and conditions for use, reproduction, or distribution of Your modifications, or for any such Derivative Works as
a whole, provided Your use, reproduction, and distribution of the Work otherwise complies with the conditions stated
in this License.
1-14
Legal and Safety Information > Notice
5. Submission of Contributions. Unless You explicitly state otherwise, any Contribution intentionally submitted for
inclusion in the Work by You to the Licensor shall be under the terms and conditions of this License, without any
additional terms or conditions. Notwithstanding the above, nothing herein shall supersede or modify the terms of any
separate license agreement you may have executed with Licensor regarding such Contributions.
6. Trademarks. This License does not grant permission to use the trade names, trademarks, service marks, or product
names of the Licensor, except as required for reasonable and customary use in describing the origin of the Work and
reproducing the content of the NOTICE file.
7. Disclaimer of Warranty. Unless required by applicable law or agreed to in writing, Licensor provides the Work (and
each Contributor provides its Contributions) on an "AS IS" BASIS, WITHOUT WARRANTIES OR CONDITIONS OF
ANY KIND, either express or implied, including, without limitation, any warranties or conditions of TITLE, NON-
INFRINGEMENT, MERCHANTABILITY, or FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. You are solely responsible
for determining the appropriateness of using or redistributing the Work and assume any risks associated with Your
exercise of permissions under this License.
8. Limitation of Liability. In no event and under no legal theory, whether in tort (including negligence), contract, or
otherwise, unless required by applicable law (such as deliberate and grossly negligent acts) or agreed to in writing,
shall any Contributor be liable to You for damages, including any direct, indirect, special, incidental, or consequential
damages of any character arising as a result of this License or out of the use or inability to use the Work (including
but not limited to damages for loss of goodwill, work stoppage, computer failure or malfunction, or any and all other
commercial damages or losses), even if such Contributor has been advised of the possibility of such damages.
9. Accepting Warranty or Additional Liability. While redistributing the Work or Derivative Works thereof, You may choose
to offer, and charge a fee for, acceptance of support, warranty, indemnity, or other liability obligations and/or rights
consistent with this License. However, in accepting such obligations, You may act only on Your own behalf and on
Your sole responsibility, not on behalf of any other Contributor, and only if You agree to indemnify, defend, and hold
each Contributor harmless for any liability incurred by, or claims asserted against, such Contributor by reason of your
accepting any such warranty or additional liability.
END OF TERMS AND CONDITIONS
APPENDIX: How to apply the Apache License to your work.
To apply the Apache License to your work, attach the following boilerplate notice, with the fields enclosed by brackets
"[]" replaced with your own identifying information. (Don't include the brackets!) The text should be enclosed in the
appropriate comment syntax for the file format. We also recommend that a file or class name and description of
purpose be included on the same "printed page" as the copyright notice for easier identification within third-party
archives.
Copyright [yyyy] [name of copyright owner]
Licensed under the Apache License, Version 2.0 (the "License"); you may not use this file except in compliance with the
License. You may obtain a copy of the License at
http://www.apache.org/licenses/LICENSE-2.0
Unless required by applicable law or agreed to in writing, software distributed under the License is distributed on an "AS
IS" BASIS, WITHOUT WARRANTIES OR CONDITIONS OF ANY KIND, either express or implied. See the License for
the specific language governing permissions and limitations under the License.
1-15
Legal and Safety Information > Notice
1-16
2 Installing and Setting
up the Machine
This chapter provides information for the administrator of this machine, such as part names, cable connection, and
software installation.
Part Names (Machine Exterior) ..................... 2-2 Energy Saver Function ............................... 2-40
Part Names (Connectors/Interior) ................. 2-4 Low Power Mode .............................. 2-40
Part Names (With Optional Equipments Sleep ................................................. 2-41
Attached) ....................................................... 2-5 Auto Sleep ........................................ 2-41
Connecting the Machine and Other Devices ..... 2-6 Sleep Rules (models for Europe) ...... 2-41
Connecting Cables ........................................ 2-7 Sleep Level (Energy Saver) (models
Connecting LAN Cable ....................... 2-7 except for Europe) ............................ 2-42
Connecting USB Cable ....................... 2-8 Energy Saver Recovery Level .......... 2-42
Connecting the Power Cable .............. 2-8 Weekly Timer Settings ...................... 2-42
Power On/Off ................................................ 2-9 Power Off Timer (models for Europe) 2-42
Power On ............................................ 2-9 Quick Setup Wizard .................................... 2-43
Power Off ............................................ 2-9 Installing Software ....................................... 2-46
Using the Operation Panel .......................... 2-10 Software on DVD (Windows) ............ 2-46
Operation Panel Keys ....................... 2-10 Installing Software in Windows ......... 2-47
Adjusting the Operation Panel Angle 2-10 Uninstalling the Software .................. 2-53
Touch Panel ................................................. 2-11 Installing Software in Mac
Using the Touch Panel ....................... 2-11 Computer .......................................... 2-54
Home Screen .................................... 2-12 Setting TWAIN Driver ........................ 2-56
Assigning Functions to Function Setting WIA Driver ............................ 2-58
Keys .................................................. 2-16 Checking the Counter ................................. 2-59
Display for Device Information .......... 2-18 Additional Preparations for the
Display Setting Screen ..................... 2-18 Administrator ............................................... 2-60
Functions Key ................................... 2-19 Sending Documents to a PC ............. 2-60
Using the Screen .............................. 2-19 Strengthening the Security ................ 2-60
Display of Keys That Cannot Be Embedded Web Server RX ......................... 2-62
Set .................................................... 2-20 Accessing Embedded Web Server RX .. 2-63
Original Preview ................................ 2-20 Changing Security Settings .............. 2-64
Entering Numbers ............................. 2-23 Changing Device Information ........... 2-65
Using the Enter Key .......................... 2-24 E-mail Settings .................................. 2-66
Using the Quick No. Search Key ...... 2-24 Registering Destinations ................... 2-69
Help Screen ...................................... 2-25 Creating a New Custom Box ............ 2-70
Accessibility Functions (Magnifying Printing a document stored in a Custom
the View) ........................................... 2-26 Box .................................................... 2-71
Login/Logout ............................................... 2-27 Transferring Data from Our Other
Login ................................................. 2-27 Products ...................................................... 2-72
Logout ............................................... 2-28 Migrating the Address Book .............. 2-72
Default Settings of the Machine .................. 2-29
Setting Date and Time ...................... 2-29
Network Setup ............................................ 2-30
Configuring the Wired Network ......... 2-30
Configuring the Wireless Network .... 2-32
Setting Wi-Fi Direct ........................... 2-36
Configuring NFC ............................... 2-38
2-1
Installing and Setting up the Machine > Part Names (Machine Exterior)
13 12 11
14 20
10
2 9
15 19
3 16 18
8
7
4 17
5
17
6
1 Document Processor 12 Original Table
2 Operation Panel 13 Original Width Guides
3 Power Switch 14 Slit Glass
4 Waste Toner Box Cover 15 Paper Stopper
5 Cassette 1 16 Inner Tray
6 Cassette 2 17 Handles
7 Main Power Switch 18 Front Cover
8 Multipurpose Tray 19 Motion Sensor
9 USB Memory Slot 20 Platen
10 Original Eject Table 21 Original Size Indicator Plates
11 Original Stopper
2-2
Installing and Setting up the Machine > Part Names (Machine Exterior)
29
28
27
26
25
22
23 24
22 Paper Length Guide 26 Multipurpose Tray
23 Paper Width Guide 27 Paper Width Guide
24 Paper Width Adjusting Tab 28 Right Cover 1 Lever
25 Support Tray Section of the Multipurpose Tray 29 Right Cover 1
2-3
Installing and Setting up the Machine > Part Names (Connectors/Interior)
1
2
3
4
7
8
2-4
Installing and Setting up the Machine > Part Names (With Optional Equipments Attached)
3
2
4
5 9
2 3 8
9 6 7
7 6
2-5
Installing and Setting up the Machine > Connecting the Machine and Other Devices
MFP
USB
When Connecting the Machine to the PC or Tablet by network cable, Wi-Fi, or Wi-Fi direct
Network cable
connection
Wi-Fi
Network connection*1
NOTE
If you are using wireless LAN, refer to the following.
Configuring the Wireless Network (page 2-32)
Connect a LAN cable to the Printer/Scanner/Network FAX*1 LAN cable (10BASE-T, 100BASE-TX,
machine. 1000BASE-T)
Connect a USB cable to the Printer USB 3.0 compatible cable (Super-Speed
machine. USB compliant, max. 5.0 m, shielded)
*1 Function available when using optional FAX kit. For more information on using the Network FAX, refer to the FAX
Operation Guide.
IMPORTANT
Using a cable other than a USB 3.0 compatible cable may cause failure.
2-6
Installing and Setting up the Machine > Connecting Cables
Connecting Cables
Connecting LAN Cable
IMPORTANT
Make sure that the power to the machine is turned off.
Power Off (page 2-9)
2 Connect the other end of the cable to the hub or the PC.
2-7
Installing and Setting up the Machine > Connecting Cables
IMPORTANT
Only use the power cable that comes with the machine.
2-8
Installing and Setting up the Machine > Power On/Off
Power On/Off
Power On
Power Off
CAUTION
If this machine will be left unused for an extended period (e.g. overnight), turn it off at the power switch. If the
machine will not be used for an even longer period of time (e.g. vacation), remove the power plug from the
outlet as a safety precaution.
IMPORTANT
If using the products equipped with the fax function, note that turning the machine off at the power switch
disables fax transmission and reception. Remove paper from the cassettes and seal it in the paper storage
bag to protect it from humidity.
2-9
Installing and Setting up the Machine > Using the Operation Panel
1 2 3 4 5
2-10
Installing and Setting up the Machine > Touch Panel
Touch Panel
Using the Touch Panel
Keys for performing basic operations are displayed on the lower and right side of the touch panel.
Admin
Authentic./
Logout 10
9
Select the function. System Menu
/Counter
Interrupt
8
Copy Send FAX Custom Box Numeric
7
Keypad
11
Reset 6
Job Box USB Drive FAX Box Internet Browser
Stop 5
Status/
Job Cancel
Device
Information
Language Paper
Settings
Wi-Fi Direct 㻿㼥㼟㼠㼑㼙
㻹㼑㼚㼡
Help Program
Start 4
Status 08/08/2018 14:00
Status/
Job Cancel Copy Function Send Function FAX Function
Accessibility
Display
3
1 2 2 2
1 [Status/Job Cancel] key: Displays the Status/Job Cancel screen.
2 Function Key: These keys enable various functions and applications, including copy and scan, to be registered.
Assigning Functions to Function Keys (page 2-16)
3 [Accessibility Display] key: Switches the touch panel display on the Copy screen and the Send screen to a
magnified view.
4 [Start] key: Starts copying and scanning operations and processing for setting operations.
5 [Stop] key: Cancels or pauses the job in progress.
6 [Reset] key: Returns settings to their default states.
7 [Numeric Keypad] key: Displays numeric keys on the touch panel.
8 [Interrupt] key: Displays the Interrupt Copy screen.
9 [System Menu/Counter] key: Displays the System Menu screen.
10 [Authentication/Logout] key: Authenticates user switching, and exits the operation for the current user (i.e. log out).
11 Screen area: Displays the screen of each function.
2-11
Installing and Setting up the Machine > Touch Panel
Home Screen
This screen is displayed by selecting the [Home] ( ) key on the operation panel. Touching an icon will display the
corresponding screen.
You can change the icons to display on the Home screen as well as its background.
Editing the Home Screen (page 2-13)
8
Admin
2
Copy Send FAX Custom Box
3 3
Job Box USB Drive FAX Box Internet Browser
5 7
6
* The appearance may differ from your actual screen, depending on your configuration and option
settings.
NOTE
You can also switch views by touching the screen and moving
the finger sideways (i.e. swiping).
Admin
2 1 2
Status/ Device Language Paper Wi-Fi Direct System Help Program
Job Cancel Information Settings Menu
Status mm0101_02
5 Status Icon (Error) The icon is displayed during network startup or error.
6 Status Icon (Wi-Fi) The icon " " is displayed when Wi-Fi is connected. When Wi-
Fi is not connected, " " is displayed.
Status Icon (Security " " is displayed when the security level is set at [Low].
level: Low)
2-12
Installing and Setting up the Machine > Touch Panel
7 Status Icon (Remote " " is displayed when using the remote operation.
operation)
Status Icon (Security " " is displayed while the data is overwriting.
information) " " is displayed if remaining data is in HDD.
" " is displayed if remaining data is not in HDD.
8 Login User Name Displays the logged-in user name. This is displayed when
user login administration is enabled. Selecting "Login User
Name" will display the information of the logged-in user.
NOTE
If user login administration is enabled, you can only change the settings by logging in
with administrator privileges or as a user with privileges to configure this setting. The
factory default login user name and login password are set as shown below.
Item Description
*1 Displays a maximum of 59 function icons including the installed applications and the
functions that can be used when options are installed.
*2 8 task icons can be displayed.
2-13
Installing and Setting up the Machine > Touch Panel
FAX Box*2 Displays the FAX Box screen. Refer to the FAX
Operation
Guide.
2-14
Installing and Setting up the Machine > Touch Panel
Incoming FAX Displays the Incoming FAX Log Refer to the FAX
Log*2 screen. Operation
Guide.
Outgoing FAX Displays the Outgoing FAX Log
Log*2 screen.
NOTE
To use this function, set "Message
Board" to [ON] in System Menu.
Embedded Web Server RX
User Guide
2-15
Installing and Setting up the Machine > Touch Panel
NOTE
If user login administration is enabled, you can only change the settings by logging in with
administrator privileges or as a user with privileges to configure this setting. The factory
default login user name and login password are set as shown below.
FAX Box*1 Displays the FAX Box screen. Refer to the FAX
Operation
Guide.
FAX Memory RX Displays the FAX Memory RX Box screen. Refer to the FAX
Box*1 Operation
Guide.
2-16
Installing and Setting up the Machine > Touch Panel
Send to Me (E-mail)*2 Displays the Send screen. The E-mail page 5-39
address of the logged-in user is set as the
destination.
Send to Me from Box Displays the Custom Box screen. The E- page 5-61
(E-mail)*2 mail address of the logged-in user is set as
the destination.
2-17
Installing and Setting up the Machine > Touch Panel
Tab Description
FAX*2 You can check the local fax number, local fax name,
local fax ID and other fax information.
Soft Ver/Capability/Security You can check the software version and performance,
and security information on the machine.
Option You can check information on the options that are used.
Original : A4
Paper Zoom Density 3 Displays the Quick Setup screen.
2
Selection
2-18
Installing and Setting up the Machine > Touch Panel
Functions Key
To configure the settings for functions, select the tab and press the function key.
Copies
Preview
Original : A4
Zoom : 100% ID Card Copy
Paper : A4
c0102
Home Copy
FAX Printer
Report
1/2
Close
Status m01010101
2-19
Installing and Setting up the Machine > Touch Panel
NOTE
If a key that you wish to use is grayed out, the settings of the previous user may still be in effect. In this case, select
the [Reset] key and try again.
If the key is still grayed out after the [Reset] key is selected, it is possible that you are prohibited from using the
function by user control. Check with the administrator of the machine.
Original Preview
You can display a preview image of the scanned document on the panel.
NOTE
• To view a preview of an image stored in a Custom Box, refer to the following:
Previewing Documents/Checking Document Details (page 5-55)
• The procedure described here is for copying a single-page original.
2-20
Installing and Setting up the Machine > Touch Panel
2 Select [Detail].
You can check the finished image in greater detail.
Press Start key to start printing. Copies
1 2 3
No.
move the range of display.
100%
2 Zoom out.
Size : A4
Status
Close
c0301
4
2-21
Installing and Setting up the Machine > Touch Panel
Duplex Printing
Settings for duplex printing appear.
Preview: 2015101010574501
No.
When printing duplex, it is
100%
possible to switch between the
Size : A4 front side and the reverse side.
Density : Normal 0
1/6
Binding : Left/Right
Image
Close
Status C0301_02
NOTE
• To change the quality or the layout, select [Cancel] or the [Stop] key.
Change the settings and select [Preview] again to see a preview image with the new
settings.
• Depending on the function you are using, even if you scan a multi-page original, only
the first page can be previewed.
3 If there is no problem with the preview image, press the [Start] key.
Copying starts.
Function Description
Drag With the finger touching the touch panel, slide the finger to move the position of the
displayed preview.
Pinch in With two fingers touching the touch panel, widen or tighten the space between the two
Pinch out fingers to zoom in and out on the view.
2-22
Installing and Setting up the Machine > Touch Panel
Entering Numbers
When entering numbers, numeric keys appear on the touch panel if you select the [Numeric Keypad] key on the touch
panel or select the area in which the number is entered.
1 Enter numbers and symbols.
5
2 Clear entered numbers.
3 Quick No. Search key.
Using the Quick No. Search Key (page 2-24)
4 Entry by numeric keys is confirmed.
Using the Enter Key (page 2-24)
NOTE
• Numeric keys do not appear on the touch panel if an optional numeric keypad is installed.
• Alphabetic letters appear on numeric keys if an optional FAX Kit is installed. Alphabetic letters are used to
remember the FAX number.
Copies Copies
Quick Setup Org./Paper/ Image Quality Layout/Edit Advanced Program Quick Setup Org./Paper/ Image Quality Layout/Edit Advanced Program
Finishing Setup Finishing Setup
c010101_01 c010101_01
Destination Quick Setup Org./Sending Color/ Advanced Program Destination Quick Setup Org./Sending Color/ Advanced Program
Data Format Image Quality Setup Data Format Image Quality Setup
Status s0101_05 Status s0101_03
2-23
Installing and Setting up the Machine > Touch Panel
Addr Book Address Book Sort Name Addr Book Address Book Sort Name
Dest. No. Type Name Detail Dest. No. Type Name Detail
Detail Detail
0005 Group3 Member: 4 0005 Group3
ABC DEF GHI JKL MNO PQRS TUV WXYZ 0-9 ABC DEF GHI JKL Cancel OK
E-mail Folder FAX i-FAX Group E-mail Folder FAX i-FAX Group
Cancel OK Cancel OK
NOTE
• Moving your finger while touching the top of the numeric keypad enables you to freely move to any key. (Drag
operation)
Copies
• For copy and print screens, you can set numeric keys to be displayed in advance. In addition, you can select the
layout for numeric keys that are used on the application.
Numeric Keypad Settings (page 8-33)
Enter Destination.
Destination Detail Address
[email protected] Book
A OFFICE
E-mail
B OFFICE 1/1 Addr Entry
Enter One Touch key number
C OFFICE using # keys.
Folder Path
(0001 - 1000) Entry
On Hook Direct
0011
FAX No.
Entry
0001
AAA BBB i-FAX
Cancel OK Addr Entry
2-24
Installing and Setting up the Machine > Touch Panel
Help Screen
If you have difficulty operating the machine, you can check how to operate it using the touch panel.
To show the Help screen for a function, select [Help] on the panel of the setting screen of that function. The Help screen
shows explanations of functions and how to use them.
Paper Selection
Auto
Cassette
A4
Plain
A3 A4 MP Tray
Plain Plain ---
Original : A4 Plain
Zoom : 100% B4
Plain MP Tray
Paper : A4
A5
Preview Proof Copy Plain Paper Set.
Status c020102
Setting Procedure
1. Press [Org./Paper/Finishing].
2. Press [Paper Selection].
1/2
Status h0201020201_02
2-25
Installing and Setting up the Machine > Touch Panel
NOTE
• This function can be used on the Home screen and on the functions that were registered via Copy/Send Quick
Setup.
• To configure any functions that are not displayed on the Accessibility screen, you need to return to the original view.
Select the [Accessibility Display] key again.
While using the Copy or Send functions, select the [Accessibility Display] key.
Large keys and text appear on the touch panel.
Copies
Accessibility
Display
Status
uc0102
You can also control the screen using the numeric key corresponding to the number in circle. (Example: Press the [2]
key on the numeric key pad to zoom.)
Control the functions according to the display on the screen.
2-26
Installing and Setting up the Machine > Login/Logout
Login/Logout
If you are setting a function that requires administrator rights, or if user login administration is enabled, you must enter
your login user name and login password.
NOTE
The factory default login user name and login password are set as shown below.
You will be unable to login if you forget your login user name or login password. In this event, login with administrator
privileges and change your login user name or login password.
Login
Normal login
1 Login
User Name abcdef
# Keys
2 Login
Password ********
# Keys
3
Cancel Login
Status lg0301
NOTE
• [# Keys] can be selected to enter the number with the numeric keys on the operation
panel.
• If [Network Authentication] is selected as the user authentication method,
authentication destinations are displayed and either [Local] or [Network] can be
selected as the authentication destination.
• To authenticate by ID card, select [ID Card Login].
2 Select [Login].
2-27
Installing and Setting up the Machine > Login/Logout
Simple Login
01 02 03 No.
A B C
04 05 06
07 08 09 1/2
10 11 12 Keyboard
Login
Status lg0601
If this screen is displayed during operations, select a user and log in.
NOTE
If a user password is required, an input screen will be displayed.
Logout
Authentic./
Logout
System Menu
/Counter
Interrupt
To logout from the machine, select the [Authentication/Logout] key to return to the login user
name/login password entry screen.
Users are automatically logged out in the following circumstances:
• When the machine enters the sleep state.
• When the auto panel reset function is activated.
2-28
Installing and Setting up the Machine > Default Settings of the Machine
NOTE
For settings that are configurable from System Menu, refer to the following:
Setup and Registration (System Menu) (page 8-1)
NOTE
• To make changes after this initial configuration, refer to the following:
Date/Timer/Energy Saver (page 8-76)
• The correct time can be periodically set by obtaining the time from the network time server.
Embedded Web Server RX User Guide
Item Description
Time Zone Set the time difference from GMT. Choose the nearest listed
location from the list. If you select a region that utilizes summer
time, configure settings for summer time.
Date/Time Set the date and time for the location where you use the machine.
If you perform Send as E-mail, the date and time set here will be
displayed on the header.
Value: Year (2000 to 2035), Month (1 to 12), Day (1 to 31),
Hour (00 to 23), Minute (00 to 59), Second (00 to 59)
Date Format Select the display format of year, month, and date. The year is
displayed in Western notation.
Value: Month/Day/Year, Day/Month/Year, Year/Month/Day
2-29
Installing and Setting up the Machine > Network Setup
Network Setup
Configuring the Wired Network
The machine is equipped with network interface, which is compatible with network protocols such as TCP/IP (IPv4),
TCP/IP (IPv6), NetBEUI, and IPSec. It enables network printing on the Windows, Macintosh, UNIX and other platforms.
Set up TCP/IP (IPv4) to connect to the Windows network.
Be sure to connect the network cable before configuring the settings.
Connecting LAN Cable (page 2-7)
Configuring the Connection Use Quick Setup Wizard when configuring the Quick Setup Wizard (page 2-
from the Operation Panel network in a wizard-style screen, without setting 43)
on This Machine individually in System menu.
Configuring Connections For the equipped network interface, the Embedded Web Server RX
on the Web Page connection can be set by using Embedded Web User Guide
Server RX. For the optional IB-50, the connection IB-50 Operation Guide
can be set by using the dedicated Web page.
Setting the Connection by This is the setup tool included in the CD of IB-50. You IB-50 Operation Guide
Using the Setup Utility of can use it on Windows.
IB-50
NOTE
When you want to switch to the network interface other than Wired (default) after installing an optional Network
Interface Kit (IB-50) and a Wireless Network Interface Kit (IB-35 or IB-51), select the desired setting on "Primary
Network (Client)".
Primary Network (Client) (page 8-68)
NOTE
If user login administration is enabled, you can only change the settings by logging in with administrator privileges or
as a user with privileges to configure this setting.
If user login administration is disabled, the user authentication screen appears. Enter a login user name and
password, and select [Login].
The factory default login user name and login password are set as shown below.
2-30
Installing and Setting up the Machine > Network Setup
IPv4 setting
IMPORTANT
After changing the setting, restart the network from System Menu, or turn the
machine OFF and then ON.
Restart Network (page 8-64)
NOTE
Ask your network administrator for the IP address in advance, and have it ready when you
configure this setting.
2-31
Installing and Setting up the Machine > Network Setup
Configuring the Connection Use Quick Setup Wizard when configuring the Quick Setup Wizard (page 2-
from the Operation Panel network in a wizard-style screen, without setting 43)
on This Machine individually in System menu.
Use Wi-Fi Settings or Wireless Network to configure Wi-Fi Settings (page 8-52)
the network in details from System menu. Wireless Network (page 8-66)
Setting the Connection by This is the tool included in the Product Library. You Setting the Connection by
Using the Wi-Fi Setup Tool can configure the connection according to the Using the Wi-Fi Setup Tool
instructions provided by the wizard. (page 2-32)
Setting the Connection by This is the setup tool included in the CD of IB-51. You IB-51 Operation Guide
Using the Setup Utility of can use it on both Windows and Mac OS.
IB-51
Configuring Connections For the IB-35, the connection can be set from Embedded Web Server RX
on the Web Page the Embedded Web Server RX. User Guide
For the IB-51, the connection can be set on the IB-51 Operation Guide
dedicated Web page.
NOTE
• The Wireless Network Interface Kit (IB-35) is an option for some models and the Wireless Network Interface Kit
(IB-51) is a standard option. Contact your dealer or our sales or service representatives for detail.
IB-35 "Wireless Network Interface Kit" (page 11-6)
IB-51 "Wireless Network Interface Kit" (page 11-6)
• When you want to switch to the network interface other than Wired (default) after installing an optional Network
Interface Kit (IB-50) and a Wireless Network Interface Kit (IB-35 or IB-51), select the desired setting on "Primary
Network (Client)".
Primary Network (Client) (page 8-68)
NOTE
• Before using the Wi-Fi Setup Tool, connect your computer to this machine locally with wired LAN cable or Wi-Fi
Direct.
• To use Wi-Fi Direct, confirm that the Wi-Fi Direct is enabled (Wi-Fi Direct is set to [ON]) and Restart Network from
the operation panel, before your computer will be connected to this machine with Wi-Fi Direct.
• To use a wired LAN cable directly connected to the machine, the Auto-IP (Link-local) address will be assigned to the
machine and the computer. This machine applies Auto-IP as the default settings.
• Configure the settings on the operation panel if your computer supports WPS.
Wi-Fi Settings (page 8-52)
Wireless Network (page 8-66)
2-32
Installing and Setting up the Machine > Network Setup
NOTE
• Installation on Windows must be done by a user logged on with administrator privileges.
• If the "Welcome to the Found New Hardware Wizard" dialog box displays, select
[Cancel].
• If the autorun screen is displayed, click [Run setup.exe].
• If the user account management window appears, click [Yes] ([Allow]).
1 2
After clicking [Accept] in the license dialog box, depending on your region, a message about
resource and energy conservation may appear. Read the message and click [OK].
4 Select [Maintenance].
2-33
Installing and Setting up the Machine > Network Setup
NOTE
• Only one machine can be searched using Wi-Fi Setup Tool. It may take times to search
the machine.
• If the machine is not detected, select [Advanced setup] > [Next]. Select [Express] or
[Custom] as device discovery method and specify the IP address or host name to
search the machine.
5 Select [Use the device settings.] on [Authentication mode], and enter the login user
name and password. Login user name and Password are both Admin.
2-34
Installing and Setting up the Machine > Network Setup
NOTE
• Installation on Windows must be done by a user logged on with administrator privileges.
• If the "Welcome to the Found New Hardware Wizard" dialog box displays, select
[Cancel].
• If the autorun screen is displayed, click [Run setup.exe].
• If the user account management window appears, click [Yes] ([Allow]).
1 2
After clicking [Accept] in the license dialog box, depending on your region, a message about
resource and energy conservation may appear. Read the message and click [OK].
7 Select [Maintenance].
5 Select [Use the device settings.] on [Authentication mode], and enter the login user
name and password. Login user name and Password are both Admin.
2-35
Installing and Setting up the Machine > Network Setup
NOTE
To use Wi-Fi Direct, Wireless Network Interface Kit (IB-35) must be installed in the machine.
The Wireless Network Interface Kit (IB-35) is an option for some models. Contact your dealer or our sales or service
representatives for detail.
IB-35 "Wireless Network Interface Kit" (page 11-6)
2-36
Installing and Setting up the Machine > Network Setup
2 Select the network name (SSID) appeared in step 5 from the list.
IMPORTANT
You can connect up to three handheld devices at the same time using Wi-Fi Direct setting. When the devices
that support Wi-Fi Direct are connected, if you want to connect other device, disconnect the already-
connected devices from the network. The disconnection methods are as follows:
• Disconnect the network from the computer or handheld computer
• Disconnecting all devices from the network on the operation panel
Select [Home] ( ) key > [Wi-Fi Direct] > [Connected Device List] > [Disconnect All]
• Configuring auto disconnecting time from the System menu
Wi-Fi Direct Settings (page 8-51)
• Configuring auto disconnecting time from the Embedded Web Server RX
Embedded Web Server RX User Guide
2-37
Installing and Setting up the Machine > Network Setup
Configuring NFC
NFC (Near Field Communication) is the internal standard for near field communication in which the data communication
distance is limited to approximately 10 cm. Establishing data communication simply requires you to show the handheld
device supporting NFC to this machine.
The configuration methods are as follows:
2-38
Installing and Setting up the Machine > Motion Sensor
Motion Sensor
This model detects that the person is approaching and recover from low power mode or sleep mode automatically.
The range of detection of the Motion Sensor can be switched using the lever on the front.
2-39
Installing and Setting up the Machine > Energy Saver Function
NOTE
If the Low Power Timer is equal to the Sleep Timer, a Sleep mode is preceded.
2-40
Installing and Setting up the Machine > Energy Saver Function
Sleep
To enter Sleep, select the [Energy Saver] key. Touch panel and all indicators on the operation panel will go out to save
a maximum amount of power except the Energy Saver indicator. This status is referred to as Sleep.
If print data is received during Sleep, the machine automatically wakes up and starts printing.
Also when fax data arrives while the machine is in Sleep, the machine automatically wakes up and starts printing.
Auto Sleep
Auto Sleep automatically switches the machine into Sleep if left idle for a preset time.
The amount of time before entering Sleep is as follows.
• 10 minutes (default setting).
To change the preset sleep time, refer to the following:
Energy Saver Setup (page 2-44)
NOTE
If the Low Power Timer is equal to the Sleep Timer, a Sleep Mode is preceded.
2-41
Installing and Setting up the Machine > Energy Saver Function
NOTE
If the optional Network Interface Kit is installed, Energy Saver cannot be specified.
For more information on Sleep Level (Energy Saver) Mode settings, refer to the following:
Energy Saver Setup (page 2-44)
2-42
Installing and Setting up the Machine > Quick Setup Wizard
FAX Setup Configures basic fax settings. This function is displayed when the optional FAX Kit
is installed.
FAX Operation Guide
E-mail Setup Set SMTP server name and sender address to enable mail sending.
2-43
Installing and Setting up the Machine > Quick Setup Wizard
Energy Saver Setup Configures sleep mode and low power mode.
*1 This is displayed when the option of two FAX Kits has been installed.
*2 Inch version only.
*3 DRD reception mode is available for some countries.
*4 This setting does not appear in some regions.
*5 This function is displayed when [Paper Source Settings] is set to [Specify by Media Type].
*6 This function is displayed when [Paper Source Settings] is set to [Specify by Cassette].
*7 This function is displayed when the optional Job Separator, Mailbox or 4,000-Sheet Finisher is installed. When an
Inner Finisher or a 1,000-Sheet Finisher is installed with the machine, this function is not displayed.
*8 This function is displayed when the Wireless Network Interface Kit (IB-35) is installed.
The Wireless Network Interface Kit is an option for some models. Contact your dealer or our sales or service
representatives for detail.
IB-35 "Wireless Network Interface Kit" (page 11-6)
*9 This function is displayed when [Network Selection] is set to [Wi-Fi].
*10 This function is displayed when [Network Selection] is set to [Wired Network].
*11 This function is displayed when [DHCP] is set to [Off].
*12 This function is displayed when [Weekly Timer] is set to [On].
NOTE
If the user authentication screen appears, enter your login user name and login password and select [Login].
The factory default login user name and login password are set as shown below.
2-44
Installing and Setting up the Machine > Quick Setup Wizard
2 Select a function.
NOTE
If you experience difficulty configuring the settings, refer to the following:
Help Screen (page 2-25)
Control Description
Skip Advances to the next item without setting the current item.
2-45
Installing and Setting up the Machine > Installing Software
Installing Software
Install appropriate software on your PC from the included DVD (Product Library) if you want to use the printer function of
this machine or perform TWAIN / WIA transmission or Network FAX transmission from your PC.
Express
Software Description
Install
Printing System Driver This driver enables files on a computer to be printed by the machine.
Multiple page description languages (PCL XL, KPDL, etc.) are
supported by a single driver. This Printing System Driver allows you
to take full advantage of the features of the machine.
Use this driver to create PDF files.
Printing System (XPS) Driver This Printing System Driver supports the XPS (XML Paper ―
Specification) format developed by Microsoft Corporation.
KPDL mini-driver/PCL mini- This is a Microsoft MiniDriver that supports PCL and KPDL. There ―
driver are some restrictions on the machine features and option features
that can be used with this driver.
TWAIN Driver This driver enables scanning on the machine using a TWAIN-
compliant software application.
Network Print Monitor This is a utility that enables monitoring of the machine on the ―
network.
Status Monitor This is a utility that monitors the printer status and provides an
ongoing reporting function.
File Management Utility This makes it possible to send and save a scanned document to a ―
specified network folder.
Network Tool for Direct Printing This makes it possible to print a PDF file without starting Adobe ―
Acrobat/Reader.
FONTS These are display fonts that enable the machine's built-in fonts to be
used in a software application.
NOTE
• Installation on Windows must be done by a user logged on with administrator privileges.
• The optional FAX Kit is required in order to make use of fax functionality.
2-46
Installing and Setting up the Machine > Installing Software
NOTE
• Installation on Windows must be done by a user logged on with administrator privileges.
• If the "Welcome to the Found New Hardware Wizard" dialog box displays, select
[Cancel].
• If the autorun screen is displayed, click [Run setup.exe].
• If the user account management window appears, click [Yes] ([Allow]).
1 2
After clicking [Accept] in the license dialog box, depending on your region, a message about
resource and energy conservation may appear. Read the message and click [OK].
After installation is successful, "Set Duplex as default" appears and is selected on the Finished
page. The driver is set to duplex mode by default.
2-47
Installing and Setting up the Machine > Installing Software
You can also select [Use host name for port name] and set to use the host name of the
standard TCP/IP port. (A USB connection cannot be used.)
When you click [Install], a screen asking for your cooperation with data collection will be
displayed. Select one of the answer choices and click [OK].
IMPORTANT
If Wi-Fi or Wi-Fi Direct is enabled, be sure to specify the IP address for the port name.
Installation may fail if the host name is specified.
NOTE
• The machine cannot be detected unless it is on. If the computer fails to detect the
machine, verify that it is connected to the computer via a network or USB cable and that it
is turned on and click (Reload).
• If the Windows security window appears, click [Install this driver software anyway].
• To install Status Monitor on Windows versions preceding Windows 8.1, it is necessary to
install Microsoft .NET Framework 4.0 beforehand.
2-48
Installing and Setting up the Machine > Installing Software
When "Your software is ready to use" appears, you can use the software. To print a test
page, click the "Print a test page" checkbox and select the machine.
Click [Finish] to exit the wizard.
If a system restart message appears, restart the computer by following the screen
prompts. This completes the Printing System Driver installation procedure.
If you are installing the TWAIN driver, continue by configuring the following:
Custom Install
The following procedure is an example for installing the software in Windows 8.1 using [Custom Install].
NOTE
• Installation on Windows must be done by a user logged on with administrator privileges.
• If the "Welcome to the Found New Hardware Wizard" dialog box displays, select
[Cancel].
• If the autorun screen is displayed, click [Run setup.exe].
• If the user account management window appears, click [Yes] ([Allow]).
1 2
After clicking [Accept] in the license dialog box, depending on your region, a message about
resource and energy conservation may appear. Read the message and click [OK].
After installation is successful, "Set Duplex as default" appears and is selected on the Finished
page. The driver is set to duplex mode by default.
2-49
Installing and Setting up the Machine > Installing Software
1
2
IMPORTANT
If Wi-Fi or Wi-Fi Direct is enabled, be sure to specify the IP address for the port
name. Installation may fail if the host name is specified.
NOTE
• The machine cannot be detected unless it is on. If the computer fails to detect the
machine, verify that it is connected to the computer via a network or USB cable and
that it is turned on and click (Reload).
• If the desired device does not appear, select [Add custom device] to directly select
the device.
2
3
2-50
Installing and Setting up the Machine > Installing Software
2 3
4 Click [Install].
When you click [Install], a screen asking for your cooperation with data collection will be
displayed. Select one of the answer choices and click [OK].
NOTE
To install Status Monitor on Windows versions preceding Windows 8.1, it is necessary to
install Microsoft .NET Framework 4.0 beforehand.
2-51
Installing and Setting up the Machine > Installing Software
When "Your software is ready to use" appears, you can use the software. To print a test
page, click the "Print a test page" checkbox and select the machine.
Click [Finish] to exit the wizard.
If a system restart message appears, restart the computer by following the screen
prompts. This completes the Printing System Driver installation procedure.
If you are installing the TWAIN driver, continue by configuring the following:
Setting TWAIN Driver (page 2-56)
2-52
Installing and Setting up the Machine > Installing Software
NOTE
Uninstallation on Windows must be done by a user logged on with administrator privileges.
NOTE
In Windows 7, click [Start] button on the Windows and then select [All Programs],
[Olivetti], and [Uninstall Olivetti Product Library] to display the Uninstall Wizard.
3 Finish uninstalling.
If a system restart message appears, restart the computer by following the screen prompts.
This completes the software uninstallation procedure.
NOTE
• The software can also be uninstalled using the Product Library.
• In the Product Library screen, click [Uninstall], and follow the on-screen instructions to
uninstall the software.
2-53
Installing and Setting up the Machine > Installing Software
NOTE
• Installation on Mac OS must be done by a user logged on with administrator privileges.
• When printing from a Macintosh computer, set the machine's emulation to [KPDL] or [KPDL(Auto)].
Printer (page 8-42)
• If connecting by Bonjour, enable Bonjour in the machine's network settings.
Bonjour (page 8-58)
• In the Authenticate screen, enter the name and password used to log in to the operating system.
• When printing via AirPrint, you do not have to install the software.
1 2
Install the Printing System Driver as directed by the instructions in the installation
software. This completes the Printing System Driver installation.
If a USB connection is used, the machine is automatically recognized and connected.
If an IP connection is used, the settings below are required.
2-54
Installing and Setting up the Machine > Installing Software
1
2
2 Select [Default] and click the item that appears in "Name" and then select the driver in
"Use".
1
2
3
4
NOTE
When using an IP connection, click the IP icon for an IP connection and then enter the
host name or IP address. The number entered in "Address" will automatically appear in
"Name". Change if needed.
2-55
Installing and Setting up the Machine > Installing Software
NOTE
In Windows 7, select [Start] button on the Windows, [All Programs], [Olivetti] and then
[TWAIN Driver Setting]. TWAIN Driver screen appears.
2 Click [Add].
1
2 4
3
6
1 Enter the machine name.
2 Select this machine from the list.
3 Enter the machine's IP address or host name.
4 Set units of measurement.
5 When using SSL, select the checkbox beside SSL.
6 Click [OK].
NOTE
When the machine's IP address or host name is unknown, contact Administrator.
2-56
Installing and Setting up the Machine > Installing Software
3 Finish registering.
NOTE
Click [Delete] to delete the added machine. Click [Edit] to change names.
2-57
Installing and Setting up the Machine > Installing Software
NOTE
In Windows 7, click [Start] button on the Windows and enter [Scanner] in [Program and
File Search]. Click [View scanners and cameras] in the search list then the Scanners
and Cameras screen appears.
2 Select the same name as this machine from WIA Drivers, and click [Properties].
1
2
1
2
3
4
5
2-58
Installing and Setting up the Machine > Checking the Counter
2-59
Installing and Setting up the Machine > Additional Preparations for the Administrator
Sending Documents to a PC
To Send to a Shared Folder (Send to Folder (SMB))
To send a document that has been loaded, you need to create a shared folder to receive the document on your
computer.
Preparation for Sending a Document to a Shared Folder in a PC (page 3-22)
NOTE
Protection of confidential information by TPM
This product is equipped with the security chip called TPM (Trusted Platform Module). The encryption key used to
encrypt confidential information on this machine is stored in a dedicated storage area on the TPM chip. Since this
storage area cannot be read from outside the TPM, confidential information can be safely protected.
Restrict the basic functions that can be Local Authorization page 9-18
used.
Group Authorization Set. page 9-19
2-60
Installing and Setting up the Machine > Additional Preparations for the Administrator
Prevent another user from handling the Custom Box page 5-51
documents stored in the machine.
Prevent the data stored in the machine Data Overwrite*1 Refer to the Data
from being leaked. Encryption/Overwrite
Encryption*1 Operation Guide.
Completely delete the data on the machine Data Sanitization page 8-71
before disposing of the machine.
Record the operation history of users. Login History Settings page 8-48
Protect the transmission from interception IPP over SSL page 8-60
and wiretapping.
HTTPS page 8-60
2-61
Installing and Setting up the Machine > Embedded Web Server RX
NOTE
To fully access the features of the Embedded Web Server RX pages, enter the User Name and Password and click
[Login]. Entering the predefined administrator password allows the user to access all pages, including Document
Box, Address Book, and Settings on the navigation menu. The factory default setting for the default user with
administrator privileges is shown below. (Upper case and lower case letters are distinguished (case sensitive).)
Login User Name: Admin
Login Password: Admin
Settings that the administrator and general users can configure in Embedded Web Server RX are as follows.
Administ- General
Setting Description
rator User
Job Status Displays all device information, including print and scan jobs, storing
jobs, scheduled jobs, and job log history.
*1
Document Box Add or delete document boxes, or delete documents within a document
box.
*1
Address Book Create, edit, or delete addresses and address groups.
*1 The logged in user may not be able to configure some settings, depending on the permissions of the user.
NOTE
The optional FAX Kit is required in order to make use of fax functionality.
Here, information on the FAX settings has been omitted.
FAX Operation Guide
2-62
Installing and Setting up the Machine > Embedded Web Server RX
2 In the address or location bar, enter the machine's IP address or the host name.
Click in the following order to check the machine's IP address and the host name.
[Device Information] in the home screen > [Identification/Wired Network]
Examples: https://10.180.81.3/ (for IP address)
https://MFP001 (if the host name is "MFP001")
The web page displays basic information about the machine and Embedded Web Server RX
as well as their current status.
NOTE
If the screen "There is a problem with this website's security certificate." is displayed,
configure the certificate.
Embedded Web Server RX User Guide
You can also continue the operation without configuring the certificate.
NOTE
To fully access the features of the Embedded Web Server RX pages, enter the User Name and
Password and click [Login]. Entering the predefined administrator password allows the user to
access all pages, including Document Box, Address Book, and Settings on the navigation menu.
The factory default setting for the default user with administrator privileges is shown below.
(Upper case and lower case letters are distinguished (case sensitive).)
Login User Name: Admin
Login Password: Admin
2-63
Installing and Setting up the Machine > Embedded Web Server RX
2 In the address or location bar, enter the machine's IP address or the host name.
Click in the following order to check the machine's IP address and the host name.
[Device Information] in the home screen > [Identification/Wired Network]
The factory default setting for the default user with administrator privileges is shown below.
(Upper case and lower case letters are distinguished (case sensitive).)
Login User Name: Admin
Login Password: Admin
NOTE
For details on settings related to certificates, refer to the following:
Embedded Web Server RX User Guide
2-64
Installing and Setting up the Machine > Embedded Web Server RX
2 In the address or location bar, enter the machine's IP address or the host name.
Click in the following order to check the machine's IP address and the host name.
[Device Information] in the home screen > [Identification/Wired Network]
The factory default setting for the default user with administrator privileges is shown below.
(Upper case and lower case letters are distinguished (case sensitive).)
Login User Name: Admin
Login Password: Admin
IMPORTANT
After changing the setting, restart the network or turn the machine OFF and then ON.
To restart the network interface card, click [Reset] in the [Management Settings]
menu, and then click [Restart Network] in "Restart".
2-65
Installing and Setting up the Machine > Embedded Web Server RX
E-mail Settings
By configuring the SMTP settings, it is possible to send the images scanned by the machine as E-mail attachments and
to send E-mail notices when jobs have been completed.
To use this function, this machine must be connected to a mail server using the SMTP protocol.
In addition, configure the following.
• SMTP settings
Item: "SMTP Protocol" and "SMTP Server Name" in "SMTP"
• The sender address when the machine sends E-mails
Item: "Sender Address" in "E-mail Send Settings"
• The setting to limit the size of E-mails
Item: "E-mail Size Limit" in "E-mail Send Settings"
The procedure for specifying the SMTP settings is explained below.
2 In the address or location bar, enter the machine's IP address or the host name.
Click in the following order to check the machine's IP address and the host name.
[Device Information] in the home screen > [Identification/Wired Network]
The factory default setting for the default user with administrator privileges is shown below.
(Upper case and lower case letters are distinguished (case sensitive).)
Login User Name: Admin
Login Password: Admin
2-66
Installing and Setting up the Machine > Embedded Web Server RX
2-67
Installing and Setting up the Machine > Embedded Web Server RX
Setting Description
SMTP Protocol Displays the SMTP protocol settings. Check that "SMTP Protocol" is set to
[On]. If [Off] is set, click [Protocol] and set the SMTP protocol to [On].
SMTP Server Name*1 Enter the host name or IP address of the SMTP server.
SMTP Port Number Specify the port number to be used for SMTP. The default port number is 25.
SMTP Server Timeout Set the amount of time to wait before time-out in seconds.
Authentication To use SMTP authentication, enter the user information for authentication.
Protocol
Connection Test Tests to confirm that the E-mail function is operating under the settings without
sending a mail.
Domain Restriction To restrict the domains, click the [Domain List] and enter the domain names of
addresses to be allowed or rejected. Restriction can also be specified by e-mail
address.
POP3 POP3 Protocol You don't need to set the following items when you only enable the function of
sending e-mail from the machine. Set the following items if you want to enable
Check Interval the function of receiving e-mail on the machine.
Run once now Embedded Web Server RX User Guide
Domain Restriction
E-mail E-mail Size Limit Enter the maximum size of E-mail that can be sent in kilobytes. When E-mail
Send size is greater than this value, an error message appears and E-mail sending is
Settings cancelled. Use this setting if you have set E-mail Size Limit for SMTP server. If
not, enter a value of 0 (zero) to enable E-mail sending regardless of the size
limit.
Sender Address*1 Specify the sender address for when the machine sends E-mails, such as the
machine administrator, so that a reply or non-delivery report will go to a person
rather than to the machine. The sender address must be entered correctly for
SMTP authentication. The maximum length of the sender address is 256
characters.
Signature Enter the signature. The signature is free form text that will appear at the end of
the E-mail body. It is often used for further identification of the machine. The
maximum length of the signature is 512 characters.
Function Defaults Change the function default settings in [Common/Job Default Settings] page.
5 Click [Submit].
2-68
Installing and Setting up the Machine > Embedded Web Server RX
Registering Destinations
2 In the address or location bar, enter the machine's IP address or the host name.
Click in the following order to check the machine's IP address and the host name.
[Device Information] in the home screen > [Identification/Wired Network]
The factory default setting for the default user with administrator privileges is shown below.
(Upper case and lower case letters are distinguished (case sensitive).)
Login User Name: Admin
Login Password: Admin
3
1
2
5 Click [Add].
2 Click [Submit].
2-69
Installing and Setting up the Machine > Embedded Web Server RX
2 In the address or location bar, enter the machine's IP address or the host name.
Click in the following order to check the machine's IP address and the host name.
[Device Information] in the home screen > [Identification/Wired Network]
1
2
4 Click [Add].
2 Click [Submit].
2-70
Installing and Setting up the Machine > Embedded Web Server RX
2 In the address or location bar, enter the machine's IP address or the host name.
Click in the following order to check the machine's IP address and the host name.
[Device Information] in the home screen > [Identification/Wired Network]
1
2
3
4 Click the number or name of the Custom Box in which the document is stored.
1
1 Select the document you wish to print.
Select the checkbox of the document to be printed.
2 Click [Print].
2-71
Installing and Setting up the Machine > Transferring Data from Our Other Products
2 Create a backup.
1 Right-click on the model name from which you want to back up the Address Book, and
select [Advanced] - [Set multiple devices].
2-72
Installing and Setting up the Machine > Transferring Data from Our Other Products
5 Select [Create from device] and remove the checkmark from [Overwrite settings on
target device], and then click [Next].
2
3
2-73
Installing and Setting up the Machine > Transferring Data from Our Other Products
6 Select the model you want to back up, and click [Next].
NOTE
If the "Admin Login" screen appears, enter the "Admin Login" and "Login Password", and
then click [OK]. The default settings are as follows (Upper case and lower case letters
are distinguished (case sensitive)).
Login User Name: Admin
Login Password: Admin
8 Specify the location to save the file, enter the file name, and then click [Save].
For "Save as type", make sure to select "XML File".
2-74
Installing and Setting up the Machine > Transferring Data from Our Other Products
9 After saving the file, always click [Cancel] to close the screen.
Please note that selecting [Finish] will write the data to the machine's Address Book.
2-75
Installing and Setting up the Machine > Transferring Data from Our Other Products
5 Select [Create from file] and remove the checkmark from [Overwrite settings on target
device], and then click [Next].
2
3
Selecting the [Overwrite settings on target device] checkbox will overwrite the machine's
Address Book from entry No.1.
2-76
Installing and Setting up the Machine > Transferring Data from Our Other Products
6 Click [Browse] and select the backup Address Book file, and then click [Next].
7 Click [Finish].
2-77
3 Preparation before
Use
This chapter explains the following operations.
Loading Paper .................................................................................................................................................... 3-2
Precaution for Loading Paper .................................................................................................................. 3-2
Selecting the Paper Feeder Units ............................................................................................................ 3-3
Loading in Cassette 1 .............................................................................................................................. 3-4
Loading in Cassette 2 .............................................................................................................................. 3-7
Loading Envelopes or Cardstock in the Cassettes ................................................................................ 3-10
Loading in the Large Capacity Feeder ................................................................................................... 3-14
Loading in the Side Feeder .................................................................................................................... 3-16
Precautions for Outputting Paper ..................................................................................................................... 3-18
Paper Stopper ........................................................................................................................................ 3-18
Envelope Stack Guide ........................................................................................................................... 3-18
Stack Level Adjuster .............................................................................................................................. 3-19
Folding Unit (For 4,000-sheet Finisher) ................................................................................................. 3-20
Folding Unit (For 100-sheet Staple Finisher) ......................................................................................... 3-21
Preparation for Sending a Document to a Shared Folder in a PC ................................................................... 3-22
Making a note of the computer name and full computer name .............................................................. 3-22
Making a note of the user name and domain name .............................................................................. 3-22
Creating a Shared Folder, Making a Note of a Shared Folder ............................................................... 3-24
Configuring Windows Firewall ............................................................................................................... 3-27
Scan to Folder Setup Tool for SMB ....................................................................................................... 3-31
Registering Destinations in the Address Book ................................................................................................. 3-35
Adding a Destination (Address Book) .................................................................................................... 3-35
Adding a Destination on One Touch Key (One Touch Key) ................................................................... 3-42
3-1
Preparation before Use > Loading Paper
Loading Paper
Precaution for Loading Paper
When you open a new package of paper, fan the sheets to separate them slightly prior to loading in the following steps.
IMPORTANT
If you copy onto used paper (paper already used for printing), do not use paper that is
stapled or clipped together. This may damage the machine or cause poor image
quality.
NOTE
If you use special paper such as letterhead, paper with holes or paper with pre-prints like
logo or company name, refer to the following:
Paper (page 11-13)
3-2
Preparation before Use > Loading Paper
1
2
3
6
5 4 7
1 Cassette 1 A4-R, A4, A5-R, A5, A6-R, B5-R, B5, B6-R, Plain, Rough, 500 sheets page 3-4
216×340 mm, Letter-R, Letter, Legal, Vellum, Recycled, (80 g/m2)
Statement-R, Executive, Oficio II, Folio, Preprinted, Bond,
16K-R, 16K, ISO B5, Envelope #10, Cardstock, Color,
Envelope #9, Envelope #6, Envelope Prepunched,
Monarch, Envelope DL, Envelope C5, Letterhead,
Hagaki (Cardstock), Oufuku hagaki (Return Envelope, Thick,
postcard), Youkei 4, Youkei 2, Nagagata 3, High Quality,
Custom 1 to 4 Custom 1 to 8
5 Cassette 3 A4, Letter, B5 (Fixed to one of sizes.) Plain, Rough, 1,500 sheets page 3-14
Vellum, Recycled, (80 g/m2)
6 Cassette 4 Preprinted, Bond,
7 Cassette 5 Color, Prepunched, 3,000 sheets page 3-16
Letterhead, Thick, (80 g/m2)
High Quality,
Custom 1 to 8
NOTE
• The number of sheets that can be held varies depending on your environment and paper type.
• You should not use inkjet printer paper or any paper with a special surface coating. (Such paper may cause paper
jams or other faults.)
• For higher quality color printing, use special color paper.
3-3
Preparation before Use > Loading Paper
Loading in Cassette 1
NOTE
Do not pull out more than one cassette at a time.
NOTE
When using Legal size paper, move the paper length guide to the extreme left and lay it
down.
3-4
Preparation before Use > Loading Paper
3 Adjust the position of the paper width guides located on the left
and right sides of the cassette.
4 Load paper.
IMPORTANT
• Load the paper with the print side facing up.
• After removing new paper from its packaging, fan the paper before loading it in the
cassette.
Precaution for Loading Paper (page 3-2)
• Before loading the paper, be sure that it is not curled or folded. Paper that is curled
or folded may cause paper jams.
• Ensure that the loaded paper does not exceed the level indicator (see illustration
above).
• If paper is loaded without adjusting the paper length guide and paper width guide,
the paper may skew or become jammed.
5 Be sure that the paper length and width guides rest securely
against the paper.
If there is a gap, readjust the guides to fit the paper.
3-5
Preparation before Use > Loading Paper
NOTE
Paper size can be automatically detected and selected, refer to the following.
Paper Selection (page 6-19)
Cassette 1 (to 5) (page 8-7)
3-6
Preparation before Use > Loading Paper
Loading in Cassette 2
NOTE
Do not pull out more than one cassette at a time.
NOTE
When using 12×18" size paper, move the paper length guide to the extreme left and lay it
down.
3-7
Preparation before Use > Loading Paper
3 Adjust the position of the paper width guides located on the left
and right sides of the cassette.
NOTE
When using SRA3/12×18", A3, or Ledger paper, adjust the auxiliary guide accordingly.
4 Load paper.
IMPORTANT
• Load the paper with the print side facing up.
• After removing new paper from its packaging, fan the paper before loading it in the
cassette.
Precaution for Loading Paper (page 3-2)
• Before loading the paper, be sure that it is not curled or folded. Paper that is curled
or folded may cause paper jams.
• Ensure that the loaded paper does not exceed the level indicator (see illustration
above).
• If paper is loaded without adjusting the paper length guide and paper width guide,
the paper may skew or become jammed.
3-8
Preparation before Use > Loading Paper
5 Be sure that the paper length and width guides rest securely
against the paper.
If there is a gap, readjust the guides to fit the paper.
NOTE
Paper size can be automatically detected and selected, refer to the following.
Paper Selection (page 6-19)
Cassette 1 (to 5) (page 8-7)
3-9
Preparation before Use > Loading Paper
NOTE
Do not pull out more than one cassette at a time.
3-10
Preparation before Use > Loading Paper
3-11
Preparation before Use > Loading Paper
IMPORTANT
• How to load envelopes (orientation and facing) will differ depending on the type of
envelope. Be sure to load it in correctly, otherwise printing may be done in the
wrong direction or on the wrong face.
• Ensure that loaded envelopes do not exceed the level indicator.
NOTE
Approximately 100 post cards or 30 envelopes can be set.
8 Be sure that the paper length and width guides rest securely
against the paper.
If there is a gap, readjust the guides to fit the paper.
3-12
Preparation before Use > Loading Paper
3-13
Preparation before Use > Loading Paper
2 Load paper.
IMPORTANT
• Load the paper with the print side facing up.
• After removing new paper from its packaging, fan the paper before loading it in the
cassette.
Precaution for Loading Paper (page 3-2)
• Before loading the paper, be sure that it is not curled or folded. Paper that is curled
or folded may cause paper jams.
• Ensure that the loaded paper does not exceed the level indicator.
3-14
Preparation before Use > Loading Paper
3-15
Preparation before Use > Loading Paper
2 Load paper.
IMPORTANT
• Load the paper with the print side facing down.
• After removing new paper from its packaging, fan the paper before loading it in the
cassette.
Precaution for Loading Paper (page 3-2)
• Before loading the paper, be sure that it is not curled or folded. Paper that is curled
or folded may cause paper jams.
• Ensure that the loaded paper does not exceed the level indicator.
3-16
Preparation before Use > Loading Paper
3-17
Preparation before Use > Precautions for Outputting Paper
NOTE
When using the Job Separator for output, you can if needed open the paper stopper on the Job Separator.
3-18
Preparation before Use > Precautions for Outputting Paper
3-19
Preparation before Use > Precautions for Outputting Paper
NOTE
Refer to the following for maximum number for storage of folding unit.
Folding Unit (For 4,000-sheet Finisher) (page 11-30)
3-20
Preparation before Use > Precautions for Outputting Paper
NOTE
Refer to the following for maximum number for storage of folding unit.
Folding Unit (For 100-sheet Staple Finisher) (page 11-31)
3-21
Preparation before Use > Preparation for Sending a Document to a Shared Folder in a PC
NOTE
Log on to Windows with administrator privileges.
NOTE
In Windows 7, from [Start] button on the Windows, select [Computer] and then [System
Properties].
In Windows 10, right-click [Start] button on the Windows and select [System].
3-22
Preparation before Use > Preparation for Sending a Document to a Shared Folder in a PC
3-23
Preparation before Use > Preparation for Sending a Document to a Shared Folder in a PC
NOTE
If there is a workgroup in System Properties, configure the settings below to limit folder access to a specific user or group.
1 Select [Settings] in charms on Desktop, and select [Control Panel], [Appearance and
Personalization], and then [Folder Options].
In Windows 7, from [Start] button on the Windows, select [Control Panel], [Appearance
and Personalization], and then [Folder Options].
In Windows 10, open up a window in File Explorer and select [View], [Options], and then
[Folder Options].
3
Remove the checkmark from [Use Sharing Wizard (Recommended)] in "Advanced
settings".
1 Create a folder.
1 Create a folder on your computer.
For example, create a folder with the name "scannerdata" on the desktop.
3-24
Preparation before Use > Preparation for Sending a Document to a Shared Folder in a PC
2 Right-click the "scannerdata" folder, select [Property], and click [Sharing] and
[Advanced Sharing].
3-25
Preparation before Use > Preparation for Sending a Document to a Shared Folder in a PC
1 If the computer name that you made a note of on page is the same as the domain
name:
If the computer name is not shown in "From this location", click the [Locations] button,
select the computer name, and click the [OK] button.
Example: PC001
If the computer name that you made a note of on page is not the same as the domain
name:
If the text after the first dot (.) in the full computer name that you made a note of does
not appear in "From this location", click the [Locations] button, select the text after the
dot (.), and click the [OK] button.
Example: abcdnet.com
Making a note of the user name and domain name (page 3-22)
2 Enter the user name that you made a note of on page in the text box, and click the [OK]
button.
Also the user name can be made by clicking the [Advanced] button and selecting a
user.
NOTE
"Everyone" gives sharing permission to everyone on the network. To strengthen
security, it is recommended that you select "Everyone" and remove the "Read" [Allow]
checkmark.
6 Click the [OK] button in the "Advanced Sharing" screen to close the screen.
3-26
Preparation before Use > Preparation for Sending a Document to a Shared Folder in a PC
NOTE
Log on to Windows with administrator privileges.
NOTE
If the User Account Control dialog box appears, click the [Continue] button.
3-27
Preparation before Use > Preparation for Sending a Document to a Shared Folder in a PC
2 Add a port.
1 In charms on Desktop, click [Settings], [Control Panel], [System and Security], and
[Check firewall status].
3-28
Preparation before Use > Preparation for Sending a Document to a Shared Folder in a PC
5 Select [Port].
6 Select [TCP] as the port to apply the rule to. Then select [Specific local ports] and enter
"445" then click [Next].
3-29
Preparation before Use > Preparation for Sending a Document to a Shared Folder in a PC
8 Make sure all checkboxes are selected and click the [Next] button.
3-30
Preparation before Use > Preparation for Sending a Document to a Shared Folder in a PC
In Windows 7
1 In Windows 7, from [Start] button on the Windows, select [Control Panel], [System and
Security], and then [Allow a program through Windows Firewall].
If the User Account Control dialog box appears, click the [Continue] button.
In Windows 10
1 In Windows 10, right-click [Start] button on the Windows and select [Control Panel],
[System and Security], and then [Allow an app through Windows Firewall].
If the User Account Control dialog box appears, click the [Continue] button.
NOTE
• Log in to Windows with administrator privileges.
• If user login administration is enabled, log in with administrator privileges or as a user with execution authority.
NOTE
• Installation on Windows must be done by a user logged on with administrator privileges.
• If the "Welcome to the Found New Hardware Wizard" dialog box displays, select
[Cancel].
• If the autorun screen is displayed, click [Run setup.exe].
• If the user account management window appears, click [Yes] ([Allow]).
3-31
Preparation before Use > Preparation for Sending a Document to a Shared Folder in a PC
1 2
After clicking [Accept] in the license dialog box, depending on your region, a message about
resource and energy conservation may appear. Read the message and click [OK].
3 Select [Maintenance].
3-32
Preparation before Use > Preparation for Sending a Document to a Shared Folder in a PC
NOTE
• The machine cannot be detected unless it is on. If the computer fails to detect the
machine, verify that it is connected to the computer via a network cable and that it is
turned on and click [ Refresh].
• If user administration is valid on this machine, the user authentication screen appears.
Log in with administrator privileges or as a user with execution authority.
2 Select [Add].
NOTE
• Clicking on [Edit] after selecting the registered address allows you to change the
content of the registration.
• Unchecking the [Show fax-capable addresses] check-box will hide the address
containing the fax.
Select "Create a new folder on the desktop" and click [OK] to create a new folder on the
desktop. (The default folder name is "Scan".)
NOTE
• Click [Edit] to change the desktop folder name.
• Selecting [Select an existing folder and address] allows you to select an existing
folder that is already set as a shared folder on the PC.
3-33
Preparation before Use > Preparation for Sending a Document to a Shared Folder in a PC
2
3
4
5
6 Click [Close].
8 Select a One Touch Key with no registered destination, and click [Submit].
9 Click [Close].
3-34
Preparation before Use > Registering Destinations in the Address Book
NOTE
• Registering and editing of the Address Book can also be done in Embedded Web Server RX.
Registering Destinations (page 2-69)
• Editing of the Address Book and One Touch Keys can be restricted to administrators.
Edit Restriction (page 8-76)
NOTE
If registering and editing of the Address Book is restricted to administrators, you can edit the Address Book by logging
in with administrator privileges.
Edit Restriction (page 8-76)
Embedded Web Server RX User Guide
2 Use [+] / [-] or the numeric keys to enter an address number (1 to 2500).
To have the number assigned automatically, enter "0000".
NOTE
Address Number is an ID for a destination. You can select any available number out of
2,000 numbers for contacts and 500 numbers for groups.
If you specify an address number that is already in use, an error message appears when
you select [Save] and the number cannot be registered. If you set "0000" as the address
number, the address is registered under the lowest available number.
3 Select [OK].
The screen shown in step 1 reappears.
3-35
Preparation before Use > Registering Destinations in the Address Book
5 Enter the destination name (up to 32 characters) to be displayed on the Address Book and
select [OK].
The screen shown in step 1 reappears.
NOTE
Refer to the following for details on entering characters.
Character Entry Method (page 11-10)
NOTE
Refer to the following for details on entering characters.
Character Entry Method (page 11-10)
3-36
Preparation before Use > Registering Destinations in the Address Book
NOTE
For the computer name, share name, domain name, and user name, enter the information
that you noted when you created the shared folder. For details on creating shared folders,
refer to the following:
Preparation for Sending a Document to a Shared Folder in a PC (page 3-22)
Max. No. of
Item Description
Characters
Login User If the computer name and domain name are the Up to
Name*2 same: 64 characters
User Name
For example: james.smith
If the computer name and domain name are different:
Domain name\User name
For example: abcdnet\james.smith
*1 You can also specify the port number. Enter the following format separated by a colon.
"Host name: port number" or "IP address: port number"
To enter the IPv6 address, enclose the address in brackets [ ].
(Example: [2001:db8:a0b:12f0::10]:445)
If the port number is not specified in [Host Name], the default port number is 445.
*2 When sending a document through an optional network interface (IB-50 or IB-51), "\"
cannot be used. If the computer name is different from the domain name, login user name
needs to be input by using "@."
(Example: james.smith@abcdnet)
To search for a folder on a PC on the network, select "Search Folder from Network" or "Search
Folder by Host Name" [Next].
If you selected "Search Folder from Network" [Next], you can search all PCs on the network
for a destination.
If you pressed "Search Folder by Host Name" [Next], you can enter the "Domain/Workgroup",
and "Host Name" to search PCs on the network for the destination.
A maximum of 500 addresses can be displayed. Select the host name (PC name) that you
want to specify in the screen that appears, and select [Next]. The login user name and login
password entry screen appears.
After you enter the login user name and login password name of the destination PC, the
shared folders appear. Select the folder that you want to specify and select [Next]. The
address of the selected shared folder is set.
Select the folder from the Search Results list.
3-37
Preparation before Use > Registering Destinations in the Address Book
NOTE
• Refer to the following for details on entering characters.
Character Entry Method (page 11-10)
• Select [Connection Test] to check the connection to the server you chose. If the
connection fails, check the entries you made.
Max. No. of
Item Descriptions
Characters
*1 You can also specify the port number. Enter the following format separated by a colon.
"Host name: port number" or "IP address: port number"
To enter the IPv6 address, enclose the address in brackets [ ].
(Example: [2001:db8:a0b:12f0::10]:21)
If the port number is not specified in [Host Name], the default port number is 21.
*2 When the FTP server is based on Linux/UNIX, the path including the sub-folder is
combined by the slash "/" not using the back-slash.
NOTE
• Refer to the following for details on entering characters.
Character Entry Method (page 11-10)
• Select [Connection Test] to check the connection to the FTP server you chose. If the
connection fails, check the entries you made.
NOTE
Refer to the following for registering the One Touch Key.
Adding a Destination on One Touch Key (One Touch Key) (page 3-42)
3-38
Preparation before Use > Registering Destinations in the Address Book
NOTE
To add a group, you need individually added destinations. Register one or more individual destinations as needed
before proceeding. Up to 100 destinations for the E-mail, 500 destinations for the FAX, 100 destinations for the i-FAX,
and a total of 10 destinations for the FTP and SMB can be registered per group.
2 Use [+] / [-] or the numeric keys to enter an address number (1 to 2,500).
To have the number assigned automatically, set "0000".
NOTE
• Address Number is an ID for a group. You can select any available number out of
2,000 numbers for contacts and 500 numbers for groups.
• If you specify an address number that is already in use, an error message appears
when you select [Save] and the number cannot be registered. If you set "0000" as the
address number, the address is registered under the lowest available number.
5 Enter the group name displayed on the Address Book > [OK]
The "Add Group" screen reappears.
NOTE
Up to 32 characters can be entered.
Refer to the following for details on entering characters.
Character Entry Method (page 11-10)
NOTE
Destinations can be sorted or searched by destination name or address number.
Checking and Editing Destinations (page 5-47)
3-39
Preparation before Use > Registering Destinations in the Address Book
NOTE
Refer to the following for registering the One Touch Key.
Adding a Destination on One Touch Key (One Touch Key) (page 3-42)
NOTE
Destinations can be sorted or searched by destination name or address number.
Specifying Destination (page 5-43)
1 [Member] > Select the delete destination > [Delete] > [Yes]
3-40
Preparation before Use > Registering Destinations in the Address Book
NOTE
Destinations can be sorted or searched by destination name or address number.
Specifying Destination (page 5-43)
3-41
Preparation before Use > Registering Destinations in the Address Book
NOTE
• Refer to the following for use of One Touch Key.
Specifying Destination (page 5-43)
• You can add One Touch keys and change their settings on Embedded Web Server RX.
Registering Destinations (page 2-69)
• If registering and editing of the One Touch Keys is restricted to administrators, you can edit the One Touch Keys by
logging in with administrator privileges.
Edit Restriction (page 8-76)
Embedded Web Server RX User Guide
NOTE
For the Quick No. Search key, refer to the following:
Using the Quick No. Search Key (page 2-24)
Delete
Close
m034701
3 Enter the One Touch Key name displayed in the send base screen > [OK]
NOTE
Up to 24 characters can be entered.
Refer to the following for details on entering characters.
Character Entry Method (page 11-10)
3-42
Preparation before Use > Registering Destinations in the Address Book
5 Select a destination (contact or group) to add to the One Touch Key number > [Next]
Selecting [Detail] shows the detailed information of the selected destination.
NOTE
Destinations can be sorted or searched by destination name or address number.
Specifying Destination (page 5-43)
6 Select [Save].
The destination will be added to the One Touch Key.
2 Select a One Touch Key number (0001 to 1000) to edit. Selecting [No.] or the Quick No.
Search key on the numeric keypad enables direct entry of a One Touch Key number.
2 Select a new destination (contact or group). Selecting [Detail] shows the detailed
information of the selected destination.
NOTE
Destinations can be sorted or searched by destination name or address number.
Specifying Destination (page 5-43)
2 Select a One Touch Key number (0001 to 1000) to edit. Selecting [No.] or the Quick No.
Search key on the numeric keypad enables direct entry of a One Touch Key number.
3-43
4 Printing from PC
This chapter explains the following topics:
Printing System Driver Properties Screen .......................................................................................................... 4-2
Displaying the Printing System Driver Help .............................................................................................. 4-3
Changing the Default Printing System Driver Settings (Windows 8.1) ..................................................... 4-3
Printing from PC ................................................................................................................................................. 4-4
Printing on Standard Sized Paper ............................................................................................................ 4-4
Printing on Non-standard Sized Paper .................................................................................................... 4-6
Banner Printing ........................................................................................................................................ 4-9
Canceling Printing from a Computer ...................................................................................................... 4-15
Printing from the Handheld Device .................................................................................................................. 4-16
Printing by AirPrint ................................................................................................................................. 4-16
Printing by Google Cloud Print .............................................................................................................. 4-16
4-1
Printing from PC >
1
3
No. Description
[Basic] tab
This tab groups basic functions that are frequently used. You can use it to configure the paper size,
destination, and duplex printing.
[Layout] tab
This tab lets you configure settings for printing various layouts, including booklet printing, combine
mode, poster printing, and scaling.
[Finishing] tab
This tab lets you configure settings related to finishing of printed media, including binding and
stapling.
[Imaging] tab
This tab lets you configure settings related to the quality of the print results.
[Publishing] tab
This tab lets you create covers and inserts for print jobs and put inserts between sheets of OHP
film.
[Job] tab
This tab lets you configure settings for saving print data from the computer to the machine.
Regularly used documents and other data can be saved to the machine for easy printing later.
Since saved documents can be printed directly from the machine, this function is also convenient
when you wish to print a document that you don't want others to see.
[Advanced] tab
This tab lets you configure settings for adding text pages or watermarks to print data.
4-2
Printing from PC >
No. Description
2 [Profiles]
Printing System Driver settings can be saved as a profile. Saved profiles can be recalled at any
time, so it's a convenient practice to save frequently used settings.
3 [Reset]
Click to revert settings to their initial values.
NOTE
The Help appears, even when you click the item you want to know about and press the [F1] key on your keyboard.
2 Right-click the Printing System Driver icon of the machine, and click the
[Printer properties] menu of the Printing System Driver.
4-3
Printing from PC > Printing from PC
Printing from PC
This section provides the printing method using the Printing System Driver.
NOTE
• To print the document from applications, install the Printing System Driver on your computer from the supplied DVD
(Product Library).
• In some environments, the current settings are displayed at the bottom of the Printing System Driver.
• When printing the cardstock or envelopes, load the cardstock or envelopes in the multipurpose tray before
performing the following procedure.
Loading Paper in the Multipurpose Tray (page 5-6)
NOTE
Specify the paper size and media type to print from the operation panel.
Cassette/MP Tray Settings (page 8-7)
1 2
4-4
Printing from PC > Printing from PC
3 Click "Print size" menu and select the paper size to use for printing.
To load the paper of size that is not included in print sizes of the machine such as cardstock
or envelopes, the paper size needs to be registered.
Printing on Non-standard Sized Paper (page 4-6)
To print on the special paper such as thick paper or transparency, click "Media type" menu
and select the media type.
3 Start printing.
Click the [OK] button.
4-5
Printing from PC > Printing from PC
NOTE
To execute printing at the machine, set the paper size and type in the following:
Original / Paper Settings (page 8-11)
NOTE
In Windows 7, click [Start] button on the Windows, and then click [Devices and
Printers].
2 Right-click the Printing System Driver icon of the machine, and click the [Printer properties] menu of
the Printing System Driver.
1 2
3
4
5
6
7
4 Enter the paper size.
4-6
Printing from PC > Printing from PC
1 2
4-7
Printing from PC > Printing from PC
3 Click "Print size" menu and select the paper size registered in step 2.
To print on the special paper such as thick paper or transparency, click "Media type" menu
and select the media type.
NOTE
If you loaded a postcard or envelope, select [Cardstock] or [Envelope] in the "Media
type" menu.
5 Start printing.
Click the [OK] button.
4-8
Printing from PC > Printing from PC
Banner Printing
When a document length from 488.1 mm (19.22") to a maximum of 1,220 mm (48.03") is specified for printing, the print
job is treated as banner printing.
Max. number of sheets 1 sheet (manual feed), 10 sheets (when optional banner tray is attached*1)
*1 When the banner tray (option) is used, up to 10 sheets of banner paper can be fed continuously For details,
refer to the follows:
Using the Banner Tray (Option) (page 4-12)
1 2
2 3
4-9
Printing from PC > Printing from PC
3
4
5
6
7
1 Click the [New] button.
2 Enter the length (488.1 mm (19.22") or longer), and width of the custom paper size being
registered.
2
3
NOTE
When banner printing, a resolution of 600 dpi is set.
4-10
Printing from PC > Printing from PC
5 Start printing.
Click the [OK] button.
When you execute printing in this case, a message appears on the machine's operation panel.
Place the paper in the multipurpose tray, continue to support it so that it does not fall, and
select [Continue]. To cancel printing, select [Cancel].
Cancel Continue
Status e0404
IMPORTANT
• If an output tray that cannot be used for banner printing such as Mailbox (option) is
selected in the Printing System Driver, the output tray automatically changes to a
tray that can be used.
• After pressing [Continue], support the paper with both hands so that it feeds in
correctly.
• After printing starts, catch the paper when it is output so that it does not fall. When
using the inner tray as the output location, do not stand up the stopper.
Set whether the confirmation screen appears before each sheet is printed when printing
multiple banner sheets.
Message Banner Print (page 8-31)
4-11
Printing from PC > Printing from PC
NOTE
The paper length supported in banner tray is 488.1 mm to 1,220 mm (18.5" to 48.03").
4-12
Printing from PC > Printing from PC
3 Load paper.
1 Open the paper width guides on the multipurpose tray to the maximum width.
Make sure that the banner tray is attached so that the paper width guides on the banner
tray are outside the paper width guides on the multipurpose tray.
2 Load banner paper so that it passes under the paper clamp bar.
3 Loop the banner paper back and place the end on the paper support.
4-13
Printing from PC > Printing from PC
IMPORTANT
If there is a gap between the paper and the paper width guides, readjust the guides
to fit the paper in order to prevent skewed feeding and paper jams.
5 Adjust the paper width guides on the banner tray to the same width as the paper width
guides on the multipurpose tray and lock.
IMPORTANT
Remove the paper when banner printing finishes, or when you are not using the banner tray.
NOTE
The print confirmation screen can be set in System Menu to not appear when the banner tray is attached. This will
allow continuous printing on multiple sheets. Refer to the follows:
Message Banner Print (page 8-31)
4-14
Printing from PC > Printing from PC
NOTE
When canceling printing from this machine, refer to the following:
Canceling Jobs (page 5-21)
2 Click the file for which you wish to cancel printing and select
[Cancel] from the "Document" menu.
4-15
Printing from PC > Printing from the Handheld Device
Printing by AirPrint
AirPrint is a printing function that is included standard in iOS 4.2 and later products, and Mac OS X 10.7 and later
products.
To use the AirPrint, make sure that the AirPrint setting is enabled in the Embedded Web Server RX.
Embedded Web Server RX User Guide
NOTE
A Google account is necessary to use Google Cloud Print. Obtain a Google account if you do not have one.
It is also necessary to register the machine with the Google Cloud Print service in advance. The machine can be
registered from a PC connected to the same network.
4-16
Printing from PC > Printing from the Handheld Device
4-17
Printing from PC > Printing Data Saved in the Printer
Using the operation panel to specify a file within a Box and printing it.
You can print the documents from the following boxes.
Printing Documents from Private Print Box (page 4-19)
Printing Document from Stored Job Box (page 4-20)
Printing Document from Quick Copy Box (page 4-21)
Printing Document from Proof and Hold Box (page 4-22)
4 Click the [Job] tab and select the [Job storage (e-MPS)] check
box to set the function.
NOTE
For information on how to use the Printing System Driver software, refer to the following:
Printing System Driver User Guide
4-18
Printing from PC > Printing Data Saved in the Printer
User: User 1
Detail
4 File 2015/10/10 09:55 21 MB
Print Delete
2
Close
Status b0202
4-19
Printing from PC > Printing Data Saved in the Printer
NOTE
If the document is protected by a password, the password entry screen will be displayed.
Enter the password using the numeric keys.
4-20
Printing from PC > Printing Data Saved in the Printer
NOTE
• When the number of jobs reaches the limit, the oldest job will be overwritten by the new one.
• To maintain free space on the box, you can set the maximum number of stored jobs.
Quick Copy Job Retention (page 8-41)
4-21
Printing from PC > Printing Data Saved in the Printer
4-22
Printing from PC > Monitoring the Printer Status (Status Monitor)
NOTE
When you activate Status Monitor, check the status below.
• Printing System Driver is installed.
• Either [Enhanced WSD] or [Enhanced WSD(SSL)] is enabled.
Network (page 8-51)
1 2 3 4 5 6 5 Expand button
6 Settings icon
Detailed information is displayed by clicking on each icon tab.
4-23
Printing from PC > Monitoring the Printer Status (Status Monitor)
1
Select a job on the job list and it can be canceled using the menu displayed with a right-click.
4-24
Printing from PC > Monitoring the Printer Status (Status Monitor)
Alert Tab
If an error occurs, a notice is displayed using a 3D image and a message.
4-25
Printing from PC > Monitoring the Printer Status (Status Monitor)
Select whether notification is performed when an error in the event list occurs.
NOTE
The available file format is WAV.
When customizing the message texts to read on the screen aloud, enter the texts in the text box.
4-26
5 Operation on the Machine
This chapter explains the following topics:
Loading Originals ............................................... 5-2 Send to Me (E-mail) ......................................... 5-39
Placing Originals on the Platen ..................... 5-2 Configuring Settings before Sending ............. 5-39
Loading Originals in the Document Processor 5-4 Sending a Document to the Mail Address
Loading Paper in the Multipurpose Tray ............ 5-6 of the Logged In User ................................. 5-39
Program ........................................................... 5-10 Using a FAX Server to Send (FAX Server
Registering Programs .................................. 5-11 Send) ................................................................ 5-40
Recalling Programs ...................................... 5-11 Canceling Sending Jobs .................................. 5-42
Editing Programs ........................................ 5-12 Handling Destination ........................................ 5-43
Deleting Programs ...................................... 5-12 Specifying Destination ................................. 5-43
Application ........................................................ 5-13 Choosing from the Address Book ............... 5-43
Installing Applications .................................. 5-13 Choosing from the One Touch Key ............. 5-45
Activating Applications ................................ 5-14 Choosing from the Speed Dial .................... 5-45
Deactivating Applications ............................ 5-15 Choosing from the Destination History ........ 5-46
Uninstalling Applications ............................. 5-15 Checking and Editing Destinations ............. 5-47
Registering Shortcuts (Copy, Send, and Confirmation Screen of Destinations .......... 5-48
Document Box Settings) .................................. 5-16 Recall .......................................................... 5-49
Adding Shortcuts ......................................... 5-16 How to use the FAX Function ........................... 5-50
Editing Shortcuts ......................................... 5-17 Using Document Boxes .................................... 5-51
Deleting Shortcuts ....................................... 5-17 What is Custom Box? ................................. 5-51
Copying ............................................................ 5-18 What is Job Box? ........................................ 5-51
Basic Operation .......................................... 5-18 What is USB Drive Box? ............................. 5-52
Proof Copy .................................................. 5-20 Fax Box ....................................................... 5-52
Interrupt Copy ............................................. 5-21 Basic Operation for Document Box ............. 5-52
Canceling Jobs ........................................... 5-21 Creating a New Custom Box ....................... 5-56
Frequently-Used Sending Method ................... 5-22 Editing Custom Box .................................... 5-57
Sending Document via E-mail .......................... 5-23 Deleting Custom Box .................................. 5-58
Configuring Settings before Sending ............. 5-23 Storing Documents to a Custom Box .......... 5-58
Sending Scanned Document via E-mail ........ 5-23 Printing Documents in Custom Box ............ 5-59
Sending Document to Desired Shared Folder Saving Scanned Documents to a Custom
on a Computer (Scan to PC) ............................ 5-24 Box .............................................................. 5-60
Configuring Settings before Sending ............. 5-24 Sending Documents in Custom Box ........... 5-60
Sending Document to Desired Shared Sending Documents in Custom Box to E-
Folder on a Computer ................................. 5-24 mail Address of Logged In User. ................. 5-61
Sending Document to Folder on an FTP Moving Documents in Custom Box ............. 5-63
Server (Scan to FTP) ....................................... 5-27 Copying Documents in Custom Box into
Configuring Settings before Sending ............. 5-27 Other Boxes ................................................ 5-63
Sending Document to Folder on an FTP Copying Documents in Custom Box to
Server ......................................................... 5-27 USB Drive ................................................... 5-64
Scanning using TWAIN or WIA ........................ 5-29 Joining Documents in Custom Box ............. 5-64
Configuring Settings before Sending .......... 5-29 Deleting Documents in Custom Box ........... 5-65
Scanning Document Using Application ....... 5-29 Job Box ............................................................ 5-66
Scanning Document stored in a Custom Box .. 5-30 Outputting Repeat Copy Jobs ..................... 5-66
Configuring Settings before Sending .......... 5-30 Form for Form Overlay ................................ 5-66
Scanning Document Stored in a Box .......... 5-30 Operating using Removable USB Drive ........... 5-68
Useful Sending Method .................................... 5-31 Printing Documents Stored in Removable
WSD Scan ........................................................ 5-32 USB Drive ................................................... 5-68
Installing the Driver ..................................... 5-32 Saving Documents to USB Drive (Scan to
Executing WSD scan .................................. 5-33 USB) ........................................................... 5-70
DSM Scan ........................................................ 5-35 Check the USB Drive Information ............... 5-71
Configuring Settings before Sending .......... 5-35 Removing USB Drive .................................. 5-71
Executing DSM Scan .................................. 5-35 Using the Internet Browser ............................... 5-72
Scanning with File Management Utility ............ 5-37 Launching and Exiting the Browser ............ 5-72
Configuring Settings before Sending .......... 5-37 Using the Browser Screen .......................... 5-73
Using FMU Connection to Scan an Original 5-37 Manual Staple .................................................. 5-74
Sending to Different Types of Destinations
(Multi Sending) ................................................. 5-38
5-1
Operation on the Machine > Loading Originals
Loading Originals
Load the originals on the platen or document processor, depending on the original size, type, volume, and function.
• Platen: Place the sheet, book, postcards, and envelopes.
• Document Processor: Place the multiple originals. You can also place the two sided originals.
Category Detail
Supported Sizes Maximum 11.69" × 17"/ A3, A4-R, A5-R, B4, B5-R, Ledger
297 × 432 mm (11" × 17"/279 × 432 mm), Letter-R
Minimum 2.00" × 2.00"/50 × 50 mm (8.5" × 11"/ 215.9 × 279.4 mm) and
8K
NOTE
• A5 is detected as A4-R. Set the paper size to A5 by using the function key on the touch panel.
Original Size (page 6-18)
• For details on Original Orientation, refer to the following:
Original Orientation (page 6-24)
5-2
Operation on the Machine > Loading Originals
NOTE
• When you wish to copy the booklet which is smaller than Letter-R, align the gutter (center of booklet) to the
Statement-R of the original size indicator plates, and select [Letter-R] on Original Size. When you wish to copy the
booklet which is larger than Letter-R, align the gutter (center of booklet) to the Letter of the original size indicator
plates, and select [Ledger] on Original Size. Select [Preview] to show a preview image and adjust the gutter to right
or left to fit the image as necessary.
Original Preview (page 2-20)
• A5 is detected as A4-R. Set the paper size to A5 by using the function key on the touch panel.
Original Size (page 6-18)
• For the procedure for feeding envelopes or cardstock, refer to the following:
Loading Envelopes or Cardstock in the Cassettes (page 3-10)
Loading Envelopes or Cardstock in the Multipurpose Tray (page 5-8)
CAUTION
Do not leave the document processor open as there is a danger of personal injury.
IMPORTANT
• Do not push the document processor forcefully when you close it. Excessive pressure may crack the platen
glass.
• When placing books or magazines on the machine, do so with the document processor in the open position.
5-3
Operation on the Machine > Loading Originals
Detail Document Processor (Automatic 2-Sided) Document Processor (Dual scan DP)
Weight 35 to 160 g/m2 (duplex: 50 to 120 g/m2) 35 to 220 g/m2 (duplex: 50 to 220 g/m2)
No. of Plain paper (80 g/m2), Recycled paper, Vellum Plain paper (80 g/m2), Recycled paper, Vellum
sheets paper: 140 sheets (Mixed size originals: 30 sheets) paper: 270 sheets (Mixed size originals: 30 sheets)
Thick paper (120 g/m2): 93 sheets Thick paper (120 g/m2): 180 sheets
Art paper: 1 sheet Art paper: 1 sheet
Do not use the document processor for the following types of originals. Otherwise, the originals may be jammed or the
document processor may become dirty.
• Originals bound with clips or staples (Remove the clips or staples and straighten curls, wrinkles or creases before
loading. Failure to do so may cause the originals to jam.)
• Originals with adhesive tape or glue
• Originals with cut-out sections
• Curled original
• Originals with folds (Straighten the folds before loading. Failure to do so may cause the originals to jam.)
• Carbon paper
• Crumpled paper
IMPORTANT
• Before loading originals, be sure that there are no originals left on the original eject table. Originals left on
the original eject table may cause the new originals to jam.
• Do not make an impact on the document processor top cover, such as aligning the originals on the top
cover. It may cause an error in the document processor.
5-4
Operation on the Machine > Loading Originals
NOTE
For details on Original Orientation, refer to the following:
Original Orientation (page 6-24)
IMPORTANT
• Confirm that the original width guides exactly fit the originals. If there is a gap,
readjust the original width guides. The gap may cause the originals to jam.
• Ensure that loaded originals do not exceed the level indicator. Exceeding the
maximum level may cause the originals to jam.
• Originals with punched holes or perforated lines should be placed in such a way
that the holes or perforations will be scanned last (not first).
2 Open the original stopper to fit the size of the original set (Original size: B4/Legal or more).
DP-7100/DP-7110/DP-7130
5-5
Operation on the Machine > Loading Paper in the Multipurpose Tray
IMPORTANT
• If you are using a paper weight of 106 g/m2 or more, set the media type to Thick and set the weight of the
paper you are using.
• Remove each transparency from the inner tray as it is printed. Leaving transparencies in the inner tray may
cause a paper jam.
NOTE
• When you load custom size paper, enter the paper size by referring to the following:
Original / Paper Settings (page 8-11)
• When you use special paper such as transparencies or thick paper, select the media type by referring to the
following:
MP Tray Setting (page 8-8)
• Paper size can be automatically detected and selected, refer to the following:
Paper Selection (page 6-19)
MP Tray Setting (page 8-8)
5-6
Operation on the Machine > Loading Paper in the Multipurpose Tray
3 Load paper.
Insert the paper along the paper width guides into the tray until it stops.
After removing new paper from its packaging, fan the paper before loading it in the
multipurpose tray.
Precaution for Loading Paper (page 3-2)
IMPORTANT
• When loading the paper, keep the print side facing down.
• Curled paper must be uncurled before use.
• When loading paper into the multipurpose tray, check that there is no paper left
over in the tray from a previous job before loading the paper. If there is just a small
amount of paper left over in the multipurpose tray and you want to add more, first
remove the left-over paper from the tray and include it with the new paper before
loading the paper back into the tray.
• If there is a gap between the paper and the paper width guides, readjust the guides
to fit the paper in order to prevent skewed feeding and paper jams.
• Ensure that the loaded paper does not exceed the load limits.
5-7
Operation on the Machine > Loading Paper in the Multipurpose Tray
1 2 3 4
IMPORTANT
• Use unfolded Oufuku hagaki (Return postcard).
• How to load envelopes (orientation and facing) will differ depending on the type of envelope. Be sure to
load it in correctly, otherwise printing may be done in the wrong direction or on the wrong face.
NOTE
When you load envelopes in the multipurpose tray, select the envelope type by referring to the following:
Cassette/MP Tray Settings (page 8-7)
1 Prepare paper.
Sort the pages so that the 1st page is at the back.
1 2 3
1
2
3
5-8
Operation on the Machine > Loading Paper in the Multipurpose Tray
123
1 2 3
1 1
2 2
3 3
3 3
2 2
1 1
1 2 3 1 2 3
3 3
2 2
1 1
3 Load paper.
Load paper in the tray.
3
2
1
3
2
1
3
2
1
3
2
1
For the procedure for printing, refer to the following:
Printing System Driver User Guide
Index paper must meet the following conditions.
Item Description
Number of tabs 1 to 15
5-9
Operation on the Machine > Program
Program
By registering sets of frequently used functions as a single program, you can simply press the program number as
needed to recall those functions. You can also name the programs for easy identification when recalling.
The programs below have been preregistered. The registered contents can be re-registered for easier use in your
environment.
ID Card Copy Use this when you want to copy a driver's Copying Functions
license or an insurance card. Continuous Scan: [On]
When you scan the front and back of the Original Size: A5/Statement
card, both sides will be combined and copied Paper Selection: Cassette 1
onto a single sheet. Zoom: 100%
Erase Shadowed Areas: [On]
Border Erase: [Border:1mm / 0.04"]
Eco Copy Use this to save toner consumption when Copying Functions
printing. EcoPrint: [On] (Level [5])
This changes color printing to black & white
with lighter density, so that the toner
consumption can be reduced.
Newspaper Copy Use this when you want to copy a newspaper Copying Functions
article, or other originals printed on a colored Prevent Bleed-thru: [On]
substrate. Background Density Adj.: [Auto]
This adjusts the image quality so that the
color of the substrate or the text on the
reverse side will not show on the copy.
Technical Drawing Copy Use this when you want to copy a drawing Copying Functions
that contains shapes drawn with lines, and Original Image: [Text]
graphics. Use this also when you want to Sharpness (All): [+3]
copy colored lines in black & white. Background Density Adj.: [Auto]
NOTE
Up to 50 functions combining copying and sending can be registered in the program.
If user login administration is enabled, you can only register functions by logging in with administrator privileges.
5-10
Operation on the Machine > Program
Registering Programs
The following procedure is an example of registering the copying function.
NOTE
If you select a program number already registered, the currently registered functions can
be replaced with a new set of functions.
3 Specify the position in which you want to display the icon of registered program.
4 Select [Save].
Recalling Programs
2 Select the key for the program number you want to recall.
Select [No.] or the Quick No. Search key on the numeric keypad to enter the program
number (01 to 50) directly for recalling.
NOTE
If the program cannot be recalled, the Document Box or the form overlay specified in the
program might have been deleted. Check the Document Box.
NOTE
[Program] can be pressed in each function to call up the program registered for the
function.
5-11
Operation on the Machine > Program
Editing Programs
You can change program number and program name.
2 Select [Edit].
Deleting Programs
2 Select [Edit].
5-12
Operation on the Machine > Application
Application
The functionality of the machine can be expanded by installing applications.
Applications that help you perform your daily more efficiently such as a scan feature and an authentication feature are
available.
For details, consult your sales representative or dealer.
Installing Applications
To use applications, first install the application in the machine and then activate the application.
NOTE
You can install applications and certificates on the machine. The number of applications you can run may vary
according to the type of application.
Uninstalling Applications (page 5-15)
NOTE
• If the user authentication screen appears, enter your login user name and login password
and select [Login]. For this, you need to login as an administrator or as a user with
privileges to carry out this setting. The factory default login user name and login password
are set as shown below.
2 Insert the USB drive containing the application to be installed into the USB Memory Slot.
NOTE
When the message "USB Drive is recognized. Displaying files. Are you sure?" is
displayed, select [No].
5-13
Operation on the Machine > Application
4 Select [Yes].
Installation of the application begins. Depending on the application being installed, the
installation may take some time.
Once the installation ends, the original screen reappears.
NOTE
• To install another application, repeat steps 2-3 and 2-4.
• To remove the USB drive, select [Remove USB Drive] and wait until the message
"USB Drive can be safely removed." appears. Then remove the USB drive.
Activating Applications
NOTE
If the user authentication screen appears, enter your login user name and login password
and select [Login]. For this, you need to login as an administrator or as a user with
privileges to carry out this setting. The factory default login user name and login password
are set as shown below.
3 Select [Yes].
IMPORTANT
• If you change the date/time while using the trial version of an application, you
will no longer be able to use the application.
• Icons of activated application are displayed in the Home screen.
5-14
Operation on the Machine > Application
Deactivating Applications
NOTE
If the user authentication screen appears, enter your login user name and login password
and select [Login]. For this, you need to login as an administrator or as a user with
privileges to carry out this setting. The factory default login user name and login password
are set as shown below.
NOTE
Select [x] on the screen if you want to exit the already activated application.
The procedure for exiting some applications may differ.
Uninstalling Applications
NOTE
If the user authentication screen appears, enter your login user name and login password
and select [Login]. For this, you need to login as an administrator or as a user with
privileges to carry out this setting. The factory default login user name and login password
are set as shown below.
2 Select [Yes].
5-15
Operation on the Machine > Registering Shortcuts (Copy, Send, and Document Box Settings)
Registering Shortcuts
(Copy, Send, and Document Box Settings)
You can register shortcuts in the Quick Setup screen for easy access to the frequently used functions. The settings for
the selected function can also be registered. A function name linked to a registered shortcut can be changed as
necessary.
Adding Shortcuts
Shortcut registration is performed in the setup screen of each function. Shortcuts can be registered for all functions in
which [Add Shortcut] appears on the screen.
Memo Page
Layout
Off
Layout A
Top Top
L to R R to L None
Layout B
Border Line
Original : A4
Top Edge
Zoom : 50%
Top Top on Top
Paper : A4 L to B R to B
Original
Preview Proof Copy Orientation
Status c023003
3 Select the keys corresponding to the shortcut number (01 to 06) to register.
NOTE
If you select a shortcut number already registered, the currently registered shortcut can
be replaced with a new one.
5-16
Operation on the Machine > Registering Shortcuts (Copy, Send, and Document Box Settings)
Editing Shortcuts
3 Select "Shortcut No" [Change] or "Shortcut Name" [Change] > Change the settings >
[OK].
Deleting Shortcuts
2 Select the shortcut key you want to delete > [Delete this Shortcut] > [Yes]
5-17
Operation on the Machine > Copying
Copying
The procedures here represent the basic copy operation and how to cancel the copy.
Basic Operation
NOTE
Select [Preview] to show a preview image.
Original Preview (page 2-20)
5-18
Operation on the Machine > Copying
NOTE
This function allows you to reserve the next job during printing. Using this function, the
original will be scanned while the machine is printing. When the current print job ends, the
reserved copy job is printed. If "Reserve Next Priority" is set to [Off], [Reserve Next] will
appear. Select [Reserve Next] and configure the necessary settings for the copy job.
Reserve Next Priority (page 8-35)
Copies
A4 A4 Plain
100% 2-sided
2-sided Collate
Tray A
Status a01c02
5-19
Operation on the Machine > Copying
Proof Copy
It is possible to copy one sheet before copying a large number of sheets. This enables you to check the contents and
finishing and copy the desired number of sheets without scanning the original if you are satisfied with the result. If you
want to make changes, you can change the settings and copy only one sheet again.
3 Check.
Check contents and finishing.
Modify copy settings according to results. All functions except for functions whose keys are
grayed out on the touch panel can be corrected.
To perform a proof copy again, select [Proof Copy].
5-20
Operation on the Machine > Copying
Interrupt Copy
This function allows you to pause the current jobs in progress when you need to make copies immediately.
When the interruption copy ends, the machine resumes the paused print jobs.
NOTE
• If the machine is left unused for 60 seconds in interrupt copy mode, interrupt copying is automatically cancelled and
printing resumes.
You can change the delay until interrupt copying is canceled. Change the delay as required.
Interrupt Clear Timer (page 8-77)
• The interrupt copy function may be unavailable depending on the status of document finisher usage. In this case, try
the priority override.
Priority Override (page 6-69)
2 Place the originals onto the machine for interrupt copy, and configure the copy settings.
Canceling Jobs
2 Cancel a job.
NOTE
If "Reserve Next Priority" is set to [Off], the Copying screen appears in the touch panel. In such case, selecting the [Stop]
key or [Cancel] will cancel the printing job in progress.
Reserve Next Priority (page 8-35)
5-21
Operation on the Machine > Frequently-Used Sending Method
• Send to Folder (SMB): Stores a scanned original image in a shared folder of any PC.
Sending Document to Desired Shared Folder on a Computer (Scan to PC) (page 5-24)
• Send to Folder (FTP): Stores a scanned original image in a folder of an FTP server.
Sending Document to Folder on an FTP Server (Scan to FTP) (page 5-27)
• Image Data Scanning with TWAIN / WIA: Scan the document using a TWAIN or WIA compatible application program.
Scanning using TWAIN or WIA (page 5-29)
NOTE
• Different sending options can be specified in combination.
Sending to Different Types of Destinations (Multi Sending) (page 5-38)
• The fax function can be used on products equipped with fax capability.
FAX Operation Guide
5-22
Operation on the Machine > Sending Document via E-mail
NOTE
If [Prohibit] is set to “Broadcast”, multiple destinations cannot be entered.
Broadcast (page 8-37)
5-23
Operation on the Machine > Sending Document to Desired Shared Folder on a Computer (Scan to PC)
5-24
Operation on the Machine > Sending Document to Desired Shared Folder on a Computer (Scan to PC)
2 Select the key of each item > enter the destination data > [OK].
Character Entry Method (page 11-10)
The table below lists the items to be set.
Login User Name*2 If the computer name and domain name are Up to
the same: 64 characters
User Name
For example: james.smith
If the computer name and domain name are
different:
Domain name\User name
For example: abcdnet\james.smith
*1 You can also specify the port number. Enter the following format separated by a colon.
"Host name: port number" or "IP address: port number"
To enter the IPv6 address, enclose the address in brackets [ ].
(Example: [2001:db8:a0b:12f0::10]:445)
If the port number is not specified in [Host Name], the default port number is 445.
*2 When sending a document through an optional network interface (IB-50 or IB-51), "\"
cannot be used. If the computer name is different from the domain name, login user
name needs to be input by using "@."
(Example: james.smith@abcdnet)
To search for a folder on a PC on the network, select "Search Folder from Network" or "Search
Folder by Host Name" [Next].
If you selected "Search Folder from Network" [Next], you can search all PCs on the network
for a destination.
If you pressed "Search Folder by Host Name"[Next], you can enter the "Domain/Workgroup",
and "Host Name" to search PCs on the network for the destination.
Up to 500 addresses can be displayed. Select the host name (PC name) that you want to
specify in the screen that appears, and select [Next]. The login user name and login password
entry screen appears.
After you enter the login user name and login password name of the destination PC, the
shared folders appear. Select the folder that you want to specify and select [Next]. The
address of the selected shared folder is set.
Select the folder from the Search Results list.
5-25
Operation on the Machine > Sending Document to Desired Shared Folder on a Computer (Scan to PC)
NOTE
If [Prohibit] is set to “Broadcast”, multiple destinations cannot be entered.
Broadcast (page 8-37)
6 Select [OK].
Destinations can be changed later.
Confirmation Screen of Destinations (page 5-48)
5-26
Operation on the Machine > Sending Document to Folder on an FTP Server (Scan to FTP)
2 Select the key of each item > enter the destination data > [OK].
Character Entry Method (page 11-10)
5-27
Operation on the Machine > Sending Document to Folder on an FTP Server (Scan to FTP)
*1 You can also specify the port number. Enter the following format separated by a colon.
"Host name: port number" or "IP address: port number"
To enter the IPv6 address, enclose the address in brackets [ ].
(Example: [2001:db8:a0b:12f0::10]:21)
If the port number is not specified in [Host Name], the default port number is 21.
*2 When the FTP server is based on Linux/UNIX, the path including the sub-folder is
combined by the slash "/" not using the back-slash.
NOTE
If [Prohibit] is set to “Broadcast”, multiple destinations cannot be entered.
Broadcast (page 8-37)
6 Select [OK].
Destinations can be changed later.
Confirmation Screen of Destinations (page 5-48)
5-28
Operation on the Machine > Scanning using TWAIN or WIA
2 Select the machine using the application and display the dialog box.
NOTE
For selecting the machine, see the Operation Guide or Help for each application
software.
NOTE
For the settings, refer to Help in the dialog box.
5-29
Operation on the Machine > Scanning Document stored in a Custom Box
2 Select the machine using the application and display the dialog box.
NOTE
For selecting the machine, see the Operation Guide or Help for each application
software.
2 Set how to display the document data. Click the [Setting] button to select each item.
NOTE
For the settings, refer to Help in the dialog box.
NOTE
In this case, the scanned page or the selected document data will not be deleted from
the Custom Box.
5-30
Operation on the Machine > Useful Sending Method
5-31
Operation on the Machine > WSD Scan
WSD Scan
WSD Scan saves images of originals scanned on this machine as files on a WSD-compatible computer.
NOTE
• To use WSD Scan, confirm that the computer used for WSD scanning and the machine is network-connected, and
"WSD Scan" is set to [On] in the network settings.
WSD Scan (page 8-59)
• For information on operating the computer, refer to the computer's help or the operation guide of your software.
When transmitting using wireless LAN, select the interface dedicated to the send function in advance.
Primary Network (Client) (page 8-68)
For Windows 7
NOTE
When [Network] does not appear in the Start menu, perform the following procedure.
2 Select the [[Start] menu] tab in the "Task bar and [Start] menu properties" screen, and
click [Customize].
3 When the "Customize [Start] menu" screen appears, select the "Network" check box
and click [OK].
5-32
Operation on the Machine > WSD Scan
NOTE
If the "User Account Control" window appears, click [Continue].
If the "Found New Hardware" window appears, click [Cancel].
During the installation, double-click the icon shown on the task bar to display the "Driver
Software Installation" screen. When "Your devices are ready to use" is displayed on the
[Driver Software Installation] screen, the installation is completed.
For Windows 10
5-33
Operation on the Machine > WSD Scan
5-34
Operation on the Machine > DSM Scan
DSM Scan
A scanned document can be automatically saved in any format or sent to any destination by reading a scan process
from Active Directory. This function only supports the computers installed Windows Server 2008 R2 or Windows Server
2012.
When transmitting using wireless LAN, select the interface dedicated to the send function in advance.
Primary Network (Client) (page 8-68)
NOTE
If the Active Directory that the scan process can reference is not on the network authentication server, DSM must
be set in Embedded Web Server RX.
Embedded Web Server RX User Guide
NOTE
Depending on the settings, the address book screen may appear. In this event, select
[Cancel] to display the screen for sending.
5-35
Operation on the Machine > DSM Scan
5-36
Operation on the Machine > Scanning with File Management Utility
NOTE
For information on using File Management Utility, refer to the following:
File Management Utility User Guide
5 When the scan settings screen appears, press each item and
configure the necessary settings.
The features that can be set depend on File Management Utility.
5-37
Operation on the Machine > Sending to Different Types of Destinations (Multi Sending)
NOTE
• If the destinations include a fax, the images sent to all destinations will be black and white.
• If [Prohibit] is set to “Broadcast”, multiple destinations cannot be specified.
Broadcast (page 8-37)
5-38
Operation on the Machine > Send to Me (E-mail)
Send to Me (E-mail)
When user login is enabled, the document is sent to the E-mail address of the logged in user.
5-39
Operation on the Machine > Using a FAX Server to Send (FAX Server Send)
NOTE
• A FAX server is required to use this function. For information about the FAX server, contact the applicable
administrator.
• FAX server settings must be configured to send a FAX.
Embedded Web Server RX User Guide
FAX Server (page 8-72)
NOTE
Use the numeric keys to enter a number.
5-40
Operation on the Machine > Using a FAX Server to Send (FAX Server Send)
NOTE
For details on the External Address Book, refer to the following:
Embedded Web Server RX User Guide
5-41
Operation on the Machine > Canceling Sending Jobs
2 Cancel a job.
NOTE
Selecting the [Stop] key will not temporarily stop a job that you have already started sending.
5-42
Operation on the Machine > Handling Destination
Handling Destination
This section explains how to select and confirm the destination.
Specifying Destination
Select the destination using either of the following methods except entering address directly:
• Choosing from the Address Book
Choosing from the Address Book (page 5-43)
• Choosing from the External Address Book
For details on the External Address Book, refer to the following:
Embedded Web Server RX User Guide
• Choosing from One Touch key
Choosing from the One Touch Key (page 5-45)
• Choosing from the Speed Dial
Choosing from the Speed Dial (page 5-45)
• Choosing from the Destination History
Choosing from the Destination History (page 5-46)
• Choosing from the FAX
FAX Operation Guide
NOTE
• You can set the machine up so that the address book screen appears when you select the [Send] key.
Default Screen (page 8-36)
• If you are using the products equipped with the fax function, you can specify the fax destination. Enter the other
party number using the numeric keypad.
NOTE
For details on the External Address Book, refer to the following:
Embedded Web Server RX User Guide
5-43
Operation on the Machine > Handling Destination
You can change the order in which the destinations are listed by selecting [Name] or [No.]
from the "Sort".
NOTE
• To deselect, select the checkbox again and remove the checkmark.
• If [Prohibit] is set to “Broadcast”, multiple destinations cannot be selected. This also
applies to a group in which multiple destinations are registered.
Broadcast (page 8-37)
Destination Search
Destinations registered in the Address Book can be searched. Advanced search by type or by
initial letter is also available.
Address Book
Add/Edit
0004 Group2 Member: 2 Address Book
Detail
0005 Group3 Member: 4
Cancel OK
Status s02010101
NOTE
• To delete the destination, select the destination you want to delete and select [Delete].
• You can set the default "Sort" settings.
Sort (page 8-75)
5-44
Operation on the Machine > Handling Destination
NOTE
If the One Touch Keys for the desired destination is hidden on the touch panel, select [ ] or [ ] to scroll and view
next or previous One Touch Keys. This procedure assumes that One Touch Keys have already been registered.
For more information on adding One Touch keys, refer to the following:
Adding a Destination on One Touch Key (One Touch Key) (page 3-42)
Destination
Enter Destination.
Destination Detail Address
Book
Recall
E-mail
1/1 Addr Entry
Folder Path
Entry
FAX Server
On Hook Direct Chain Detail/Edit Delete Dest. History
FAX No.
0001 0002 0003 0004 0005 No. Entry
AAA BBB CCC DDD EEE
i-FAX
Addr Entry
0006 0007 0008 0009 0010 1/100
FFF GGG HHH III JJJ WSD Scan
/DSM Scan
NOTE
If you entered the speed dial in 1 to 3-digit, select [OK].
Destination
Enter Destination.
Destination Detail Address
Book
Recall
E-mail
1/1 Addr Entry
Folder Path
Entry
FAX Server
On Hook Direct Chain Detail/Edit Delete Dest. History
FAX No.
0001 0002 0003 0004 0005 No. Entry
AAA BBB CCC DDD EEE
i-FAX
Addr Entry
0006 0007 0008 0009 0010 1/100
FFF GGG HHH III JJJ WSD Scan
/DSM Scan
5-45
Operation on the Machine > Handling Destination
Destination History
Select a destination.
Detail
Cancel OK
≧ἣ s021601
3 Select [OK].
5-46
Operation on the Machine > Handling Destination
NOTE
• When selecting [On] for Entry Check for New Destination, the confirmation screen
appears. Enter the same destination again, and select [OK].
Entry Check for New Dest. (page 8-36)
• When selecting [On] for Destination Check before Send, the confirmation screen appears
after pressing the [Start] key.
Dest. Check before Send (page 8-36)
Confirmation Screen of Destinations (page 5-48)
5-47
Operation on the Machine > Handling Destination
Destination Detail
1
A OFFICE 1234567890
1/1
Detail
Delete
Check
2
Cancel
2 Select [Check].
NOTE
Be sure to confirm all destination by displaying them on the touch panel. You cannot
select [Check] unless you have confirmed all destination.
5-48
Operation on the Machine > Handling Destination
Recall
Recall is a function allowing you to send the last entered destination once again. When you want to send the image to
the same destination, select [Recall], and you can call the destination you sent on the destination list.
1 Select [Recall].
The destination you sent is displayed on the destination list.
NOTE
When the last sending included FAX, folders and E-mail destinations, they are also
displayed. If necessary, add or delete the destination.
NOTE
• When [On] is selected in "Dest. Check before Send", a destination confirmation screen is
displayed when you press the [Start] key.
Confirmation Screen of Destinations (page 5-48)
• Recall information is canceled in the following conditions.
- When you turn the power off
- When you send a next image (new recall information is registered)
- When you log out
5-49
Operation on the Machine > How to use the FAX Function
5-50
Operation on the Machine > Using Document Boxes
NOTE
The operation on Custom Box you perform from operation panel can also be made using Embedded Web Server RX.
Embedded Web Server RX User Guide
NOTE
• You can set up the machine so that temporary documents in job boxes are automatically deleted.
Deletion of Job Retention (page 8-41)
• For details on operating the Job Box, refer to the following:
Printing Data Saved in the Printer (page 4-18)
NOTE
Repeat Copy function is not available when the Data Security Function is active.
5-51
Operation on the Machine > Using Document Boxes
NOTE
Word, Excel and PowerPoint will be saved in a Microsoft Office 2007 or later file format.
Fax Box
Fax Box store the fax data. The optional FAX Kit is required in order to make use of FAX functionality.
FAX Operation Guide
NOTE
In the following explanation, it is assumed that user login administration is enabled. For details on User Logon
privileges, refer to the following:
Editing Custom Box (page 5-57)
Box List
0001 SALES Anonymous 63 MB Search(Name) 9 4 Saves the document in the selected box.
Search(No.) 8 5 Displays the details for the selected box.
1/1
Add/Edit Box
7 6 Opens the selected box.
7 Registers new boxes and checks, modifies or
deletes box information.
4 Store File Detail Open
6
Custom Box Program 8 A box can be searched for by Box No.
9 A box can be searched for by Box Name.
Status b0101_01
5-52
Operation on the Machine > Using Document Boxes
Document List
The document list is a list of the documents stored in the custom box. Documents can be listed either by name or as
thumbnails. The list can be used as shown below.
List
1 Switches between list display and thumbnail
3 2 1 display.
2 Listing the documents by time of update in
Box: ascending/descending order.
4 File Name Date and Time Size
9 3 Listing the documents by name in alphabetical
5 0001 2015101009404501 2015/10/10 09:40 21 MB Search(Name) order.
0002 2015101009504511 2015/10/10 09:50 21 MB
Thumbnail
Box:
1 Selecting more than one document at a time.
1 SALES
2 Highlighting a document to display its details
with [Detail].
2 Search(Name)
1/1 Detail
4 Prints, sends, joins, moves, copies or deletes
Detail the selected documents.
Preview
5 Saves the document in the open box.
Print Send Join Move/Copy Delete Store File
5
Close
Status b020102
NOTE
You can select multiple documents by pressing the respective document checkboxes. However, note that you cannot
select multiple documents when you are sending documents.
5-53
Operation on the Machine > Using Document Boxes
2 Highlight the box whose box details you wish to check and
select [Detail/Edit].
NOTE
If a custom box is protected by a password, enter the correct password.
2 Highlight the box whose box details you wish to check and
select [Detail/Edit].
NOTE
If a custom box is protected by a password, enter the correct password.
4 If you have changed the details, select [Save] and then select
[Yes] in the confirmation screen.
If you do not change the details, select [No].
5 Select [Close].
The display returns to the default Document Box screen.
5-54
Operation on the Machine > Using Document Boxes
Size : A4
4 Press to select any page of the open document
Resol. : 300x300dpi
and print, send or copy to USB drive.
Color : Full Color
Selecting a page (page 5-55)
1/6
NOTE
• Preview of the document in the USB drive is displayed in Black & White even if is a color
document.
• The preview display can be controlled by moving your finger(s) on the touch panel.
Original Preview (page 2-20)
Selecting a page
When printing, sending, or copying a document within a Custom Box, you can specify any pages at will.
Select [Page Selection] in the document list screen of the Custom Box, or [Select Pages to Process] in the Preview
screen, to display the page selection screen.
Select the pages you want to work with, and select [Print], [Send], or [Copy to USB Drive].
1 Displaying the number of pages selected.
2 1
2 Selecting more than one document at a time.
File: doc0001820160526224855
3 Highlighting the selected document.
Selected Pages: 1 pages
5-55
Operation on the Machine > Using Document Boxes
NOTE
• If user login administration is enabled, you can only change the settings by logging in with administrator privileges or
as a user with privileges to configure this setting. The factory default login user name and login password are set as
shown below.
• If user login administration is enabled, log in with administrator privileges to perform the following operations. They
cannot be performed with user privileges.
- Creating a box
- Deleting a box of which owner is another user.
Item Description
Box No. Enter the box number by selecting [+], [-] or number keys. The box
number can be from 0001 to 1000. A Custom Box should have a unique
number. If you enter 0000, the smallest number available will be
automatically assigned.
Owner*1 Set the owner of the box. Select the owner from the user list that
appears.
Usage The usage for a box can be restricted. To enable a capacity restriction
Restriction enter a value for the storage capacity of the Custom Box in megabytes
by selecting [-], [+] or number keys. You can enter a limit between 1 and
30,000 (MB).
5-56
Operation on the Machine > Using Document Boxes
Item Description
Auto File Automatically deletes stored documents after a set period of time.
Deletion Select [On] to enable automatic deletion and then use [+] and [-] or the
numeric keys to enter the number of days for which documents are
stored. You can enter any number between 1 and 31 (day(s)). To
disable automatic file deletion, select [Off].
Overwrite Specifies whether or not old stored documents are overwritten when
Setting new documents are stored. To overwrite old documents, select
[Permit]. To retain old documents, select [Prohibit].
Delete after Automatically delete a document from the box once printing is
Printed complete. To delete the document, select [On]. To retain the document,
select [Off].
2 Select [Add].
The Custom Box is created.
NOTE
• When you have logged in as a user, you can only edit a box whose owner is set to that
user.
• When you have logged in as administrator, you can edit all boxes.
When user login administration is enabled, the settings that can be changed varies
depending on the privileges of the logged in user.
Box No.
Owner
Permission
Box Password
Usage Restriction
Overwrite Setting
5-57
Operation on the Machine > Using Document Boxes
Box Password
Permission
Overwrite Setting
NOTE
• When you have logged in as a user, you can only delete a box whose owner is set to that
user.
• When you have logged in as administrator, you can edit all boxes.
5-58
Operation on the Machine > Using Document Boxes
NOTE
If a custom box is protected by a password, enter the correct password.
3 Select [Open].
NOTE
To deselect, select the checkbox again and remove the checkmark.
2 Select [Print].
NOTE
Select the [Program] tab when registering or recalling programs.
Registering Programs (page 5-11)
Recalling Programs (page 5-11)
If a document stored from a computer is selected, the print settings selection screen
appears.
• To use the settings used at the time of printing (when the document was saved), select
[Print As Is]. Select [Start Print] to start printing.
• To change the print settings, select [Print after Change Settings] and change the print
settings.
After a document saved in the machine is selected, the [Use File Settings] key may
appear in the setting screen for the feature to be used.
• To use the settings saved with the document, select [Use File Settings].
• If you need to change the print settings, select [Print after Change Settings].
5-59
Operation on the Machine > Using Document Boxes
NOTE
• Enter up to 32 characters as the file name.
• Select the [Program] tab when registering or recalling programs.
Registering Programs (page 5-11)
Recalling Programs (page 5-11)
NOTE
If a custom box is protected by a password, enter the correct password.
5-60
Operation on the Machine > Using Document Boxes
NOTE
You cannot select and send multiple documents.
To deselect, press the checkbox again and remove the checkmark.
2 Select [Send].
NOTE
Depending on the settings, the address book screen may appear.
NOTE
Select the [Program] tab when registering or recalling programs.
Registering Programs (page 5-11)
Recalling Programs (page 5-11)
5-61
Operation on the Machine > Using Document Boxes
NOTE
When this function is used, functions other than transmission cannot be used.
5-62
Operation on the Machine > Using Document Boxes
NOTE
If a custom box is protected by a password, enter the correct password.
NOTE
To deselect, select the checkbox again and remove the checkmark.
2 [Move/Copy] > [Move to Custom Box] > [Next] > select the destination of move > [Move/
Copy] > [OK]
The selected document is moved.
NOTE
If the box to which the document is to be moved is protected by a password, enter the
correct password.
NOTE
If a custom box is protected by a password, enter the correct password.
NOTE
To deselect, select the checkbox again and remove the checkmark.
2 [Move/Copy] > [Copy to Custom Box] > [Next] > select the destination of copy > [Copy] >
[OK]
The selected document is copied.
NOTE
If the box to which the document is to copied is protected by a password, enter the
correct password.
5-63
Operation on the Machine > Using Document Boxes
NOTE
If a custom box is protected by a password, enter the correct password.
NOTE
To deselect, select the checkbox again and remove the checkmark.
2 [Move/Copy] > [Copy to USB Drive] > [Next] > select the destination of copy > [Next] >
[Copy] > [OK]
The selected document is copied.
NOTE
You can only join a document to other documents in the same custom box. If necessary, move the documents to be
joined beforehand.
NOTE
If a custom box is protected by a password, enter the correct password.
NOTE
To deselect, select the checkbox again and remove the checkmark.
2 Select [Join].
3 Arrange the documents into the order in which they are to be joined.
Highlight the document you want to rearrange and select [Up] or [Down] to move it to the
correct place in the sequence.
5-64
Operation on the Machine > Using Document Boxes
4 [Next] > [File Name] > Enter the file name for the joined document > [OK]
NOTE
Enter up to 64 characters as the file name.
NOTE
After joining, the original documents are left unchanged. Delete the documents if they
are no longer needed.
NOTE
If a custom box is protected by a password, enter the correct password.
NOTE
• [Delete] is disabled until a document is selected.
• To deselect, select the checkbox again and remove the checkmark.
5-65
Operation on the Machine > Job Box
Job Box
This section explains the Repeat Copy Box and the Form for Form Overlay Box. For Private Print/Stored Job Box and
Quick Copy/Proof and Hold Box, refer to the following:
Printing Data Saved in the Printer (page 4-18)
Storing a Form
You can store forms to be used for the form overlay in the job box. One page can be registered in one form.
2 If necessary, select the image quality of original, scanning density, etc. before the original is
scanned.
5-66
Operation on the Machine > Job Box
5-67
Operation on the Machine > Operating using Removable USB Drive
NOTE
Word, Excel and PowerPoint will be saved in a Microsoft Office 2007 or later file format.
NOTE
• PDF files you wish to print should have an extension (.pdf).
• Use USB drive properly formatted by this machine.
• Plug the USB drive directly into the USB Memory Slot.
5-68
Operation on the Machine > Operating using Removable USB Drive
2 When the machine reads the USB drive, "USB Drive is recognized. Displaying files. Are
you sure?" may appear. Select [Yes].
Displays the USB Drive screen.
NOTE
If the message does not appear, select [USB Drive] on the Home screen.
NOTE
• 1,000 documents can be displayed.
• To return to a higher level folder, select [Up].
NOTE
After a document saved in the machine is selected, [Use File Settings] may appear in
the setting screen for the feature to be used.
• To use the settings saved with the document, press [Use File Settings].
• If you need to change the print settings, select the desired feature.
5-69
Operation on the Machine > Operating using Removable USB Drive
NOTE
The maximum number of the storable files is 1,000.
2 When the machine reads the USB drive, "USB Drive is recognized. Displaying files. Are
you sure?" may appear. Select [Yes] to display the USB Drive screen.
Displays the USB Drive screen.
NOTE
If the message does not appear, select [USB Drive] on the Home screen.
NOTE
Selecting [Add a new folder] allows you to create a new folder in the USB drive.
5-70
Operation on the Machine > Operating using Removable USB Drive
NOTE
USB drive can also be removed after checking the status of the device.
Device/Communication (page 7-13)
5-71
Operation on the Machine > Using the Internet Browser
NOTE
To use the internet browser, "Internet Browser Setting" must be set to [On] in Internet.
Internet (page 8-83)
3 To exit the browser, select [X] (Close) and then select [Yes] in the exit confirmation screen.
NOTE
You can specify preferences such as the way the Internet browser screen is displayed.
Browser Environment (page 8-83)
5-72
Operation on the Machine > Using the Internet Browser
NOTE
Selecting the [Reset] key while the Internet browser is displayed will exit the browser and return you to the application
list screen without displaying the browser exit.
5-73
Operation on the Machine > Manual Staple
Manual Staple
You can staple copied paper manually without any print operation. It is useful when you have forgotten to set the staple
sort mode before starting copying, or when you want to staple originals.
NOTE
• This function requires the optional Document Finisher:
4,000-sheet Finisher (page 11-28)
100-sheet Staple Finisher (page 11-29)
• If there are no staples when manual stapling is performed, the stapling position lamps and stapling position key
LEDs all blink. Add staples.
Replacing Staples (4,000-sheet Finisher) (page 10-13)
Replacing Staples (100-sheet Staple Finisher) (page 10-15)
• Manual stapling cannot be executed when the machine is in operation.
Paper weight
Paper size 52 - 90 g/m2 91 - 105 g/m2
(14.0 - 24.0 lb. Bond) (24.3 - 28.0 lb. Bond)
Paper weight
Paper size 52 - 90 g/m2 91 - 105 g/m2
(14.0 - 24.0 lb. Bond) (24.3 - 28.0 lb. Bond)
Use the keys on the control section of the Finisher (optional) for manual stapling.
1 Stapling position lamps
2 Stapling position key
1 2 3
3 Stapling key / lamp
5-74
Operation on the Machine > Manual Staple
CAUTION
Do not insert your hand inside the open shutter.
NOTE
• Press the stapling position key before you place the paper. Once the paper is placed, the
stapling position key cannot be used.
• The stapling lamp lights when the paper is properly placed. If it does not light, replace the
paper.
CAUTION
Be sure that your hands are away from the paper while stapling is in progress.
NOTE
The time after which manual staple mode is automatically exited can be changed.
Manual Staple (page 8-29)
5-75
6 Using Various Functions
This chapter explains the following topics:
Functions Available on the Machine ............. 6-2 Bates Stamp ...................................... 6-64
About Functions Available on the Continuous Scan ............................... 6-67
Machine .............................................. 6-2 Auto Image Rotation ......................... 6-67
How to Select Functions ..................... 6-2 Negative Image ................................. 6-68
Copy ................................................... 6-2 Mirror Image ...................................... 6-68
Send ................................................... 6-5 Job Finish Notice .............................. 6-68
Custom Box (Store File, Printing, File Name Entry ................................ 6-69
Send) .................................................. 6-8 Priority Override ................................ 6-69
USB Drive (Store Repeat Copy ..................................... 6-70
File, Printing Documents) .................. 6-14 DP Read Action ................................ 6-71
Functions .................................................... 6-17 Skip Blank Page ................................ 6-71
Original Size ..................................... 6-18 2-sided/Book Original, Book Original 6-72
Paper Selection ................................ 6-19 Sending Size ..................................... 6-73
Mixed Size Originals ......................... 6-21 File Format ........................................ 6-74
Original Orientation ........................... 6-24 File Separation .................................. 6-79
Fold ................................................... 6-25 Scan Resolution ................................ 6-79
Collate/Offset .................................... 6-26 E-mail Subject/Body .......................... 6-80
Staple/Punch ..................................... 6-27 Send and Print .................................. 6-80
Paper Output .................................... 6-31 Send and Store ................................. 6-80
ID Card Copy .................................... 6-32 FTP Encrypted TX ............................ 6-81
Density .............................................. 6-32 File Size Confirmation ....................... 6-81
Original Image .................................. 6-33 Delete after Printed ........................... 6-81
EcoPrint ............................................ 6-34 Delete after Transmitted ................... 6-81
Color Selection ................................. 6-35 Storing Size ....................................... 6-82
Sharpness ......................................... 6-36 Long Original ..................................... 6-82
Contrast ............................................ 6-36 Encrypted PDF Password ................. 6-83
Background Density Adj. JPEG/TIFF Print ................................ 6-83
(Background Density Adjustment) .... 6-37 XPS Fit to Page ................................ 6-83
Prevent Bleed-thru ............................ 6-37
Erase Colors ..................................... 6-37
Zoom ................................................. 6-38
Combine ........................................... 6-41
Margin/Centering, Margin,
Centering .......................................... 6-43
Border Erase, Border Erase/Full Scan 6-44
Booklet .............................................. 6-46
Duplex ............................................... 6-49
Cover ................................................ 6-52
Form Overlay .................................... 6-53
Erase Shadowed Areas .................... 6-54
Page # .............................................. 6-55
Insert Sheets/Chapters ..................... 6-57
Memo Page ...................................... 6-58
Image Repeat ................................... 6-60
Text Stamp ........................................ 6-61
6-1
Using Various Functions > Functions Available on the Machine
Preview
Original : A4
Zoom : 100% ID Card Copy
Paper : A4
c0102
Copy
For details on each function, see the table below.
Reference
Tab Function key Description
page
Paper Selection Select the cassette or multipurpose tray that page 6-19
contains the required paper size.
Mixed Size Scan the documents of different sizes that are page 6-21
Originals set in the document processor all at once.
Org./Paper/
Finishing Original Select the orientation of the original document page 6-24
Orientation top edge to scan correct direction.
Configure the
settings for Fold Fold the finished documents. page 6-25
originals, paper,
and finishing such Collate/Offset Offsets the output by page or set. page 6-26
as collate and Staple/Punch Staples or punches printed documents. page 6-27
staple.
Paper Output Specify the output tray. page 6-31
ID Card Copy Use this when you want to copy a driver's license page 6-32
or an insurance card. When you scan the front
and back of the card, both sides will be combined
and copied onto a single sheet.
6-2
Using Various Functions > Functions Available on the Machine
Reference
Tab Function key Description
page
Original Image Select original image type for best results. page 6-33
EcoPrint EcoPrint saves toner when printing. Use this page 6-34
function for test prints or any other occasion
when high quality print is not required.
Image Quality
Sharpness Adjusts the sharpness of image outlines. page 6-36
Configure the Background Removes dark background from originals, such page 6-37
settings for density Density Adj. as newspapers.
and quality of
copies. Prevent Bleed-thru Hides background colors and image bleed- page 6-37
through when scanning thin original.
Contrast You can adjust the contrast between light and page 6-36
dark areas of the image.
Zoom Adjust the zoom to reduce or enlarge the image. page 6-38
Booklet Scan multiple original pages, then print copies so page 6-46
that they can be folded into a single booklet, with
a cover.
6-3
Using Various Functions > Functions Available on the Machine
Reference
Tab Function key Description
page
Form Overlay Prints the original document overlaid with a form page 6-53
or image.
Erase Shadowed When scanning with the document processor or page 6-54
Areas original cover open, erase the extra shaded area.
Text Stamp You can add a text stamp on the documents. page 6-61
Bates Stamp You can add a bates stamp on the documents. page 6-64
Memo Page Delivers copies with a space for adding notes. page 6-58
Auto Image When original and paper source size are the page 6-67
Rotation same, but their orientation is different, rotate
image 90 degrees when copying.
Negative Image Inverts black and white portions of the image for page 6-68
printing.
Mirror Image Copies the mirrored image of the original. page 6-68
Advanced
Setup Job Finish Notice Sends E-mail notice when a job is complete. It is page 6-68
also available that send a notice when a job is
Configure the interrupted.
settings for
continuous File Name Entry Adds a file name. page 6-69
scanning, mirror
Priority Override Suspends the current job and gives a new job top page 6-69
image copies, and
priority.
Skip Blank Page
function. Repeat Copy Enables additional copies in the desired quantity as page 6-70
necessary after a copy job is completed.
DP Read Action When the document processor is used, select page 6-71
the scanning operation for the document
processor. This function is displayed when the
document processor is installed.
Skip Blank Page When there are blank pages in a scanned page 6-71
document, this function skips the blank pages
and prints only pages that are not blank.
6-4
Using Various Functions > Functions Available on the Machine
Send
To configure the settings for functions, select the tab and press the function key.
Destination
Sending Image
Function key
Sending Size File Format File Long
Separation Original
Original : A4
Zoom : 100%
Send : A4
Preview
Status s0103
Mixed Size Scan the documents of different sizes that are page 6-21
Originals set in the document processor all at once.
2-sided/Book Select the type and orientation of the binding page 6-72
Original, Book based on the original.
Original
Org./Sending Original Select the orientation of the original document page 6-24
Data Format Orientation top edge to scan correct direction.
Configure the Sending Size Select size of image to be sent. page 6-73
settings for
original type and File Format Specify the image file format. Image quality level page 6-74
file format. can also be adjusted.
File Separation Creates several files by dividing scanned original page 6-79
data page by specified number of pages, and
sends the files.
6-5
Using Various Functions > Functions Available on the Machine
Original Image Select original image type for best results. page 6-33
FAX TX Resolution Select fineness of images when sending FAX. Refer to the
FAX Operation
Color/ Guide.
Image Quality
Color Selection Select the color mode setting. page 6-35
Configure the
settings for Sharpness Adjusts the sharpness of image outlines. page 6-36
density, quality
Background Removes dark background from originals, such page 6-37
of copies, and
Density Adj. as newspapers.
color balance.
Prevent Bleed-thru Hides background colors and image bleed- page 6-37
through when scanning thin original.
Contrast You can adjust the contrast between light and page 6-36
dark areas of the image.
6-6
Using Various Functions > Functions Available on the Machine
Zoom Adjust the zoom to reduce or enlarge the image. page 6-38
Centering Centers the original image on the paper when page 6-43
sending onto paper different from the original
size.
Border Erase/Full Erases the black border that forms around the page 6-44
Scan image.
Job Finish Notice Sends E-mail notice when a job is complete. It is page 6-68
also available that send a notice when a job is
interrupted.
Erase Shadowed When scanning with the document processor or page 6-54
Areas original cover open, erase the extra shaded area.
i-FAX Subject/ Adds subject and body when sending a Refer to the
Advanced
Body document by i-FAX. FAX Operation
Setup
Guide.
Configure the
settings for FAX Direct Sends FAX directly without reading original data Refer to the
transmission Transmission into memory. FAX Operation
copy, encrypted Guide.
transmission, FAX Polling RX Dial the destination and receive documents for Refer to the
and file size Polling Transmission stored in the polling box. FAX Operation
confirmation. Guide.
Send and Print Prints a copy of the document being sent. page 6-80
Send and Store Stores a copy of the document being sent in a page 6-80
Custom Box.
FTP Encrypted TX Encrypts images when sending via FTP. page 6-81
Text Stamp You can add a text stamp on the documents. page 6-61
Bates Stamp You can add a bates stamp on the documents. page 6-64
File Size Checks the file size before sending/storing the page 6-81
Confirmation original.
Skip Blank Page When there are blank pages in a scanned page 6-71
document, this function skips the blank pages
and sends only pages that are not blank.
E-mail Subject/ Adds subject and body when sending a page 6-80
Body document.
6-7
Using Various Functions > Functions Available on the Machine
Storing Image
Original : A4
Zoom : 100% Scan Color Sharpness Background
Store : A4 Resolution Selection Density Adj.
Preview
1/2
Status b050201
Store File
Reference
Tab Function key Description
page
Mixed Size Scan the documents of different sizes that are page 6-21
Originals set in the document processor all at once.
2-sided/Book Select the type and orientation of the binding page 6-72
Original, Book based on the original.
Original
Zoom Adjust the zoom to reduce or enlarge the image. page 6-38
Centering Centers the original image on the paper when page 6-43
storing onto paper different from the original size.
6-8
Using Various Functions > Functions Available on the Machine
Reference
Tab Function key Description
page
Border Erase/Full Erases the black border that forms around the page 6-44
Scan image.
Job Finish Notice Sends E-mail notice when a job is complete. It is page 6-68
also available that send a notice when a job is
Functions
interrupted.
Configure the File Name Entry Adds a file name. page 6-69
settings when Erase Shadowed When scanning with the document processor or page 6-54
storing the Areas original cover open, erase the extra shaded area.
document in the
Custom Box. Skip Blank Page When there are blank pages in a scanned page 6-71
document, this function skips the blank pages
and stores only pages that are not blank.
Contrast You can adjust the contrast between light and page 6-36
dark areas of the image.
6-9
Using Various Functions > Functions Available on the Machine
Reference
Tab Function key Description
page
Paper Selection Select the cassette or multipurpose tray that page 6-19
contains the required paper size.
Collate/Offset Offsets the output by page or set. page 6-26
Staple/Punch Staples or punches printed documents. page 6-27
Paper Output Specify the output tray. page 6-31
Combine Combines 2 or 4 original sheets into 1 printed page 6-41
page.
Margin/Centering Margin: Add margins (white space). In page 6-43
addition, you can set the margin width
and the back page margin.
Centering: Centers the original image on the
paper when copying onto paper
different from the original size.
Booklet Print document so that it can be folded into a page 6-46
single booklet, with a cover.
Duplex Prints 1-sided or open book originals to 2-sided, page 6-49
Functions
or 2-sided or open book originals to 1-sided.
Configure the Cover Adds a cover to the finished documents. page 6-52
settings for paper Form Overlay Prints the original document overlaid with a form or page 6-53
selection and image.
duplex printing
when printing from Page # Adds page numbers to the finished documents. page 6-55
the Custom Box.
Job Finish Notice Sends E-mail notice when a job is complete. It is page 6-68
also available that send a notice when a job is
interrupted.
File Name Entry Adds a file name. page 6-69
Delete after Automatically deletes a document from the box page 6-81
Printed once printing is complete.
Priority Override Suspends the current job and gives a new job top page 6-69
priority.
EcoPrint EcoPrint saves toner when printing. Use this page 6-34
function for test prints or any other occasion
when high quality print is not required.
Zoom Adjust the zoom to reduce or enlarge the image. page 6-38
Fold Fold the finished documents. page 6-25
Text Stamp You can add a text stamp on the documents. page 6-61
Bates Stamp You can add a bates stamp on the documents. page 6-64
6-10
Using Various Functions > Functions Available on the Machine
Reference
Tab Function key Description
page
Density Adjust density. page 6-32
Original Image Select original image type for best results. page 6-33
Image Quality Sharpness Adjusts the sharpness of image outlines. page 6-36
Background Removes dark background from originals, such page 6-37
Configure the Density Adj. as newspapers.
settings for density
and quality of Prevent Bleed-thru Hides background colors and image bleed- page 6-37
copies. through when scanning thin original.
Contrast You can adjust the contrast between light and page 6-36
dark areas of the image.
6-11
Using Various Functions > Functions Available on the Machine
Send
Reference
Tab Function key Description
page
File Format Specify the image file format. Image quality level page 6-74
can also be adjusted.
FAX TX Resolution Select fineness of images when sending FAX. Refer to the
FAX
Operation
Guide.
Centering Centers the original image on the paper when page 6-43
sending onto paper different from the original
size.
Job Finish Notice Sends E-mail notice when a job is complete. It is page 6-68
also available that send a notice when a job is
interrupted.
Functions File Name Entry Adds a file name. page 6-69
E-mail Subject/ Adds subject and body when sending a page 6-80
Configure the Body document.
settings for file
format and FAX i-FAX Subject/ Adds subject and body when sending a Refer to the
transmission when Body document by i-FAX. FAX
sending from the Operation
Custom Box. Guide.
FTP Encrypted TX Encrypts images when sending via FTP. page 6-81
Delete after Automatically deletes a document from the box page 6-81
Transmitted once transmission is complete.
Zoom Adjust the zoom to reduce or enlarge the image. page 6-38
File Separation Creates several files by dividing scanned original page 6-79
data page by specified number of pages, and
sends the files.
Text Stamp You can add a text stamp on the documents. page 6-61
Bates Stamp You can add a bates stamp on the documents. page 6-64
File Size Checks the file size before sending/storing the page 6-81
Confirmation original.
6-12
Using Various Functions > Functions Available on the Machine
Reference
Tab Function key Description
page
Original Image Select original image type for best results. page 6-33
Contrast You can adjust the contrast between light and page 6-36
dark areas of the image.
6-13
Using Various Functions > Functions Available on the Machine
Storing Image
Original : A4
Zoom : 100% Scan Color Sharpness Background
Store : A4 Resolution Selection Density Adj.
1/3
Status b050401
Store File
Reference
Tab Function key Description
page
Mixed Size Scan the documents of different sizes that are page 6-21
Originals set in the document processor all at once.
2-sided/Book Select the type and orientation of the binding page 6-72
Original, Book based on the original.
Original
Prevent Bleed-thru Hides background colors and image bleed- page 6-37
Functions through when scanning thin original.
Zoom Adjust the zoom to reduce or enlarge the image. page 6-38
Centering Centers the original image on the paper when page 6-43
storing onto paper different from the original size.
Border Erase/Full Erases the black border that forms around the page 6-44
Scan image.
6-14
Using Various Functions > Functions Available on the Machine
Reference
Tab Function key Description
page
Job Finish Notice Sends E-mail notice when a job is complete. It is page 6-68
also available that send a notice when a job is
interrupted.
Erase Shadowed When scanning with the document processor or page 6-54
Areas original cover open, erase the extra shaded area.
Skip Blank Page When there are blank pages in a scanned page 6-71
document, this function skips the blank pages
Functions and stores only pages that are not blank.
Contrast You can adjust the contrast between light and page 6-36
Configure the dark areas of the image.
settings for color
selection and Text Stamp You can add a text stamp on the documents. page 6-61
document name
when storing the Bates Stamp You can add a bates stamp on the documents. page 6-64
document in the File Format Specify the image file format. Image quality level page 6-74
USB drive. can also be adjusted.
File Separation Creates several files by dividing scanned original page 6-79
data page by specified number of pages, and
sends the files.
6-15
Using Various Functions > Functions Available on the Machine
Printing Documents
Reference
Tab Function key Description
page
Paper Selection Select the cassette or multipurpose tray that page 6-19
contains the required paper size.
Collate/Offset Offsets the output by page or set. page 6-26
Staple/Punch Staples or punches printed documents. page 6-27
Paper Output Specify the output tray. page 6-31
Margin Add margins (white space). In addition, you can page 6-43
set the margin width and the back page margin.
Duplex Print a document to 1-sided or 2-sided sheets. page 6-49
Job Finish Notice Sends E-mail notice when a job is complete. It is page 6-68
Functions also available that send a notice when a job is
interrupted.
Configure the Priority Override Suspends the current job and gives a new job top page 6-69
settings for paper priority.
selection and
duplex printing EcoPrint EcoPrint saves toner when printing. Use this page 6-34
when printing from function for test prints or any other occasion
the USB drive. when high quality print is not required.
Fold Fold the finished documents. page 6-25
Text Stamp You can add a text stamp on the documents. page 6-61
Bates Stamp You can add a bates stamp on the documents. page 6-64
Encrypted PDF Enter the preassigned password to print the PDF page 6-83
Password data.
JPEG/TIFF Print Select the image size when printing JPEG or page 6-83
TIFF files.
XPS Fit to Page Reduces or enlarges the image size to fit to the page 6-83
selected paper size when printing XPS file.
6-16
Using Various Functions > Functions
Functions
On pages that explain a convenient function, the modes in which that function can be used are indicated by icons.
Icon Description
6-17
Using Various Functions > Functions
Original Size
Org./Paper/ Org./Sending Custom Functions USB Functions
Copy Finishing Send Data Format Box Drive
Standard Sizes Metric models: Auto, A3, A4-R, A4, A5-R, A5, A6-R, Have the size of original detected
1 B4, B5, B5-R, B6-R, B6, Folio, automatically, or select from the
216×340 mm standard sizes.
Standard Sizes Metric models: Ledger, Letter-R, Letter, Legal, Select from standard sizes except
2 Statement-R, Statement, 11×15", Standard Sizes 1.
Oficio II, 8K, 16K-R, 16K
Others Hagaki (Cardstock), Oufuku hagaki (Return postcard), Select from postcard or the custom
Custom 1 to 4*1 sized originals.
Size Entry Metric X: 50 to 432 mm Enter the size not included in the
(in 1 mm increments) standard sizes 1 and 2.*2
Y: 50 to 297 mm When you have selected [Size Entry],
(in 1 mm increments) select [+] or [-] to set the sizes of "X"
(horizontal) and "Y" (vertical). Select
Inch X: 2.00 to 17.00" [# Keys] to use the numeric keys for
(in 0.01" increments) entry.
Y: 2.00 to 11.69"
(in 0.01" increments)
*1 For instructions on how to specify the custom original sizes (Custom 1 to 4), refer to the following:
Custom Original Size (page 8-11)
*2 The input units can be changed in System Menu. For details, refer to the following:
Measurement (page 8-15)
NOTE
Be sure to always specify the original size when using custom size original.
6-18
Using Various Functions > Functions
Paper Selection
Org./Paper/ Custom Functions USB Functions
Copy Finishing Box Drive
Select the cassette or multipurpose tray that contains the required paper size.
If [Auto] is selected, the paper matching the size of the original is selected automatically.
NOTE
• Specify in advance the size and type of the paper loaded in the cassette.
Cassette/MP Tray Settings (page 8-7)
• Cassettes after Cassette 3 are displayed when the optional paper feeder is installed.
To select [MP tray], select [Paper Size] and [Media Type], and specify the paper size and the media type. The available
paper sizes and media types are shown in the table below.
Paper Standard Metric models: A3*1*3, A4-R*2*3, A4*2*3, A5-R*2*3, A5*2, Select from the standard size.
Size Sizes 1 A6-R*2*3, B4*1*3, B5-R*2*3, B5*2*3,
B6-R*2*3, Folio*2*3, 216×340 mm, SRA3*1*3
Standard Metric models: Ledger*1*3, Letter-R*2*3, Letter*2*3, Select from standard sizes
Sizes 2 Legal*2*3, Statement*2*3, Executive, except Standard Sizes 1.
12×18"*1*3, Oficio II, 8K*4, 16K-R, 16K
Others 1 ISO B5, Envelope #10, Envelope #9, Envelope #6, Select from special standard
Envelope Monarch, Envelope DL, Envelope C5, sizes.
Envelope C4*4, Hagaki (Cardstock)*3, Oufuku Hagaki (Return
postcard), Kakugata 2*4, Youkei 4, Youkei 2, Younaga 3,
Nagagata 3, Nagagata 4
Size Metric X: 148 to 457 mm (in 1 mm increments) Enter the size not included in
Entry Y: 98 to 320 mm (in 1 mm increments) the standard size.*6
When you have selected
Inch X: 5.83 to 18.00" (in 0.01" increments)
[Size Entry], use [+]/[-] or the
Y: 3.86 to 12.60" (in 0.01" increments)
numeric keys to set the sizes
of "X" (horizontal) and "Y"
(vertical). Select [# Keys] to
use the numeric keys for
entry.
Media type Plain (60 to 105 g/m2), Transparency, Rough, Vellum (52 to 105 g/m2), Labels, Recycled,
Preprinted*7, Bond, Cardstock, Color, Prepunched*7, Letterhead*7, Thick (106 g/m2 and more),
Envelope, Coated, High Quality, Index Tab Dividers, Custom 1-8*7
6-19
Using Various Functions > Functions
*5 For instructions on how to specify the custom paper size, refer to the following:
Custom Paper Size (page 8-12)
*6 The input units can be changed in System Menu. For details, refer to the following:
Measurement (page 8-15)
*7 For instructions on how to specify the custom paper types 1 to 8, refer to the following:
Media Type Setting (page 8-15)
To print on preprinted or prepunched paper or on letterhead, refer to the following:
Special Paper Action (page 8-14)
IMPORTANT
When paper size and the media type for MP tray is specified, [Paper Settings] is selected. Note that if [MP
Tray] is pressed at this point, the settings will be canceled.
NOTE
• You can conveniently select in advance the size and type of paper that will be used often and set them as default.
MP Tray Setting (page 8-8)
• If the specified size of paper is not loaded in the paper source cassette or multipurpose tray, a confirmation screen
appears. When [Auto] is selected and the same size of paper as the detected original size is not loaded, a paper
confirmation screen appears. Load the required paper in the multipurpose tray and press [Continue] to start
copying.
6-20
Using Various Functions > Functions
Scan the documents of different sizes that are set in the document processor all at once.
This function cannot be used if platen is used. Different Width is not displayed in inch models.
Copying
Metric Models
Off
Mixed Size Original Width Same Width, Different Width Select options for the width of set original.
Copies
Same Size Original Width Same Width, Different Width Select options for the width of set original.
Copies
Top Page Long Edge Left, Short Edge Left Select the original orientation of the first
Direction page.
Inch Models
Off
Same Size Top Page Long Edge Left, Short Edge Left Select the original orientation of the first
Copies Direction page.
Sending
6-21
Using Various Functions > Functions
Storing
Off
Mixed Size Originals Same Width Scans and stores multiple sheets of the
same width using the document processor.
Same Width
When the original widths are the same, the combinations of originals that can be placed are as follows.
• B4 and B5
• Ledger and Letter (A3 and A4)
• Legal and Letter-R (Folio and A4-R)
Example: B4 and B5
NOTE
When mixing the original sizes as using the following combination, make sure to set "Auto Detect Original Size" to
[On] for "Folio".
Folio and A4
Auto Detect Original Size (page 8-13)
6-22
Using Various Functions > Functions
NOTE
• Number of sheet that can be placed in the document processor: up to 30 sheets
• When mixing the original sizes as using the following combination, make sure to set "Auto Detect Original Size" to
[On] for "Folio".
A4-R, B5-R, and Folio
Auto Detect Original Size (page 8-13)
IMPORTANT
When placing originals of different width, arrange the originals so that their left sides and top sides are
aligned, and place the originals in alignment with the far width guide. If the originals are not aligned in this
way, they may not be scanned correctly, and skewing or original jams may result.
NOTE
This function is available regardless of whether originals have the same width or not.
B4 A4-R B5 B4 A4-R B5
B4 A4-R B5 B4 B4 B4
6-23
Using Various Functions > Functions
Original Orientation
Org./Paper/ Org./Sending Custom Functions USB Functions
Copy Finishing Send Data Format Box Drive
Select the orientation of the original document top edge to scan correct direction.
To use any of the following functions, the document's original orientation must be set.
NOTE
If [On] is selected in the setting for Original Orientation in System Menu, the selection screen for original orientation
appears when you select any of the above functions.
Orientation Confirmation (page 8-19)
Select original orientation from [Top Edge on Top], [Top Edge on Left] or [Auto].
Item Image
Top Edge on
Top
Top Edge on
Left
Auto*1
*1 This function can only be used when the optional OCR Scan Activation Kit is installed.
NOTE
The default setting for Original Orientation can be changed.
Orig. Orientation (Copy) (page 8-19)
6-24
Using Various Functions > Functions
Fold
Org./Paper/ Custom Functions USB Functions
Copy Finishing Box Drive
Item
Bi-Fold
Saddle Stitch
L to R/T to B
Outside R to L/B to T
L to R/T to B
NOTE
• Folding requires the optional 4,000-sheet Finisher or 100-sheet Staple Finisher, and the folding unit.
• For details on paper sizes and numbers of sheets that can be folded, refer to the following:
Folding Unit (For 4,000-sheet Finisher) (page 11-30)
Folding Unit (For 100-sheet Staple Finisher) (page 11-31)
6-25
Using Various Functions > Functions
Collate/Offset
Org./Paper/ Custom Functions USB Functions
Copy Finishing Box Drive
Offset Without Document Finisher (Option) Printed copies are produced after rotating each set (or
page*1) by 90 degrees.
NOTE
To use offsetting, the same size of paper as the selected
paper tray must be loaded in a different orientation in a
different paper tray.
The paper sizes supported in Offset: A4, B5, Letter and
16K.
With Document Finisher (Option) Printed copies are segregated after each set of copies (or
after each page*1).
NOTE
• The optional Document Finisher is required.
Inner Finisher (page 11-26)
1,000-sheet Finisher (page 11-27)
4,000-sheet Finisher (page 11-28)
100-sheet Staple Finisher (page 11-29)
• The paper sizes supported in Offset: A3, A4, B4, B5,
216×340 mm, Ledger, Letter, Legal, Oficio II, 8K and
16K.
*1 If [Off] is selected for "Collate" setting, [Each Page] appears. When [On] is selected, [Each Set] appears.
6-26
Using Various Functions > Functions
Staple/Punch
Org./Paper/ Custom Functions USB Functions
Copy Finishing Box Drive
Staple
NOTE
This function requires the optional Document Finisher. Note also that saddle stitching (center stapling) requires the
Folding Unit.
For details on paper sizes and numbers of sheets that can be stapled, refer to the following:
Inner Finisher (page 11-26)
1,000-sheet Finisher (page 11-27)
4,000-sheet Finisher (page 11-28)
100-sheet Staple Finisher (page 11-29)
Folding Unit (For 4,000-sheet Finisher) (page 11-30)
Folding Unit (For 100-sheet Staple Finisher) (page 11-31)
Staple Off
2 staples Right
Original Top Edge on Top, Top Edge on Left, Select the orientation of the original document top edge
Orientation Auto*1 to scan correct direction. Select [Original Orientation]
to choose orientation of the originals, either [Top Edge
on Top] or [Top Edge on Left]. Then select [OK].
*1 This function can only be used when the optional OCR Scan Activation Kit is installed.
6-27
Using Various Functions > Functions
Paper orientation
Inner Finisher
Paper orientation
NOTE
One position staple is not slanted for the following paper sizes.
B5-R, 16K-R
6-28
Using Various Functions > Functions
Letter-R Legal
Punch
Punches holes in sets of finished documents.
NOTE
• This function requires the optional Document Finisher and Punch Unit.
• For details on paper sizes that can be punched, refer to the following:
Punch Unit (For Inner Finisher) (page 11-26)
Punch Unit (For 1,000-sheet/4,000-sheet/100-sheet Staple Finisher) (page 11-29)
• The inch model provides two-hole and three-hole punching. The metric model provides two-hole and four-hole
punching.
Punch Off
2 holes Left Select the position of punch holes. For details on original
orientation and position of punch holes, refer to the
2 holes Top following:
2 holes Right Original Orientation and Punch Hole Position (page
6-30)
3 holes Left
3 holes Top
3 holes Right
4 holes Left
4 holes Top
4 holes Right
Original Top Edge on Top, Top Edge on Left, Select the orientation of the original document top edge
Orientation Auto*1 to scan correct direction. Select [Original Orientation]
to choose orientation of the originals, either [Top Edge
on Top] or [Top Edge on Left]. Then select [OK].
*1 This function can only be used when the optional OCR Scan Activation Kit is installed.
6-29
Using Various Functions > Functions
NOTE
The inch model provides two-hole and three-hole punching. The metric model provides two-hole and four-hole
punching.
6-30
Using Various Functions > Functions
Paper Output
Org./Paper/ Custom Functions USB Functions
Copy Finishing Box Drive
Item Description
Item Description
Finisher Tray Delivery to the Finisher Tray of the optional Document Finisher.
*1 The paper sizes cannot be output to the Job Separator Tray: A3, Ledger.
Item Description
*1 The paper sizes cannot be output to the Job Separator Tray: A3, Ledger.
Item Description
Tray 1 to 7 Delivery to tray 1 to 7 (tray 1 is the uppermost tray) of the optional Mailbox.
When [Heavy 3] to [Heavy 4] (164 g/m2 - 256 g/m2) is set in Paper Weight and Mailbox is
set for the output destination, the output destination is automatically changed to the tray B.
When [Heavy 5] (257 g/m2 - 300 g/m2) is set in Paper Weight and Mailbox is set for the
output destination, the output destination is automatically changed to the tray A.
*1 The paper sizes cannot be output to the Job Separator Tray: A3, Ledger.
6-31
Using Various Functions > Functions
NOTE
• This can be set when the optional Job Separator or Document Finisher (1,000-sheet Finisher, 4,000-sheet Finisher,
or 100-sheet Staple Finisher) is installed. This cannot be set when the optional Inner Finisher is installed.
• The default setting for Paper Output can be changed.
Paper Output (page 8-18)
ID Card Copy
Org./Paper/
Copy Finishing
Use this when you want to copy a driver's license or an insurance card. When you scan the front and back of the card,
both sides will be combined and copied onto a single sheet.
(Value: [Off] / [On])
Density
Image Quality Color/ Custom Functions Image Quality Color/ USB Functions
Copy Send Image Quality Box Image Quality Drive
Adjust density.
(Value: [-4] (Lighter) to [+4] (Darker))
6-32
Using Various Functions > Functions
Original Image
Image Quality Color/ Custom Functions Image Quality Color/ USB Functions
Copy Send Image Quality Box Image Quality Drive
Copying
Text+Photo *1 Original Type Printer Output Best for mixed text and photo documents printed
on this machine originally.
Highlighter Off, On (Normal), Select [On (Normal)] to reproduce the color of the
Enhancement On (Bright) text and markings made with highlighter pen.
If the colors are not bright enough, select [On
(Bright)].
Photo Original Type Printer Output Best for photos printed on this machine originally.
Text Light Text/Fine Line Off Best for documents that are mostly text and were
originally printed on this machine.
Highlighter Off, On (Normal), Select [On (Normal)] to reproduce the color of the
Enhancement On (Bright) text and markings made with highlighter pen.
If the colors are not bright enough, select [On
(Bright)].
Graphic/Map Original Type Printer Output Best for maps and diagrams printed on this
machine originally.
Highlighter Off, On (Normal), Select [On (Normal)] to reproduce the color of the
Enhancement On (Bright) text and markings made with highlighter pen.
If the colors are not bright enough, select [On
(Bright)].
*1 If gray text is not printed completely using [Text + Photo], selecting [Text] may improve the result.
6-33
Using Various Functions > Functions
Sending/Printing/Storing
Highlighter Off, On (Normal), Select [On (Normal)] to reproduce the color of the text and
Enhancement On (Bright) markings made with highlighter pen.
If the colors are not bright enough, select [On (Bright)].
Text*1 Sharply renders pencil text and fine lines. Select [Text], [Text
(Fine Line)] or [Text (OCR)].
Highlighter Off, On (Normal), Select [On (Normal)] to reproduce the color of the text and
Enhancement On (Bright) markings made with highlighter pen.
If the colors are not bright enough, select [On (Bright)].
*1 The setting "for OCR" can be configured. When [Text (OCR)] is selected, scanning produces an image that is
suitable for OCR. This function is only available when Color Selection is set to Black and White.
Color Selection (page 6-35)
EcoPrint
Image Quality Custom Functions USB Functions
Copy Box Drive
EcoPrint saves toner when printing. Use this function for test prints or any other occasion when high quality print is not
required.
Off
6-34
Using Various Functions > Functions
Color Selection
Color/ Custom Functions Color/ USB Functions
Send Image Quality Box Image Quality Drive
NOTE
The default color mode for scanning documents is [Auto Color (Color/Gray)].
Item Description
Auto Color (Color/Gray) Automatically recognizes whether the document is color or black and
white, and scan color documents in Full Color and black and white
documents in Grayscale.
Auto Color (Color/B & W) Automatically recognizes whether the document is color or black and
white, and scan color documents in Full Color and black and white
documents in Black and White.
6-35
Using Various Functions > Functions
Sharpness
Image Quality Color/ Custom Functions Image Quality Color/ USB Functions
Copy Send Image Quality Box Image Quality Drive
[-1] to [-3] (Blur) Blurs the image outline. Can weaken a Moire*1 effect.
Text/Fine Line [0] to [3] Makes letters and lines appear sharper.
(Normal - Sharpen) Only text and fine lines are emphasized.
Contrast
Image Quality Color/ Custom Functions Image Quality Color/ USB Functions
Copy Send Image Quality Box Image Quality Drive
You can adjust the contrast between light and dark areas of the image.
Item Description
6-36
Using Various Functions > Functions
Item Description
Manual Select [1] to [5] (Lighter - Darker) to adjust the background density manually.
Prevent Bleed-thru
Image Quality Color/ Custom Functions Image Quality Color/ USB Functions
Copy Send Image Quality Box Image Quality Drive
Hides background colors and image bleed-through when scanning thin original.
(Value: [Off] / [On])
Erase Colors
Image Quality Color/ Custom Functions USB Functions
Copy Send Image Quality Box Drive
Off
On Yellow, Red, Cyan, Select the colors to erase. You can select up to 6 colors.
Magenta, Green, Blue,
Black
Color Range 1 (Narrower) to 5 Choose a range of colors to erase. If you select [5] (Wider)
(Wider) and specify yellow, greens close to yellow and even reds
will also be erased.
NOTE
If you select only [Black], you cannot set the Color Range.
6-37
Using Various Functions > Functions
Zoom
Layout/Edit Advanced Custom Functions USB Functions
Copy Send Setup Box Drive
Copying
The following zoom options are available.
Standard Zoom
Auto
Adjusts the image to match the paper size.
A3: 141%
A4
A5: 70%
Standard Zoom
Reduces or enlarges at preset magnifications.
Zoom Entry
Manually reduces or enlarges the original image in 1% increments between 25% and 400%.
Use the numeric keys or select [+] or [-] to enter the any magnification.
6-38
Using Various Functions > Functions
Standard Zoom
Metric Auto,
(Asia Pacific) 400% Max., 200% A5>>A3,
141% A4>>A3 B5>>B4,
122% A4>>B4 A5>>B5,
115% B4>>A3 B5>>A4,
100%,
86% A3>>B4 A4>>B5,
81% B4>>A4 B5>>A5,
70% A3>>A4 B4>>B5,
50%, 25% Min.
25 to 400% (in 1% increments)
Inch Auto,
400% Max., 200% STMT>>Ledger,
154% STMT>>Legal,
129% Letter>>Ledger,
121% Legal>>Ledger,
100%,
78% Legal>>Letter,
77% Ledger>>Legal,
64% Ledger>>Letter,
50% Ledger>>STMT, 25% Min.
25 to 400% (in 1% increments)
6-39
Using Various Functions > Functions
XY Zoom
XY Zoom
Select vertical and horizontal magnifications individually. Magnifications can be set in 1%
increments between 25% and 400%.
X
Item Value Description
Original Top Edge on Top, Top Select the orientation of the original
Orientation Edge on Left, Auto*1 document top edge to scan correct
direction.
Select [Original Orientation] to
choose orientation of the originals,
either [Top Edge on Top] or [Top
Edge on Left]. Then press [OK].
*1 This function can only be used when the optional OCR Scan Activation Kit is installed.
Printing/Sending/Storing
Item Description
NOTE
• To reduce or enlarge the image, select the paper size, sending size, or storing size.
Paper Selection (page 6-19)
Sending Size (page 6-73)
Storing Size (page 6-82)
• Some combinations of original size and paper size or sending size may cause the image to be positioned at the
edge of the paper. To center the original vertically and horizontally on the page, use the Centering function.
Margin/Centering, Margin, Centering (page 6-43)
6-40
Using Various Functions > Functions
Combine
Copy
Layout/Edit Custom Functions
Box
Off
Border Line None, Solid Line, Dotted Line, Select the boundary line type.
Positioning Mark Select [Border Line] to select the page
boundary line, and select [OK].
Original Orientation Top Edge on Top, Top Edge on Left, Select the orientation of the original
Auto*1 document top edge to scan correct
direction.
Select [Original Orientation] to choose
orientation of the originals, either [Top
Edge on Top] or [Top Edge on Left].
Then select [OK].
4 in 1 Layout Right then Down, Left then Down, Select the page layout of scanned
Down then Right, Down then Left originals.
Border Line None, Solid Line, Dotted Line, Select the boundary line type.
Positioning Mark Select [Border Line] to select the page
boundary line, and select [OK].
Original Orientation Top Edge on Top, Top Edge on Left, Select the orientation of the original
Auto*1 document top edge to scan correct
direction.
Select [Original Orientation] to choose
orientation of the originals, either [Top
Edge on Top] or [Top Edge on Left].
Then select [OK].
*1 This function can only be used when the optional OCR Scan Activation Kit is installed.
6-41
Using Various Functions > Functions
Layout image
Item Image
2 in 1 L to R/T to B
R to L/B to T
NOTE
• The paper sizes supported in Combine mode: A3, A4-R, A4, A5-R, A5, B4, B5-R, B5, Folio, 216×340 mm, SRA3,
Ledger, Letter-R, Letter, Legal, Statement-R, Oficio II, 8K, 16K-R and 16K.
• When placing the original on the platen, be sure to copy the originals in page order.
6-42
Using Various Functions > Functions
Copying/Printing
Add margins (white space). In addition, you can set the margin width and the back page margin.
Centering: Centers the original image on the paper when copying onto paper different from the original size.
NOTE
The default setting for margin width can be changed.
Margin Default (page 8-20)
Off
Back Page Auto, Manual For duplex copying, select [Back Page] and
select [Auto] or [Manual].
When [Auto] is selected, an appropriate margin is
applied automatically on the rear page depending
on a margin specified for the front page and a
binding orientation.
When [Manual] is set, you can set a different
margin than the front on the back. Set the margin
in the screen that is displayed. The setting
selections are the same as for the front.
Original Top Edge on Top, Top Edge Select the orientation of the original document top
Orientation on Left, Auto*2 edge to scan correct direction.
Select [Original Orientation] to choose
orientation of the originals, either [Top Edge on
Top] or [Top Edge on Left]. Then select [OK].
Centering*3 Original Top Edge on Top, Top Edge Select the orientation of the original document top
Orientation on Left, Auto*2 edge to scan correct direction.
Select [Original Orientation] to choose
orientation of the originals, either [Top Edge on
Top] or [Top Edge on Left]. Then select [OK].
6-43
Using Various Functions > Functions
Sending/Storing
When you have sent/stored the original after specifying the original size and sending/storing size, depending on these
sizes, a margin is created at the bottom, left, or right side of paper. By using the Centering function, the image is placed
with a margin equally created for all edges.
(Value: [Off] / [On])
Standard
Erase the black frame created in the original. Erasing width is fixed.
Original Copy
Full Scan
Scan originals without white margins. No border erase.
Original Copy
Original Copy
Original Copy
Original Copy
6-44
Using Various Functions > Functions
NOTE
• [Full Scan] is not displayed when copying.
• The default setting for border erase width can be changed.
Border Erase Default (page 8-20)
• The default width for back page can be changed.
Border Erase to Back Page (page 8-20)
Standard Scan originals with Standard Mode. (Border Erase Width: 2 mm)
Back Page Same as Front Page, Do Not For 2-sided originals, select [Back Page]
Erase and then select [Same as Front Page] or
[Do Not Erase].
Back Page Same as Front Page, Do Not For 2-sided originals, select [Back Page]
Erase and then select [Same as Front Page] or
[Do Not Erase].
Right
Original Top Edge on Top, Top Edge on Select the orientation of the original
Orientation Left, Auto*3 document top edge to scan correct
direction. Select [Original Orientation] to
choose orientation of the originals, either
[Top Edge on Top] or [Top Edge on Left].
Then select [OK].
Back Page Same as Front Page, Do Not For 2-sided originals, select [Back Page]
Erase and then select [Same as Front Page] or
[Do Not Erase].
6-45
Using Various Functions > Functions
Booklet
Copy
Layout/Edit Custom Functions
Box
The Booklet option allows you to copy sheet originals and produce booklets such as small brochures or pamphlets. A
booklet, such as a magazine, is made by folding at the center.
You can print the cover page onto colored paper or thick paper. Paper for the cover is supplied from the multipurpose
tray. To feed the cover paper from the cassette, refer to the following:
Paper Source for Cover (page 8-13)
NOTE
Using the optional 4,000-sheet Finisher and the folding unit enables you to saddle stitch your copies (fold them in two
with staples in the center). Supported paper sizes are A3, A4-R, B4, Ledger, Letter-R, Legal, Oficio II and 8K.
One-sided original, All*1 A3, A4-R, A4, A5, B4, B5-R, B5, Ledger,
Two-sided original Letter-R, Letter, Legal, Oficio II and 8K
Original Copy
Original Copy
Top binding
The folded copies can be read from top to bottom.
Original Copy
6-46
Using Various Functions > Functions
Copying
Off
1-sided >> Finishing Binding Left, Select the binding orientation of copies.
Booklet Binding Right,
Binding Top
Cover Off
Cover: Not Print, Select whether to add the cover. Select the
Front Cover Front Only, printing method for the cover to be
Print Setting Back Only, Duplex inserted.
Select [Cover], and then [Cover], and
Cover: Not Print, specify the print setting for the cover to be
Back Cover Front Only, inserted. Select from [Not Print], [Back
Print Setting Back Only, Duplex Only], [Front Only], and [Duplex], and
press [OK].
Original Orientation Top Edge on Top, Select the orientation of the original
Top Edge on Left, document top edge to scan correct
Auto*1 direction. Select [Original Orientation] to
choose orientation of the originals, either
[Top Edge on Top] or [Top Edge on Left].
Then press [OK].
2-sided >> Original Binding Left/Right, Select the binding direction of originals.
Booklet Binding Top
Cover Off
Cover: Not Print, Select whether to add the cover. Select the
Front Cover Front Only, printing method for the cover to be
Print Setting Back Only, Duplex inserted.
Select [Cover], and then [Cover], and
Cover: Not Print, specify the print setting for the cover to be
Back Cover Front Only, inserted. Select from [Not Print], [Back
Print Setting Back Only, Duplex Only], [Front Only], and [Duplex], and
press [OK].
Original Orientation Top Edge on Top, Select the orientation of the original
Top Edge on Left, document top edge to scan correct
Auto*1 direction. Select [Original Orientation] to
choose orientation of the originals, either
[Top Edge on Top] or [Top Edge on Left].
Then press [OK].
6-47
Using Various Functions > Functions
Book >> Original Binding Left, Select the binding direction of originals.
Booklet*2 Binding Right
*1 This function can only be used when the optional OCR Scan Activation Kit is installed.
*2 [Top Edge on Top] is set for "Original Orientation".
Printing
Off
Booklet Binding Left, Right, Top Select the binding orientation of copies.
Cover Off
Cover: Not Print, Select whether to add the cover. Select the
Front Cover Front Only, printing method for the cover to be
Print Setting Back Only, Duplex inserted.
Select [Cover], and then [Cover], and
Cover: Not Print, specify the print setting for the cover to be
Back Cover Front Only, inserted. Select from [Not Print], [Back
Print Setting Back Only, Duplex Only], [Front Only], and [Duplex], and
press [OK].
NOTE
• The number of sheets that can be folded or Saddle Stitch stapled varies depending on paper weight. For details,
refer to the following:
Folding Unit (For 4,000-sheet Finisher) (page 11-30)
• When placing the original on the platen, be sure to place the originals in page order.
6-48
Using Various Functions > Functions
Duplex
Layout/Edit Custom Functions USB Functions
Copy Box Drive
Produces two-sided copies. You can also create single-sided copies from two-sided originals.
The following modes are available.
One-sided to Two-sided
Produces two-sided copies from one-sided originals. In case of an odd
number of originals, the back side of the last copy will be blank.
Original Copy
The following binding options are available.
A B
def
ghi
ghi
ghi
A Binding Left/Right: Images on the second sides are not rotated.
abc
abc abc
B Binding Top: Images on the second sides are rotated 180 degrees.
def
def Copies can be bound on the top edge, facing the same orientation
when turning the pages.
Original Copy
Two-sided to One-sided
Copies each side of a two-sided original onto two individual sheets. Place
originals in the optional document processor.
The following binding options are available.
Original Copy • Binding Left/Right: Images on the second sides are not rotated.
• Binding Top: Images on the second sides are rotated 180 degrees.
Two-sided to Two-sided
Produces two-sided copies from two-sided originals. Place originals in the
optional document processor.
Original Copy
NOTE
The paper sizes supported in Duplex mode: A3, A4-R, A4, A5-R, A5, A6-R, B4, B5-R, B5, B6-R, 216×340 mm, SRA3,
Ledger, Letter-R, Letter, Legal, Statement-R, Executive, 12×18", Oficio II, Folio, 8K, 16K-R, 16K, ISO B5, Hagaki
(Cardstock), Oufuku hagaki (Return postcard) and Custom 1 to 4.
6-49
Using Various Functions > Functions
Book to One-sided
Produces a 1-sided copy of a 2-sided or open book original.
The following binding options are available.
Binding Left: Originals with facing pages are copied from left to right.
Original Copy Binding Right: Originals with facing pages are copied from right to left.
NOTE
• The original sizes supported in Book to One-sided mode: A3, A4-R, A5-R, B4, B5-R, Ledger, Letter-R and 8K
• The paper sizes supported in Book to One-sided mode: A4-R, A4, A5, B5-R, B5, Letter-R, Letter, 16K-R and 16K
Book to Two-sided
Book to Book to Produces two-sided copies from an open book original with
2-sided Book facing pages.
Original Copy
NOTE
• The original sizes supported in Book to Two-sided mode: A3, A4-R, A5-R, B4, B5-R, Ledger, Letter-R and 8K
• The paper sizes supported in Book to Two-sided mode: A4-R, A4, A5, B5-R, B5, Letter-R, Letter, 16K-R and 16K
Copying
Prints 1-sided or open book originals to 2-sided, or 2-sided or open book originals to 1-sided. Select the binding
orientation for original and finished documents.
1-sided >> Finishing Binding Left/Right, Binding Top Select the binding orientation of copies.
2-sided
Original Top Edge on Top, Top Edge on Select the orientation of the original
Orientation Left, Auto*1 document top edge to scan correct
direction. Select [Original Orientation] to
choose orientation of the originals, either
[Top Edge on Top] or [Top Edge on Left].
Then select [OK].
6-50
Using Various Functions > Functions
2-sided >> Original Binding Left/Right, Binding Top Select the binding orientation of originals.
1-sided
Original Top Edge on Top, Top Edge on Select the orientation of the original
Orientation Left, Auto*1 document top edge to scan correct
direction. Select [Original Orientation] to
choose orientation of the originals, either
[Top Edge on Top] or [Top Edge on Left].
Then select [OK].
2-sided >> Original Binding Left/Right, Binding Top Select the binding direction of originals.
2-sided
Finishing Binding Left/Right, Binding Top Select the binding orientation of copies.
Original Top Edge on Top, Top Edge on Select the orientation of the original
Orientation Left, Auto*1 document top edge to scan correct
direction. Select [Original Orientation] to
choose orientation of the originals, either
[Top Edge on Top] or [Top Edge on Left].
Then select [OK].
Book >> Original Binding Left, Binding Right Select the binding direction of originals.
1-sided*2
Book >> Original Binding Left, Binding Right Select the binding direction of originals.
2-sided*2
Finishing Book>>2-sided, Book>>Book Select the desired Duplex option.
*1 This function can only be used when the optional OCR Scan Activation Kit is installed.
*2 [Top Edge on Top] is set for "Original Orientation".
When placing the original on the platen, consecutively replace each original and press the [Start] key.
After scanning all originals, select [Finish Scan] to start copying.
Printing
Print a document to 1-sided or 2-sided sheets.
2-sided Left/Right Prints a 2-sided document so that the sheets are aligned properly for binding on the
left or right.
Top Prints a 2-sided document so that the sheets are aligned properly for binding on the
top.
6-51
Using Various Functions > Functions
Cover
Copy
Layout/Edit Custom Functions
Box
Off
Front Cover Not Print, Front Only, Back Different paper has to be inserted for the
Only*1, Duplex*1 first page of the document.
Select [Stop Printing], [Front Only],
[Back Only], or [Duplex] for the print
setting of the inserted paper.
Front and Back Front Cover Print Not Print, Front Only, Back Different paper has to be inserted for the
Covers Setting Only*1, Duplex*1 first page and last page of the document.
Select [Stop Printing], [Front Only],
Back Cover Print Not Print, Front Only, Back
[Back Only], or [Duplex] for the print
Setting Only*1, Duplex*1
setting of the inserted paper.
6-52
Using Various Functions > Functions
Form Overlay
Copy
Layout/Edit Custom Functions
Box
Density:
30%
Form Original Copy
Density:
100%
Off
Select Stored Density 10% to 100% Specify the density of the form to be
Form overlaid.
Select [+] or [-] in "Density".
Scan New Density 10% to 100% Specify the density of the form to be
Form*2 overlaid.
Select [+] or [-] in "Density".
6-53
Using Various Functions > Functions
When scanning with the document processor or original cover open, erase the extra shaded area.
(Value: [Off] / [On])
NOTE
In case the document processor or the original cover is not opened sufficiently, it might not be able to erase the
shaded area.
6-54
Using Various Functions > Functions
Page #
Copy
Layout/Edit Custom Functions
Box
Off
-1-, P.1, Position Top Left, Top Middle, Select the print position of page number.
1/n Top Right, Bottom Left, Select [Detail] to specify the detailed page number
Bottom Middle, position using numeric values, and to set the page
Bottom Right, Detail number position ([Same as Front Page], [Mirror Front
Page]) when a page number is placed on the back side
of the paper in duplex printing.
1st Page 1 to 10 To start page numbering from a page other than the first
page, select [+] or [-] in "1st Page" to specify the starting
page. Select [# Keys] to use the numeric keys for entry.
6-55
Using Various Functions > Functions
-1-, P.1, Count Blank ― When a scanned document contains blank pages, add a
1/n Page*1 check mark if you require blank pages to be numbered.
Remove the check mark to skip blank pages.
Last Page Auto, Manual (-10 to 0) If you do not want page numbering through to the last
page, select [Last Page]. Select [Manual] and select [+]
or [-] to specify the final page to be numbered (a
negative number of pages counting backwards from the
last page), and then select [OK]. Specify the desired
number up to -10. Select [# Keys] to use the numeric
keys for entry.
Font Size Font sizes registered in Set the font size of page number.
"Text (Text Stamp)" are
displayed.
Text (Text Stamp)
(page 8-23)
Style None, Bold, Italic, Set the font style of page number. Select a font style by
Bold/Italic checking the checkbox.
Denominator#*2 Auto, Manual (1 to 999) The total number of pages "n" in the format [1/n] can be
changed manually. Select [Denominator #] and select
[Manual]. Select [+] or [-] to enter the total number of
pages and select [OK]. Select [# Keys] to use the
numeric keys for entry.
Original Top Edge on Top, Select the orientation of the original document top edge
Orientation Top Edge on Left, to scan correct direction. Select [Original Orientation]
Auto*3 to choose orientation of the originals, either [Top Edge
on Top] or [Top Edge on Left]. Then select [OK].
6-56
Using Various Functions > Functions
Insert Sheets/Chapters
Layout/Edit
Copy
Insert a separator sheet, or make the first page of the chapter the front page when performing duplex printing.
The configured pages are displayed on the list.
Off
Sheets Setting Not Print, Front Select [Not Print], [Front Only], [Back
Only, Back Only], or [Duplex] for the print setting of
Only*1, Duplex*1 the inserted paper.
6-57
Using Various Functions > Functions
Memo Page
Layout/Edit
Copy
NOTE
The paper sizes supported in Memo mode: A3, A4-R, A4, A5-R, A5, B4, B5-R, B5, 216×340 mm, Ledger, Letter-R,
Letter, Legal, Statement-R, Oficio II, Folio, 8K, 16K-R and 16K
Layout A
Reduces images of each original page for printing onto half of a page,
leaving the other half blank for notes.
Original Copy
Layout B
Reduces images of two original pages for printing onto half of a page,
leaving the other half blank for notes.
Original Copy
Off
Layout A Layout Left/Top, Right/Bottom Select how to lay out the pages of scanned
original.
Border Line None, Solid Line, Dotted Line, Select the boundary line type. Select [Border
Positioning Mark Line] to select the page boundary line, and select
[OK].
Original Top Edge on Top, Select the orientation of the original document top
Orientation Top Edge on Left, Auto*1 edge to scan correct direction. Select [Original
Orientation] to choose orientation of the originals,
either [Top Edge on Top] or [Top Edge on Left].
Then select [OK].
6-58
Using Various Functions > Functions
Layout B Layout Top L to R, Top R to L, Select how to lay out the pages of scanned
Top L to B, Top R to B original.
Border Line None, Solid Line, Dotted Line, Select the boundary line type. Select [Border
Positioning Mark Line] to select the page boundary line, and select
[OK].
Original Top Edge on Top, Select the orientation of the original document top
Orientation Top Edge on Left, Auto*1 edge to scan correct direction. Select [Original
Orientation] to choose orientation of the originals,
either [Top Edge on Top] or [Top Edge on Left].
Then select [OK].
*1 This function can only be used when the optional OCR Scan Activation Kit is installed.
6-59
Using Various Functions > Functions
Image Repeat
Layout/Edit
Copy
Tiles the 1 copied sheet with an original image. You can also specify the area of the original to repeat.
Zoom Priority
Repeat an image of specified zoom ratio.
Original Copy
Double Copy
Copy two image.
Original Copy
Off
Specify Off
Repeat
Area On: Metric*1 To set the area of the original to be repeated, select [On] for
Start X1: 0 to 431 mm "Specify Repeat Area".
Y1: 0 to 296 mm Select [+] or [-] to input the area of the original to be repeated.
Inch Select [# Keys] to use the numeric keys for entry.
X1: 0.00 to 16.99"
Y1: Length from top left of
Y1: 0.00 to 11.68"
platen to top edge of repeat
On: Metric area
Area X2: 1 to 432 mm X1: Length from top left of
Y2: 1 to 297 mm platen to left edge of repeat
Inch area
X2: 0.01 to 17.00" Y2: Height of repeat area
Y2: 0.01 to 11.69"
X2: Width of repeat area
6-60
Using Various Functions > Functions
Text Stamp
Layout/Edit Advanced Custom Functions USB Functions
Copy Send Setup Box Drive
Copying/Printing
NOTE
This cannot be set when Text Stamp is set in the system settings.
Printing Jobs (page 8-24)
Off
On Stamp Keyboard, Template 1 to 8 Select [Keyboard] and enter the text string to
be printed, or select a text stamp from the
displayed templates.
NOTE
Templates that have been set will appear.
For details on registering templates, refer to
the following:
Text (Text Stamp) (page 8-23)
Position Top Left, Top Middle, Top Set the stamp position to be printed.
Right, Middle Left, Center, Select [Position] and select the text stamp
Middle Right, Bottom Left, position.
Bottom Middle, Bottom Right,
Select [Detail] to specify the detailed stamp
Detail
position using numeric values, and to set the
stamp position and angle when a stamp is
placed on the back side of the paper in duplex
printing.
6-61
Using Various Functions > Functions
On Font Size Registered font sizes are Set the font size of text stamp.
displayed. For details on
registering font sizes, refer to
the following:
Font (Text Stamp) (page 8-
23)
Character Off, Circle, Rectangle, Set the character border and underline.
Border Underline
Style None, Bold, Italic, Bold/Italic Set the font style of text stamp. Select a font
style by checking the checkbox.
Original Orientation Top Edge on Top, Top Edge Select the orientation of the original document
on Left, Auto*1 top edge to scan correct direction. Select
[Original Orientation] to choose orientation
of the originals, either [Top Edge on Top] or
[Top Edge on Left]. Then select [OK].
*1 This function can only be used when the optional OCR Scan Activation Kit is installed.
6-62
Using Various Functions > Functions
Sending/Storing
NOTE
This cannot be set when Text Stamp is set in the system settings.
Sending Jobs (page 8-26)
Storing Jobs (page 8-28)
Off
On Stamp Keyboard, Template 1 to 8 Select [Keyboard] and enter the text string to
be printed, or select a text stamp from the
displayed templates.
NOTE
Templates that have been set will appear.
For details on registering templates, refer to
the following:
Text (Text Stamp) (page 8-23)
Position Top Left, Top Middle, Top Set the stamp position to be printed.
Right, Middle Left, Center, Select [Position] and select the text stamp
Middle Right, Bottom Left, position.
Bottom Middle, Bottom Right,
Select [Detail] to set the stamp position using
Detail
numeric values, and to set the stamp angle.
Font Size Registered font sizes are Set the font size of text stamp.
displayed. For details on
registering font sizes, refer to
the following:
Font (Text Stamp) (page 8-
23)
Character Off, Circle, Rectangle, Set the character border and underline.
Border Underline
Style None, Bold, Italic, Bold/Italic Set the font style of text stamp. Select a font
style by checking the checkbox.
Color Black, Red, Green, Blue, Set the color of text stamp.
Cyan, Magenta, Yellow, White
Original Orientation Top Edge on Top, Select the orientation of the original document
Top Edge on Left, Auto*1 top edge to scan correct direction. Select
[Original Orientation] to choose orientation
of the originals, either [Top Edge on Top] or
[Top Edge on Left]. Then select [OK].
*1 This function can only be used when the optional OCR Scan Activation Kit is installed.
6-63
Using Various Functions > Functions
Bates Stamp
Layout/Edit Advanced Custom Functions USB Functions
Copy Send Setup Box Drive
Copying/Printing
NOTE
This cannot be set when Bates Stamp is set in the system settings.
Printing Jobs (page 8-24)
Off
Position Top Left, Top Middle, Top Set the stamp position to be printed.
Right, Middle Left, Center, Select [Position] and select the bates stamp
Middle Right, Bottom Left, position.
Bottom Middle, Bottom Right,
Select [Detail] to specify the detailed stamp
Detail
position using numeric values, and to set the
stamp position when a stamp is placed on the
back side of the paper in duplex printing.
6-64
Using Various Functions > Functions
On Font Size Registered font sizes are Set the font size of bates stamp.
displayed. For details on
registering font sizes, refer to
the following:
Font (Bates Stamp) (page
8-23)
Style None, Bold, Italic, Bold/Italic Set the font style of bates stamp. Select a font
style by checking the checkbox.
Display Transparent, Clipping, Set the display method of the bates stamp.
Pattern Overwrite
Original Orientation Top Edge on Top, Select the orientation of the original document
Top Edge on Left, Auto*1 top edge to scan correct direction. Select
[Original Orientation] to choose orientation
of the originals, either [Top Edge on Top] or
[Top Edge on Left]. Then select [OK].
*1 This function can only be used when the optional OCR Scan Activation Kit is installed.
6-65
Using Various Functions > Functions
Sending/Storing
NOTE
This cannot be set when Bates Stamp is set in the system settings.
Sending Jobs (page 8-27)
Storing Jobs (page 8-28)
Off
Position Top Left, Top Middle, Top Set the stamp position to be printed.
Right, Middle Left, Center, Select [Position] and select the bates stamp
Middle Right, Bottom Left, position.
Bottom Middle, Bottom Right,
Select [Detail] to specify the stamp position
Detail
using numeric values.
Font Size Registered font sizes are Set the font size of bates stamp.
displayed. For details on
registering font sizes, refer to
the following:
Font (Bates Stamp) (page
8-23)
Style None, Bold, Italic, Bold/Italic Set the font style of bates stamp. Select a font
style by checking the checkbox.
Color Black, Red, Green, Blue, Set the color of bates stamp.
Cyan, Magenta, Yellow, White
Original Orientation Top Edge on Top, Select the orientation of the original document
Top Edge on Left, Auto*1 top edge to scan correct direction. Select
[Original Orientation] to choose orientation
of the originals, either [Top Edge on Top] or
[Top Edge on Left]. Then select [OK].
*1 This function can only be used when the optional OCR Scan Activation Kit is installed.
6-66
Using Various Functions > Functions
Continuous Scan
Advanced Advanced Custom Functions USB Functions
Copy Setup Send Setup Box Drive
Scans a large number of originals in separate batches and then produce as one job.
Originals will be scanned continuously until you select [Finish Scan].
Select [On] to use continuous scanning. To use Job Build, select [Job Build]. You can set the functions that appear on
the screen during scanning.
(Value: [Off] / [On] / [Job Build])
1 11 21 1
Job Build
When [Job Build] is selected when copying or printing, the binding orientation for finished documents can be selected
from [Binding Left], [Binding Right] or [Binding Top].
The following functions can be selected during scanning.
Item Description
Next Copy: On Back In duplex copying, prints on the back side if the next page is to be printed on the front
side. Select [Next Copy: On Back] to use this function.
Next Copy: On Front In duplex copying, prints on the front side if the next page is to be printed on the back
side. Select [Next Copy: On Front] to use this function.
Sheet Insertion Inserts a blank paper in the next page. Select [Sheet Insertion] to use this function.
Automatically rotates the image 90 degrees when the sizes of the original and the loaded paper matches but the
orientations are different.
(Value: [Off] / [On])
NOTE
• You can select whether to rotate the image automatically in the default settings.
Auto Image Rotation (Copy) (page 8-20)
• When you have enabled this function, you can select how the images are rotated.
Auto Image Rotation Action (page 8-35)
6-67
Using Various Functions > Functions
Negative Image
Advanced
Copy Setup
NOTE
This function is only available for black and white copy mode.
Mirror Image
Advanced
Copy Setup
Sends E-mail notice when a job is complete. It is also available that send a notice when a job is interrupted.
Users can be notified of the completion of a job while working at a remote desk, saving the time spent waiting beside the
machine to finish.
NOTE
• PC should be configured in advance so that E-mail can be used.
Embedded Web Server RX (page 2-62)
• E-mail can be sent to a single destination.
• It will be possible to download the scan data in PC from the stored URL described in the text of the notice E-mail of
Job Finish Notice for "Send to Folder (SMB/FTP)" or "Storing Documents to a Custom Box". This is a useful function
in case if it is not possible to send/receive a large amount of scan data due to the restriction of the mail attachment
file size.
Item Description
Off
Address Book Select the notification destination from the address book.
Address Book Select the notification destination on the address book screen, then select [OK].
Notify when Add a check mark if you require an e-mail notification when a job is interrupted.
interrupted
6-68
Using Various Functions > Functions
Item Description
Address Entry Enter E-mail address directly. Select [E-mail Address], enter the address (up to 256
characters) and select [OK].
Notify when Add a check mark if you require an e-mail notification when a job is interrupted.
interrupted
Priority Override
Advanced Custom Functions USB Functions
Copy Setup Box Drive
Suspends the current job and gives a new job top priority.
The suspended job resumes after the other job is finished.
(Value: [Off] / [On])
NOTE
• This function is not available if current job was an override.
• Priority override may not be available depending on the status of the current print job and USB drive usage. In this
case, try the interrupt copy.
Interrupt Copy (page 5-21)
6-69
Using Various Functions > Functions
Repeat Copy
Advanced
Copy Setup
Enables additional copies in the desired quantity as necessary after a copy job is completed.
For confidential documents, you can set up a password for the use of Repeat Copy. In such a case, the correct
password must be entered to perform Repeat Copy.
To register a password, select [# Keys] and enter a 4-digit password.
IMPORTANT
• A Repeat Copy job is cleared when the power switch is turned off.
• If you forget the password, Repeat Copy cannot be performed for that document. Make a note of the
password beforehand if necessary.
Repeat Copy
The Repeat Copy jobs are stored in the Job Box. Refer to Outputting Repeat Copy Jobs to print out the Repeat Copy
jobs.
Outputting Repeat Copy Jobs (page 5-66)
6-70
Using Various Functions > Functions
DP Read Action
Advanced
Copy Setup
When the document processor is used, select the scanning operation for the document processor. This function is
displayed when the document processor is installed.
Item Description
Quality Priority Gives priority to image quality at a slightly slower scan speed.
When there are blank pages in a scanned document, this function skips the blank pages and prints only pages that are
not blank.
Blank pages can be set as pages that include ruled lines and a small number of characters.
The machine detects blank pages, saving unnecessary printing without the need to check for blank pages in the
document.
Select [Blank Pages + Ruled Lines], [Blank Pages Only] or [Blank Pages + Some Text] in [On].
NOTE
The originals with punched holes or originals printed on a colored substrate may not be recognized as blank pages.
6-71
Using Various Functions > Functions
Select the type and orientation of the binding based on the original.
Original Top Edge on Top, Select the orientation of the original document top edge to
Orientation Top Edge on Left, scan correct direction. Select [Original Orientation] to
Auto*2 choose orientation of the originals, either [Top Edge on Top]
or [Top Edge on Left]. Then select [OK].
Sample image
Value Image
Binding Top
Binding Right
6-72
Using Various Functions > Functions
Sending Size
Send
Org./Sending Custom Functions
Data Format Box
Standard Sizes 1 Metric models: Same as Original Size, A3, A4, A5, Select from Same as Original Size or
A6, B4, B5, B6, Folio, 216×340 mm Standard Size.
Inch models: Same as Original Size, Ledger,
Letter, Legal, Statement, 11×15",
Oficio II
Standard Sizes 2 Metric models: Ledger, Letter, Legal, Statement, Select from standard sizes except
11×15", Oficio II, 8K, 16K Standard Sizes 1.
Inch models: A3, A4, A5, A6, B4, B5, B6, Folio, 8K,
16K, 216×340 mm
Others Hagaki (Cardstock), Oufuku hagaki (Return Select from Hagaki (Cardstock).
postcard)
NOTE
When you specify the sending size that is different from the original size, and select the zoom of [100%], you can send
the image as the actual size (No Zoom).
6-73
Using Various Functions > Functions
File Format
Org./Sending Custom Functions USB Functions
Send Data Format Box Drive
Specify the image file format. Image quality level can also be adjusted.
Select the file format from [PDF], [TIFF], [JPEG], [XPS], [OpenXPS], [High Comp. PDF], [Word], [Excel], and
[PowerPoint].
When the color mode in scanning has been selected for Grayscale or Full Color, set the image quality.
If you selected [PDF] or [High Comp. PDF], you can specify encryption or PDF/A settings.
PDF *1*2*3 1 Low Quality (High Comp.) to Auto Color (Color/Grayscale), Auto Color (Color/
5 High Quality (Low Comp.) Black and White), Full Color, Grayscale, Black and
TIFF White
High Comp. PDF *1*2 Compression Ratio Priority, Auto Color (Color/Grayscale), Auto Color (Color/
Standard, Quality Priority Black and White), Full Color, Grayscale
Word*4 1 Low Quality (High Comp.) to Auto Color (Color/Grayscale), Full Color,
5 High Quality (Low Comp.) Grayscale
Excel*4
PowerPoint*4
*1 You can create Searchable PDF file by running OCR on the scanned document.
OCR Text Recognition (Option) (page 6-75)
*2 Set the PDF/A. (Value: [Off] / [PDF/A-1a] / [PDF/A-1b] / [PDF/A-2a] / [PDF/A-2b] / [PDF/A-2u]).
*3 Set PDF encryption.
PDF Encryption Functions (page 6-76)
*4 Word, Excel and PowerPoint will be saved in a Microsoft Office 2007 or later file format.
Scan to Office Function (page 6-78)
NOTE
• When [High Comp. PDF] is selected, you cannot adjust the image quality.
• You can use PDF encryption functions.
PDF Encryption Functions (page 6-76)
• If encryption is enabled, PDF/A settings cannot be specified.
6-74
Using Various Functions > Functions
Item Description
Off Do not create Searchable file.
On Create Searchable file.
Select the language to extract from the languages that appear on the touch panel.
NOTE
• This function can only be used when the optional OCR Scan Activation Kit is installed.
Scan Extension Kit(A) "OCR Scan Activation Kit" (page 11-6)
• This function cannot be set when you send from the Custom Box.
• If the proper language is not selected, file creation may take a long time or the creation may fail.
The default language can be changed in System Menu.
Primary OCR Language*1 (page 8-21)
• If you do not set an original in the correct orientation, the text of the document may not be recognized as characters.
In addition, it may take some time to create the file. Check the following:
- The original orientation is correct.
- When setting the originals with the mixed orientation at once, [On] is selected for [Auto Image Rotation].
If you frequently use the originals with the mixed orientation, the default of [Auto Image Rotation] can be
changed in System Menu.
OCR Text Recognition*1 (page 8-21)
• The accuracy of the text recognition depends on the original condition. The following condition may result in
decreasing the recognition accuracy.
- Repeatedly copied documents (as copied copy)
- Received faxes (with low resolution)
- Originals with the character space too narrow or wide
- Originals with the lines on the text
- Originals with the special fonts
- Binding part of the book
- A handwritten texts
6-75
Using Various Functions > Functions
Password to Open Off, On Enter the password to open the PDF file.
Document Select [On], enter a password (up to 256 characters)
and then select [Next].
Enter the password again for confirmation, and
select [OK].
Password to Edit/Print Off, On Enter the password to edit the PDF file.
Document Select [On], enter a password (up to 256 characters)
and then select [Next].
Enter the password again for confirmation, and
select [OK].
When you have entered the password and selected
[Detail] to edit/print document, you can specifically
limit the operation.
Printing Allowed Not Allowed, Allowed Restricts printing of the PDF file.
Changes Allowed Not Allowed Disables the change to the PDF file.
Page Layout except Can change the page layout except extracting the
extracting Pages pages of the PDF file.
Any except extracting Pages Can conduct all operations except extracting the
pages of the PDF file.
Copying of Text/ Disable, Enable Restricts the copying of text and objects on the PDF
Images/Others file.
6-76
Using Various Functions > Functions
Password to Open Off, On Enter the password to open the PDF file.
Document Select [On], enter a password (up to 256 characters)
and then select [Next].
Enter the password again for confirmation, and
select [OK].
Password to Edit/Print Off, On Enter the password to edit the PDF file.
Document Select [On], enter a password (up to 256 characters)
and then select [Next].
Enter the password again for confirmation, and
select [OK].
When you have entered the password and selected
[Detail] to edit/print document, you can specifically
limit the operation.
Allowed (Low Resolution Can print the PDF file only in low resolution.
only)
Changes Allowed Not Allowed Disables the change to the PDF file.
Inserting/Deleting/Rotating Can only insert, delete, and rotate the pages of the
Pages PDF file.
Any except extracting Pages Can conduct all operations except extracting the
pages of the PDF file.
Copying of Text/ Disable, Enable Restricts the copying of text and objects on the PDF
Images/Others file.
6-77
Using Various Functions > Functions
NOTE
• This function can only be used when the optional OCR Scan Activation Kit is installed.
Scan Extension Kit(A) "OCR Scan Activation Kit" (page 11-6)
• The scanned result may not be realized perfectly according to condition of the documents.
NOTE
When you select [Off], the documents are converted into the Microsoft Office data (scanned
image).
3 Select the language of the document which you wish to scan > [OK].
4 Select [OCR Output Format] and select an OCR output mode from the table below > [OK].
Item Description
Text + Graphics Converts the scanned documents into the editable and
searchable Microsoft Office data format.
Text + Graphics Converts the scanned documents into two types of data: one is
w/Scan Image the editable and searchable Microsoft Office data format and the
other one is the Microsoft Office data format with scanned image.
You can edit text and layout of the editable data by referring the
scanned image.
Scanned Image Converts the scanned documents into the searchable Microsoft
w/Srchable Txt Office data format (scanned image).
6-78
Using Various Functions > Functions
File Separation
Org./Sending Custom Functions USB Functions
Send Data Format Box Drive
Creates several files by dividing scanned original data page by specified number of pages, and sends the files.
NOTE
A three-digit serial number such as "abc_001.pdf, abc_002.pdf..." is attached to the end of the file name.
Off
Attach File to E-mail All Files in 1 E-mail, Select how to attach the files to the E-mail. Select [All
1 file per E-mail files in 1 E-mail] to attach and send all files in a single
E-mail. Select [1 file per E-mail] to attach and send
1 file per E-mail.
Scan Resolution
Color/ Custom Functions Color/ USB Functions
Send Image Quality Box Image Quality Drive
NOTE
The larger the number, the better the image resolution. However, better resolution also means larger file sizes and
longer send times.
6-79
Using Various Functions > Functions
E-mail Subject/Body
Send
Advanced Custom Functions
Setup Box
NOTE
• The subject can include up to 256 characters, and the body can include up to 500 characters.
• Select [Body 1], [Body 2], or [Body 3] to enter stored text for the body text. For details on registering templates,
refer to the following:
E-mail Subject/Body (page 8-21)
NOTE
• When [On] is selected, select the Custom Box in which the copy is to be stored.
If a password entry screen for the Custom Box appears, enter the password.
• You can view information on the selected Custom Box by selecting [Detail].
Send
6-80
Using Various Functions > Functions
FTP Encrypted TX
Send
Advanced Custom Functions
Setup Box
NOTE
Click [Security Settings], and then [Network Security] in the Embedded Web Server RX. Be sure that "SSL" of
Secure Protocol Settings is "On" and one or more effective encryption are selected in Client side settings.
Embedded Web Server RX User Guide
Send
Advanced Custom Functions
Setup Box
Checks the file size before sending the original. To change the file size, change the settings of each function. When you
select [Recalculate], the file size is recalculated.
(Value: [Off] / [On])
6-81
Using Various Functions > Functions
Storing Size
Custom Functions USB Functions
Box Drive
Standard Sizes 1 Metric models: Same as Original Size, A3, A4, A5, Select from Same as Original Size or
A6, B4, B5, B6, Folio, 216×340 mm Standard Size.
Inch models: Same as Original Size, Ledger,
Letter, Legal, Statement, 11×15",
Oficio II
Standard Sizes 2 Metric models: Ledger, Letter, Legal, Statement, Select from standard sizes except
11×15", Oficio II, 8K, 16K Standard Sizes 1.
Inch models: A3, A4, A5, A6, B4, B5, B6, Folio, 8K,
16K, 216×340 mm
Others Hagaki (Cardstock), Oufuku hagaki (Return Select from Hagaki (Cardstock).
postcard)
NOTE
When you select Storing Size that is different from Original Size, and select the Zoom [100%], you can store the image
as the actual size (No Zoom).
Long Original
Advanced USB Functions
Send Setup Drive
Reads long-sized original documents using a document processor. This function requires the optional document
processor.
(Value: [Off] / [On])
NOTE
• Long originals are sent in black and white.
• Only a single side of a long original can be scanned.
• Originals of up to 1,900 mm / 74.8"*1 long can be scanned.
• This cannot be set when Bates Stamp is set.
6-82
Using Various Functions > Functions
NOTE
For details on entering the password, refer to the following:
Character Entry Method (page 11-10)
JPEG/TIFF Print
USB Functions
Drive
Item Description
Paper Size Fits the image size to the selected paper size.
Reduces or enlarges the image size to fit to the selected paper size when printing XPS file.
(Value: [Off] / [On])
6-83
7 Status/Job Cancel
This chapter explains the following topics:
Checking Job Status .......................................................................................................................................... 7-2
Details of the Status Screens ................................................................................................................... 7-3
Checking Detailed Information of Jobs .................................................................................................... 7-8
Checking Job History ......................................................................................................................................... 7-9
Checking the Detailed Information of Histories ...................................................................................... 7-10
Sending the Log History ........................................................................................................................ 7-10
Job Operation ................................................................................................................................................... 7-11
Pause and Resumption of Jobs .............................................................................................................. 7-11
Canceling of Jobs ................................................................................................................................... 7-11
Priority Override for Waiting Jobs ........................................................................................................... 7-11
Reordering Print Jobs ............................................................................................................................ 7-12
Device/Communication .................................................................................................................................... 7-13
Checking the Remaining Amount of Toner and Paper (Paper/Supplies) ......................................................... 7-14
7-1
Status/Job Cancel > Checking Job Status
7-2
Status/Job Cancel > Checking Job Status
NOTE
• You can show the job statuses of all users, or only the statuses of your own jobs.
Display Status/Log (page 8-31)
• This setting can also be changed from Embedded Web Server RX.
Embedded Web Server RX User Guide
Status
Status Log
Job Type
Job No.
All
1 2 3 4 5 6
8 9 10 11 12
Pause All Cancel Priority Move Up Detail
Print Jobs Override
Printer job
FAX reception
i-FAX reception
E-mail reception
Application
Report/List
7-3
Status/Job Cancel > Checking Job Status
8 [Pause All Print Pauses all the printing jobs. By pressing this key again, the
Jobs] printing jobs will be resumed.
9 [Cancel] Select the job you want to cancel from the list, and press this
key.
11 [Move Up] In the list, select the job that you want to move up the job
queue and press this key.
Reordering Print Jobs (page 7-12)
NOTE
The job name and user name can be changed to other information if needed.
Customize Status Display (page 8-31)
7-4
Status/Job Cancel > Checking Job Status
Job Type
Job No.
All
1 2 3 4 5 6 1/1
8 9 10
Cancel Priority Detail
Override
Multi Sending
8 [Cancel] Select the job you want to cancel from the list, and press this
key.
7-5
Status/Job Cancel > Checking Job Status
NOTE
The address and user name can be changed to other information if needed.
Customize Status Display (page 8-31)
Status
Status Log
Job Type
Job No.
All
1 2 3 4 5 6 1/1
Cancel
8 Detail
9
Printing Jobs Sending Jobs Storing Jobs Device/ Paper/
Close
Communicate Supplies
Status t0301
8 [Cancel] Select the job you want to cancel from the list, and press this
key.
7-6
Status/Job Cancel > Checking Job Status
NOTE
The job name and user name can be changed to other information if needed.
Customize Status Display (page 8-31)
Status
Job No. Accept Time Type Destination User Name Start Time
1 2 3 4 5 6 1/1
Cancel
7 Start Now
8 Detail
9
Printing Jobs Sending Jobs Storing Jobs Device/ Paper/ Close
Communicate Supplies
Status 02/02/2013 t0202
10:10
7 [Cancel] Select the job you want to cancel from the list, and press this
key.
8 [Start Now] Select the job you want to send immediately from the list,
and press this key.
7-7
Status/Job Cancel > Checking Job Status
1/1
7-8
Status/Job Cancel > Checking Job History
NOTE
• Job history is also available by Embedded Web Server RX or Network Print Monitor from the computer.
Embedded Web Server RX User Guide
Network Print Monitor User Guide
• You can show the job log of all users, or only your own job log.
Display Status/Log (page 8-31)
• This setting can also be changed from Embedded Web Server RX.
Embedded Web Server RX User Guide
7-9
Status/Job Cancel > Checking Job History
Status Log
Job No. End Date Type Job Name User Name Result
1 2 Detail
NOTE
To check the information of the next/previous page, select [ ] or [ ].
7-10
Status/Job Cancel > Job Operation
Job Operation
Pause and Resumption of Jobs
Pause/resume all printing jobs in printing/waiting.
2 Select [Pause All Print Jobs] on the printing jobs status screen.
Printing is paused.
When resuming the printing of jobs that have been paused, select [Resume All Print Jobs].
Canceling of Jobs
A job in printing/waiting status can be canceled.
2 Select the job to be canceled from the list, and select [Cancel].
7-11
Status/Job Cancel > Job Operation
7-12
Status/Job Cancel > Device/Communication
Device/Communication
Configure the devices/lines installed or connected to this machine or check their status.
2 Select [Device/Communicate].
The screen to check the status or configure the devices is displayed.
"Scanner"
The status of an original scanning or the error information (paper jam, opened cover, etc.) is
displayed.
"Printer"
Error information such as paper jam, or out of toner, and status such as waiting or printing are
displayed.
"FAX Port 1", "FAX Port 2", "i-FAX", "FAX Memory RX Box"
• The information such as sending/receiving and dialing is displayed.
FAX Operation Guide
"USB Drive"
• The usage and capacity of the USB drive connected to this machine are displayed.
• Select [Format] to format USB drive.
IMPORTANT
When [Format] is selected, all data in the USB drive is erased.
"Hard Disk"
The status of the hard disk is displayed.
"Connectivity"
The network connection status and the status of the optional keyboard are displayed.
7-13
Status/Job Cancel > Checking the Remaining Amount of Toner and Paper (Paper/Supplies)
2 Select [Paper/Supplies].
"Toner Information"
The amount of toner remaining is shown in levels. And you can check the status of waste
toner box.
"Paper Status"
You can check the size, orientation, type, and remaining amount of paper in each paper
source. The amount of paper remaining is shown in levels.
"Others"
You can check the status of staples and punch waste box.
7-14
8 Setup and Registration
(System Menu)
This chapter explains the following topics:
System Menu ..................................................................................................................................................... 8-2
Operation Method .................................................................................................................................... 8-2
System Menu Settings ............................................................................................................................. 8-4
Counter .................................................................................................................................................... 8-7
Cassette/MP Tray Settings ...................................................................................................................... 8-7
Common Settings .................................................................................................................................. 8-10
Home ..................................................................................................................................................... 8-34
Copy ...................................................................................................................................................... 8-35
Send ...................................................................................................................................................... 8-36
Document Box/USB Drive ..................................................................................................................... 8-41
FAX ........................................................................................................................................................ 8-42
Printer .................................................................................................................................................... 8-42
Report .................................................................................................................................................... 8-45
System/Network ..................................................................................................................................... 8-51
Edit Destination ...................................................................................................................................... 8-75
User Login/Job Accounting .................................................................................................................... 8-76
User Property ......................................................................................................................................... 8-76
Date/Timer/Energy Saver ...................................................................................................................... 8-76
Adjustment/Maintenance ....................................................................................................................... 8-80
Internet ................................................................................................................................................... 8-83
Application ............................................................................................................................................. 8-83
8-1
Setup and Registration (System Menu) > System Menu
System Menu
Configure settings related to overall machine operation.
Operation Method
2 Select a function.
System Menu
1 Displays the System Menu items.
Quick Setup Wizard Counter
1 2 Scrolls up and down when the list of
Cassette/MP Tray Settings Common Settings
values cannot be displayed in its entirety
Home Copy
on a single screen.
Send Document Box/USB Drive
Date/Timer/Energy Saver
Status
Close
m02015701
4
+13:00 Samoa
making any changes.
-11:00 Universal Coordinated Time-11
1/16
-10:00 Hawaii
-09:00 Alaska
Status
Cancel OK
m031701
2
3
8-2
Setup and Registration (System Menu) > System Menu
NOTE
• When setting functions that require privileges, you must log in with administrator privileges or as a user with
privileges to configure each setting.
The factory default login user name and login password are set as shown below.
• If function default settings have been changed, the [Reset] key can be selected in each function screen to
immediately change the settings.
Refer to System Menu Settings on the following page and configure as needed.
8-3
Setup and Registration (System Menu) > System Menu
Reference
Item Description
Page
Quick Setup Wizard The Quick Setup Wizard configures Fax, Network and Energy page 2-43
Saver settings.
Counter Check the number of sheets printed and scanned. page 2-59
Cassette/MP Tray Settings Select paper size and media type for Cassettes and multipurpose page 8-7
tray.
Cassette 1 (to 5) Select type of paper in Cassette 1 (to 5). page 8-7
MP Tray Setting Select type of paper in multipurpose tray. page 8-8
Common Settings Configure overall machine operation. page 8-10
Language Set the language to use for the touch panel display. page 8-10
Default Screen Select the screen appearing right after start-up (default screen). page 8-10
Sound Set options for buzzer sound during the machine operations. page 8-10
Keyboard Layout Change the layout of the touch panel keyboard used to enter page 8-11
characters.
Original/Paper Settings Configure settings for originals and paper. page 8-11
Measurement Select inch or metric for the unit for paper dimensions. page 8-15
Error Handling Select whether to cancel or continue the job when error has page 8-16
occurred.
Paper Output Select the output tray respectively for copy jobs, print jobs from page 8-18
Document Box, computers, and FAX RX data.
Orientation Confirmation Check the orientation of original. page 8-19
Function Defaults Defaults are the values automatically set after the warm-up is page 8-19
completed or the [Reset] key is selected.
Set the defaults for available settings such as copying and sending.
Setting the frequently-used values as defaults makes subsequent
jobs easier.
Optional Keyboard Type Select the type of optional keyboard that you want to use. page 8-23
System Stamp Configure settings for header, footer, and stamp. page 8-23
Manual Staple Select whether to use Manual Staple. page 8-29
Offset Documents by Job Select whether to offset documents by Job. page 8-29
Low Toner Alert Level Set the amount of remaining toner to notify the administrator when page 8-30
to order a toner when the toner is running low.
Toner Waste Full Alert Set the capacity of the waste toner box for which you require page 8-30
notification to be sent that the waste toner box is going to be full.
Offset One Page Set whether one-page documents are sorted. page 8-30
Documents
8-4
Setup and Registration (System Menu) > System Menu
Reference
Item Description
Page
Display Status/Log Set the display method of the Status/Log. page 8-31
Message Banner Print Set whether the confirmation screen appears before each sheet is page 8-31
printed when printing multiple banner sheets.
Customize Status Display Select the item that appears for the printing jobs status. page 8-31
Message Board Settings Configure settings for message board. page 8-32
Remote Printing Configure settings for remote printing. page 8-32
Numeric Keypad Settings Select whether or not to display the numeric keypad. page 8-33
Prevent Light Reflection Prevent light reflection when using the Erase Shadowed Areas page 8-33
feature.
Function Key Assignment Assign a function to each function key. page 8-33
Show Power Off Message Select whether the confirmation message is displayed, when page 8-33
Power Switch is pressed.
Clear Set. after Job Set whether to reset function settings to their defaults after the job page 8-34
Started starts.
Direct Printing from Web Set whether to allow Direct Printing from Embedded Web Server RX. page 8-34
Home Configure settings for Home screen. page 8-34
Copy Configures settings for copying functions. page 8-35
Send Configures settings for sending functions. page 8-36
Document Box/USB Drive Configures settings related to the Custom Box, Job Box, Sub page 8-41
Address Box and Polling Box. For details on FAX Box and Polling
Box, refer to the following:
FAX Operation Guide
FAX Configures settings for fax functions. —
FAX Operation Guide
Printer Printing from computers, settings are generally made on the page 8-42
application software screen. However, the following settings are
available for configuring the defaults to customize the machine.
Report Print reports to check the machine settings, status, and history. page 8-45
Settings for printing reports can also be configured.
Print Report Configure settings for printing reports and histories. page 8-45
Admin Report Settings Refer to the
FAX
Operation
Guide.
Result Report Setting page 8-46
Sending Log History page 8-47
Login History Settings page 8-48
Device Log History page 8-49
Settings
Secure Comm. Error Log page 8-50
8-5
Setup and Registration (System Menu) > System Menu
Reference
Item Description
Page
System/Network Configure machine system settings. page 8-51
Network Configures network settings. page 8-51
Optional Network Configure settings for the optional Network Interface Kit. page 8-65
Primary Network (Client) Select the network interface to be used for the send function that page 8-68
this machine functions as a client, the network authentication and
connecting to external address book.
Security Level The Security Level setting is primarily a menu option used by —
service personnel for maintenance work. There is no need for
customers to use this menu.
Interface Block Setting This allows you to protect this machine by blocking the interface page 8-69
with external devices such as USB hosts or optional interfaces.
Data Security Configure settings for data stored in the SSD, hard disk, and page 8-70
machine's memory.
FAX Server Settings Configures FAX server settings. page 8-72
Optional Function You can use the optional applications installed on this machine. page 8-73
Bluetooth Settings Set the Bluetooth keyboard. page 8-73
Restart Entire Device Restart the machine without turning the power switch off. Use this page 8-73
to deal with any unstable operation by the machine. (Same as the
computer restart.)
Remote Services Settings Configures remote services settings. page 8-73
NFC Set NFC (Near Field Communication). page 8-73
Remote Operation Operating device panel remotely from software (Embedded Web page 8-74
Server RX or VNC compatible software).
Motion Sensor Automatically wake up from low power mode or sleep mode when page 8-74
someone approaches the device.
Edit Destination Configures Address Book and One Touch Key settings. page 8-75
Address Book:
Adding a Destination (Address Book) (page 3-35)
One Touch Key:
Adding a Destination on One Touch Key (One Touch Key)
(page 3-42)
User Login/Job Accounting Configures settings related to machine management. —
User Login:
Overview of User Login Administration (page 9-2)
Job Accounting:
Overview of Job Accounting (page 9-33)
User Property Allows you to view information about logged in users and edit page 8-76
some of that information.
Date/Timer/Energy Saver Configures settings related to the date and time. page 8-76
Adjustment/Maintenance Adjust printing quality and conduct machine maintenance. page 8-80
Internet Configure settings related to the internet. page 8-83
Application Configure settings for Application. page 8-83
8-6
Setup and Registration (System Menu) > System Menu
Counter
[System Menu/Counter] key > [Counter]
Check the number of sheets printed and scanned.
Cassette 1 (to 5)
[System Menu/Counter] key > [Cassette/MP Tray Settings] > [Cassette 1 (to 5)]
Select paper size and media type for Cassettes 1 to 5.
Standard Sizes 2*2 Select from standard sizes except Standard Sizes 1.
Values
Metric models:
Ledger*3*4, Letter-R*4, Letter*4, Legal*4, Statement-R*4, Executive,
12×18"*3*4, Oficio II, 8K*3, 16K-R, 16K
Inch models:
A3*3*4, A4-R*4, A4*4, A5-R*4, A5*4, A6-R*4, B4*3*4, B5-R*4, B5*4, B6-R*4,
Folio*4, 8K*3, 16K-R, 16K, 216×340 mm
8-7
Setup and Registration (System Menu) > System Menu
Paper Size Size Entry*2 Enter the size not included in the standard size.
Values
Cassette 1
Metric
X: 148 to 356 mm (in 1mm increments)
Y: 98 to 297 mm (in 1mm increments)
Inch
X: 5.83 to 14.02" (in 0.01" increments)
Y: 3.86 to 11.69" (in 0.01" increments)
Cassette 2 to 4
Metric
X: 148 to 452 mm (in 1mm increments)
Y: 98 to 320 mm (in 1mm increments)
Inch
X: 5.83 to 18.00" (in 0.01" increments)
Y: 3.86 to 12.60" (in 0.01" increments)
*1 When the optional Large Capacity Feeder (1,500-sheet×2) or Side Feeder (3,000-sheet) is used, paper size does
not appear.
*2 If set to FAX Exclusive Paper Source, this will not appear.
*3 Not displayed in Cassette 1.
*4 Paper size is automatically detected in the cassette.
*5 To change to a media type other than "Plain".
Media Type Setting (page 8-15)
When a paper weight that cannot be loaded in the cassette is set for a media type, that media type does not appear.
*6 To print on preprinted or prepunched paper or on letterhead.
Special Paper Action (page 8-14)
*7 Not displayed in the optional Large Capacity Feeder (1,500-sheet×2) or Side Feeder (3,000-sheet).
MP Tray Setting
[System Menu/Counter] key > [Cassette/MP Tray Settings] > [MP Tray Setting]
Select paper size and media type for the multipurpose tray.
Item Description
8-8
Setup and Registration (System Menu) > System Menu
Item Description
Paper Size Standard Sizes 2 Select from standard sizes except Standard Sizes 1.
Values
Metric models:
Ledger*1, Letter-R*1, Letter*1, Legal*1, Statement-R*1, Executive,
12×18"*1, Oficio II, 8K, 16K-R, 16K
Inch models:
A3*1, A4-R*1, A4*1, A5-R*1, A5, A6-R*1, B4*1, B5-R*1, B5*1, B6-R*1,
Folio*1, 8K, 16K-R, 16K, 216×340 mm, SRA3*1
Size Entry Enter the size not included in the standard size.
Values
Metric
X: 148 to 457 mm (in 1mm increments)
Y: 98 to 320 mm (in 1mm increments)
Inch
X: 5.83 to 18.00" (in 0.01" increments)
Y: 3.86 to 12.60" (in 0.01" increments)
X=Length, Y=Width
Vertical Horizontal
X X
Y Y
NOTE
If the optional FAX Kit is installed, the available media types for printing received faxes are as shown below.
Plain, Rough, Vellum, Labels, Recycled, Bond, Cardstock, Color, Envelope, Thick, Coated, High Quality and
Custom1-8
8-9
Setup and Registration (System Menu) > System Menu
Common Settings
Configures overall machine operation.
Language
[System Menu/Counter] key > [Common Settings] > [Language]
Item Description
Language Set the language to use for the touch panel display.
Default Screen
[System Menu/Counter] key > [Common Settings] > [Default Screen]
Item Description
Default Screen Select the screen appearing right after start-up (default screen).
Value: Home, Copy, Send, FAX*1, Status, Custom Box, Job Box, USB Drive, FAX
Box*1, FAX Memory RX Box*1, Program, Home (Accessibility), Accessibility
Copy, Accessibility Send, Accessibility FAX*1, Internet Browser*2, Application
Name*3
Sound
[System Menu/Counter] key > [Common Settings] > [Sound]
Item Description
Buzzer Set options for buzzer sound during the machine operations.
Volume Set the buzzer volume level.
Value: 0 (Mute), 1 (Minimum), 2, 3 (Medium), 4, 5 (Maximum)
Key Confirmation Emit a sound when the operation panel and touch panel keys are selected.
Value: Off, On
Job Finish Emit a sound when a print job is normally completed.
Value: Off, On, FAX Reception Only*1
Ready Emit a sound when the warm-up is completed.
Value: Off, On
Warning Emit a sound when errors occur.
Value: Off, On
Optional Keyboard Emit a sound to confirm keypresses with a sound.
Value: Off, On
FAX Speaker Volume*1 FAX Operation Guide
FAX Monitor Volume*1 FAX Operation Guide
8-10
Setup and Registration (System Menu) > System Menu
Keyboard Layout
[System Menu/Counter] key > [Common Settings] > [Keyboard Layout]
Item Description
Keyboard Layout Change the layout of the touch panel keyboard used to enter characters.
Value: QWERTY, QWERTZ, AZERTY
Item Description
8-11
Setup and Registration (System Menu) > System Menu
Item Description
Y Y
Default Paper Source Select the default paper source from Cassette 1-5 and multipurpose tray.
Value: Cassette 1 (to 5), Multipurpose Tray
NOTE
• [Cassette 3] to [Cassette 5] are displayed when the following optional paper
feeder is installed.
[Cassette 3]: When a paper feeder (500-sheet×2) or large capacity paper feeder
(1,500-sheet×2) is installed.
[Cassette 4]: When a paper feeder (500-sheet×2) or large capacity paper feeder
(1,500-sheet×2) is installed.
[Cassette 5]: When a side feeder (3,000-sheet) is installed.
• You cannot select a cassette that is set to FAX Exclusive Paper Source.
Auto Switch When the optional large capacity feeder is selected, the cassette can be switched to
another large capacity feeder depending on your usage.
Value: Off, On
8-12
Setup and Registration (System Menu) > System Menu
Item Description
Auto Detect Original Size Select whether to automatically detect originals of special or non-standard size.
Select [Metric] when automatically detecting the originals in centimeter sizes. Select
[Inch] when detecting the originals in inch sizes.
Metric A6/Hagaki As A6 and Hagaki (Cardstock) are similar in size, select either one of them for
automatic detection.
Value: A6, Hagaki
NOTE
If [Hagaki] is set, only the originals placed on the platen are detected.
Inch Legal/ Set the original sizes for the device to detect automatically.
Oficio II/ Value: Legal, Oficio II, 216×340 mm
216×340 mm
Media for Auto (B&W) Select a default media type for auto paper selection when [Auto] is selected of Paper
Selection. If [Plain] is selected, the paper source with plain paper loaded in the
specific size is selected. Select [All Media Types] for the paper source with any kind
of paper loaded in the specific size.
Value: All Media Types, Plain, Transparency, Rough, Vellum, Labels, Recycled,
Preprinted, Bond, Cardstock, Color, Prepunched, Letterhead, Envelope, Thick,
Coated, High Quality, Index Tab Dividers, Custom 1 to 8
Paper Source for Cover Select the paper source in which the cover paper used for the Cover function is
placed.
Value: Cassette 1 (to 5), Multipurpose Tray
NOTE
• [Cassette 3] to [Cassette 5] are displayed when the following optional paper
feeder is installed.
[Cassette 3]: When a paper feeder (500-sheet×2) or large capacity paper feeder
(1,500-sheet×2) is installed.
[Cassette 4]: When a paper feeder (500-sheet×2) or large capacity paper feeder
(1,500-sheet×2) is installed.
[Cassette 5]: When a side feeder (3,000-sheet) is installed.
• You cannot select a cassette that is set to FAX Exclusive Paper Source.
8-13
Setup and Registration (System Menu) > System Menu
Item Description
Special Paper Action When printing on Prepunched, Preprint, and Letterhead, punch-holes might not be
aligned or the print direction might be upside-down depending on how originals are
set and the combination of copying functions. In such a case, select [Adjust Print
Direction] to adjust the print direction. When paper orientation is not important, select
[Speed Priority].
If [Adjust Print Direction] is selected, load paper according to the steps below.
Example: copying on Letterhead
Show Paper Setup Set whether to display the confirmation screen for the paper setting when a new
Message paper is set for each cassette.
8-14
Setup and Registration (System Menu) > System Menu
Normal 3 91 g/m² to 105 g/m² Heavy 5*1 257 g/m² to 300 g/m²
Color Normal 3
For Custom 1-8, settings for duplex printing and media type name can be changed.
Item Description
Name Change names for Custom 1-8. Names should be not more than 16 characters.
Selecting media type at multipurpose tray, the name after change will be displayed.
Character Entry Method (page 11-10)
Measurement
[System Menu/Counter] key > [Common Settings] > [Measurement]
Item Description
Measurement Select inch or metric for the unit for paper dimensions.
Value: mm, inch
8-15
Setup and Registration (System Menu) > System Menu
Error Handling
[System Menu/Counter] key > [Common Settings] > [Error Handling]
Select whether to cancel or continue the job when error has occurred.
Item Description
Duplexing Error Set what to do when duplex printing is not possible for the selected paper sizes and
media types.
Value
1-sided: Printed in 1-sided
Display Error: Message to cancel printing is displayed.
Finishing Error Set alternative actions when finishing (Staple/Punch/Offset) is not available for the
selected paper size or media type.
Value
Ignore: The setting is ignored and the job is printed.
Display Error: Message to cancel printing is displayed.
No Staple Error Set what to do when staples run out during printing.
Value
Ignore: Printing continues without stapling.
Display Error: Message to cancel printing is displayed.
NOTE
Requires the optional Document Finisher.
Finished Pages Exceeded Set what to do when finishing (stapling or offsetting) capacity is exceeded during
printing.
Value
Ignore: Printing continues without finishing.
Display Error: Message to cancel printing is displayed.
NOTE
Requires the optional Document Finisher.
Punch Waste Full Error Set what to do when the punch waste box becomes full during printing.
Value
Ignore: Printing continues without punching.
Display Error: Message to cancel printing is displayed.
NOTE
Requires the optional Document Finisher and Punch Unit.
Paper Mismatch Error Set what to do when the selected paper size or type does not match paper size or
type loaded in the specified paper source while printing from the computer by
specifying the cassette or multipurpose tray.
Value
Ignore: The setting is ignored and the job is printed.
Display Error: Message to cancel printing is displayed.
Wrong Size Paper Loaded Set what to do when it is detected that the cassette paper size setting does not match
the actual paper size that is fed.
Value
Ignore: The setting is ignored and the job is printed.
Display Error: Message to cancel printing is displayed.
8-16
Setup and Registration (System Menu) > System Menu
Item Description
Paper Jam before Staple The page from which printing is resumed when a paper jam occurs during a job with
stapling can be selected.
Value
Resume at Top of Page: Resume printing from the first page of the document.
Resume at Jammed Page: Resume printing from the page where the jam
occurred.
NOTE
Requires the optional Document Finisher.
Skewed or Multi Originals Set what to do when it is detected that skewed originals or multiple stacked originals
have been sent.
Value
Ignore: The setting is ignored and the job is printed.
Display Error: Message to cancel printing is displayed.
NOTE
Requires the optional Document Processor (Dual Scan with Skewed and Multifeed
Detection).
Continue or Cancel Err. Job Set which users can cancel or continue operations for jobs which were paused due to
an error.
Value: All Users, Job Owner Only
NOTE
Administrator can cancel all jobs regardless of this setting.
Staple Waste Full Error Set what to do when the staple waste box becomes full during printing.
Value
Ignore: The setting is ignored and the job is printed.
Display Error: Message to cancel printing is displayed.
NOTE
Requires the optional 100-sheet Staple Finisher.
8-17
Setup and Registration (System Menu) > System Menu
Paper Output
[System Menu/Counter] key > [Common Settings] > [Paper Output]
Item Description
Paper Output Select the output tray respectively for copy jobs, print jobs from Document Box,
computers, and FAX RX data.
Value:
with optional job separator
• Inner Tray: Outputs to the Inner Tray of the machine
• Job Separator Tray: Delivery to the Job Separator.
with optional 1,000-sheet Finisher
• Job Separator Tray*1: Delivery to the Job Separator.
• Finisher Tray: Delivery to the Finisher Tray of the optional Document
Finisher.
with optional 4,000-sheet Finisher/100-sheet Staple Finisher
• Job Separator Tray*1: Delivery to the Job Separator.
• Tray A: Delivery to the Tray A of the optional Document
Finisher
• Tray B: Delivery to the Tray B of the optional Document
Finisher
with optional Mailbox
• Job Separator Tray*1: Delivery to the Job Separator.
• Tray A: Delivery to the Tray A of the optional Document
Finisher
• Tray B: Delivery to the Tray B of the optional Document
Finisher
• Tray 1 to 7: Delivery to tray 1 to 7 (tray 1 is the uppermost tray) of
the optional Mailbox
NOTE
• FAX RX data output can be specified when the optional FAX Kit is installed.
• Requires the optional Job Separator or Document Finisher (1,000-sheet Finisher,
4,000-sheet Finisher, or 100-sheet Staple Finisher). This function will not be
displayed when the optional Inner Finisher is installed.
*1 The paper sizes cannot be output to the Job Separator Tray: A3, Ledger.
8-18
Setup and Registration (System Menu) > System Menu
Orientation Confirmation
[System Menu/Counter] key > [Common Settings] > [Orientation Confirmation]
Item Description
Orientation Confirmation Select whether to display a screen for selecting the orientation of the originals to be
placed on the platen when using the following functions.
Original Orientation (page 6-24)
Function Defaults
[System Menu/Counter] key > [Common Settings] > [Function Defaults]
Item Description
Original Image (Copy) Set the default original document type for copying.
Value: Text+Photo (Printer), Text+Photo (Magazine), Photo (Printer), Photo
(Magazine), Photo (Photo Paper), Text, Text (Fine Line), Graphic/Map (Printer),
Graphic/Map (Magazine)
Org. Image (Send/Store) Set the default original document type for sending/storing.
Value: Text+Photo, Photo, Text, Text (Fine Line), Text (for OCR)
Color Selection Select the default color mode for scanning documents.
Value: Auto Color (Color/Gray), Auto Color (Color/B & W), Full Color, Grayscale,
Black & White
Prevent Bleed-thru (Copy) Set the default value for preventing bleed-through (Copy).
Value: Off, On
8-19
Setup and Registration (System Menu) > System Menu
Item Description
Zoom Select the enlarged/reduced default when paper size/sending size changed after the
originals set.
Value: 100%, Auto
NOTE
To specify border erase widths around original, set the value in "Border". To specify
border erase widths in the middle of original, set the value in "Gutter".
Border Erase to Back Page Select the Border Erase Method for Back Page of a sheet.
Value: Same as Front Page, Do Not Erase
Auto Image Rotation (Copy) Select the default Auto Image Rotation setting.
Value: Off, On
Toner Save Level (EcoPrint) Select the default Toner Save Level (EcoPrint).
Value: 1 (Low) to 5 (High)
NOTE
Raising the level reduces toner consumption, but image quality falls.
High Comp. PDF Image Select the default quality setting for high compressed PDF files.
Value: Compression Ratio Priority, Standard, Quality Priority
Color TIFF Compression Select the compression method for sending the color documents in the TIFF format.
Value: TIFF V6, TTN2
8-20
Setup and Registration (System Menu) > System Menu
Item Description
JPEG/TIFF Print Select the image size (resolution) when printing JPEG or TIFF file.
Value: Fit to Paper Size, Image Resolution, Fit to Print Resolution
XPS Fit to Page Set the default value for the XPS fit to page function.
Value: Off, On
File Name Entry Set an automatically entered name (default) for jobs. Additional information such as
Date and Time and Job No. can also be set.
Value
File Name: Up to 32 characters can be entered.
Additional Info: None, Date and Time, Job No., Job No. & Date and Time,
Date and Time & Job No.
E-mail Subject/Body Set the subject and body automatically entered (default subject and body) when
sending the scanned originals by E-mail. Three body messages can be registered,
and the initial template can be used to choose which body message is used.
Value
Subject: Up to 256 characters can be entered.
Body 1 to 3: Up to 500 characters can be entered.
i-FAX Subject/Body Set the subject and body automatically entered (default subject and body) when
sending the scanned originals by i-FAX.
Value
Subject: Up to 256 characters can be entered.
Body: Up to 500 characters can be entered.
NOTE
This function is displayed when the optional Internet FAX Kit is activated.
Internet FAX Kit(A) "Internet FAX Kit" (page 11-6)
DP Read Action Set the operation when a document is scanned from the document processor.
Value: Speed Priority, Quality Priority
NOTE
This function is displayed when the optional document processor is installed.
NOTE
This function can only be used when the optional OCR Scan Activation Kit is installed.
Scan Extension Kit(A) "OCR Scan Activation Kit" (page 11-6)
Primary OCR Language*1 Set the default language of the text to be extracted. ([English] is selected as a
default.)
Select the language to extract from the options displayed on the touch panel.
NOTE
This function can only be used when the optional OCR Scan Activation Kit is installed.
Scan Extension Kit(A) "OCR Scan Activation Kit" (page 11-6)
8-21
Setup and Registration (System Menu) > System Menu
Item Description
OCR Output Format*1 Select the OCR output style for text, graphics, and photos.
Value: Text + Graphics, Text+Graphics w/Scan Image, Scanned Image w/
Srchable Txt
NOTE
• This function will not be displayed when the Data Security Function is active.
• This function will not be displayed when Repeat Copy Job Retention is set to 0.
Skip Blank Page (Copy) Select the default Skip Blank Page settings.
Value: Off, On
Skip Blank Page (Send/
Store)
NOTE
If you select [On], set the number of pages to be divided. The setting range is 1 to 500
pages.
Attach File to E-mail Select how to attach the files to the E-mail.
Value
All Files in 1 E-mail: Attach and send all files in a single E-mail.
1 file per E-mail: Attach and send 1 file per E-mail.
Separator Paper Source Select the default paper source for separator sheets.
Value: Cassette 1 (to 5), Multipurpose Tray
NOTE
• [Cassette 3] to [Cassette 5] are displayed when the following optional paper
feeder is installed.
[Cassette 3]: When a paper feeder (500-sheet×2) or large capacity paper feeder
(1,500-sheet×2) is installed.
[Cassette 4]: When a paper feeder (500-sheet×2) or large capacity paper feeder
(1,500-sheet×2) is installed.
[Cassette 5]: When a side feeder (3,000-sheet) is installed.
• You cannot select a cassette that is set to FAX Exclusive Paper Source.
Erase Shadowed Areas- Select the default Erase Shadowed Areas (Copy) setting.
Copy Value: Off, On
Erase Shadowed Areas- Select the default Erase Shadowed Areas (Send) setting.
Send Value: Off, On
Erase Shadowed Areas- Select the default Erase Shadowed Areas (Store) setting.
Store Value: Off, On
8-22
Setup and Registration (System Menu) > System Menu
*1 This function can only be used when the optional OCR Scan Activation Kit is installed.
*2 Displayed only when the optional FAX Kit is installed.
Item Description
Optional Keyboard Type Select the type of optional keyboard that you want to use.
Value: US-English, US-English with Euro, French, German, UK-English
System Stamp
[System Menu/Counter] key > [Common Settings] > [System Stamp]
Item Description
Text (Text Stamp) Select [Add/Edit] to edit the test string for a template. Up to 8 templates can be
registered. Select [Delete] to delete a template.
Font (Page #) Set the font size for page numbers when printing them.
Value
Size 1 to 3: 6.0 to 64.0 pt
Font (Bates Stamp) When a bates stamp is used, set the font sizes that can be set.
Value
Size 1 to 3: 6.0 to 64.0 pt
Font (Text Stamp) Set the font size for stamps when printing them.
Value
Size 1 to 3: 6.0 to 64.0 pt
8-23
Setup and Registration (System Menu) > System Menu
Item Description
Text Stamp Select whether to print a text stamp on all printing jobs.
Value: Off, On
NOTE
When [On] is selected, the Text Stamp settings cannot be changed when printing.
Stamp Select a text string to be stamped from templates, or select [Stamp] and enter a
maximum of 32 characters for the text string.
NOTE
Templates that have been set will appear. For details on registering templates, refer
to the following:
Text (Text Stamp) (page 8-23)
Stamp Method Select the stamp method for the text stamp.
Value: Each Print Page, Each Original Page
NOTE
Select [Detail] to specify the detailed stamp position using numeric values, and to set
the stamp position and angle when a stamp is placed on the back side of the paper in
duplex printing.
8-24
Setup and Registration (System Menu) > System Menu
Item Description
Printing Jobs
Bates Stamp Select whether to print a bates stamp on all printing jobs.
Value: Off, On
NOTE
When [On] is selected, the Bates Stamp settings cannot be changed when printing.
NOTE
To set [Text 1] or [Text 2], select [Change] below and enter a maximum of 32
characters for the text string.
To set [Date], select [Date Format] and set the date display format.
To set [Numbering], select [Numbering Default] and set the starting sequence
number (1 to 9999999). If you select [Fixed Digit Number] > [On], you can set the
number of digits of the serial number (1 to 7 digits).
Select [Detail] in "Position" to specify the detailed stamp position using numeric
values, and to set the stamp position to be placed on the back side of the paper in
duplex printing.
8-25
Setup and Registration (System Menu) > System Menu
Item Description
Text Stamp Select whether to print a text stamp on all sending jobs.
Value: Off, On
NOTE
When [On] is selected, the Text Stamp settings cannot be changed when sending.
Stamp Select a text string to be stamped from templates, or select [Stamp] and enter a
maximum of 32 characters for the text string.
NOTE
Templates that have been set will appear. For details on registering templates, refer to the
following:
Text (Text Stamp) (page 8-23)
NOTE
Select [Detail] to specify the detailed stamp position using numeric values, and to set
the stamp angle.
8-26
Setup and Registration (System Menu) > System Menu
Item Description
Sending Jobs
Bates Stamp Select whether to print a bates stamp on all sending jobs.
Value: Off, On
NOTE
When [On] is selected, the Bates Stamp settings cannot be changed when sending.
NOTE
To set [Text 1] or [Text 2], select [Change] below and enter a maximum of 32
characters for the text string.
To set [Date], select [Date Format] and set the date display format.
To set [Numbering], select [Numbering Default] and set the starting sequence
number (1 to 9999999). If you select [Fixed Digit Number] > [On], you can set the
number of digits of the serial number (1 to 7 digits).
Select [Detail] in "Position" to specify the detailed stamp position using numeric
values.
8-27
Setup and Registration (System Menu) > System Menu
Item Description
Storing Jobs Configure stamp settings for storing documents in USB drive.
After configuring the setting, return to the Custom Box (Storing Documents) screen
from System Menu, and select the [Reset] key.
Text Stamp Select whether to print a text stamp on all storing jobs.
Value: Off, On
NOTE
When [On] is selected, the Text Stamp settings cannot be changed when storing.
Stamp Select a text string to be stamped from templates, or select [Stamp] and enter a
maximum of 32 characters for the text string.
NOTE
Templates that have been set will appear. For details on registering templates, refer to the
following:
Text (Text Stamp) (page 8-23)
NOTE
Select [Detail] to specify the detailed stamp position using numeric values, and to set
the stamp angle.
8-28
Setup and Registration (System Menu) > System Menu
Item Description
Storing Jobs
Bates Stamp Select whether to print a bates stamp on all storing jobs.
Value: Off, On
NOTE
When [On] is selected, the Bates Stamp settings cannot be changed when storing.
NOTE
To set [Text 1] or [Text 2], select [Change] below and enter a maximum of 32
characters for the text string.
To set [Date], select [Date Format] and set the date display format.
To set [Numbering], select [Numbering Default] and set the starting sequence
number (1 to 9999999). If you select [Fixed Digit Number] > [On], you can set the
number of digits of the serial number (1 to 7 digits).
Select [Detail] in "Position" to specify the detailed stamp position using numeric
values.
Manual Staple
[System Menu/Counter] key > [Common Settings] > [Manual Staple]
NOTE
Only displayed when the optional 4,000-sheet Finisher or 100-sheet Staple Finisher is installed.
Item Description
NOTE
If you selected [On], set the time until manual stapling mode is automatically
cancelled. The setting range is 5 to 60 seconds (in 5-second increments).
Item Description
NOTE
This function is displayed when an optional Document Finisher is installed.
8-29
Setup and Registration (System Menu) > System Menu
Item Description
Low Toner Alert Set the amount of remaining toner to notify the administrator when to order a toner
when the toner is running low.
This notification is used for event report, Status Monitor, SNMP Trap.
Value: Off, On
NOTE
If [On] is selected, set the amount of remaining toner to alert. The setting range is 5 to
100% (in 1% increments).
Item Description
Toner Waste Full Alert Notifies the user or the administrator when the waste toner box is almost full. Set the
notification timer based on the amount of toner in the waste toner box.
Notify via Operation Notifies you via the Operation Panel when the waste toner box is almost full.
Panel Value: Off, On
NOTE
If [On] is selected, set the notification timer based on the amount of toner in the waste
toner box. The setting range is 10 to 90% (in 10% increments).
Notify Externally (for Notifies the administrator when the waste toner box is almost full. This notification is
administration use) used for the Event Report, Status Monitor, SNMP Trap (Printer Management System
etc.).
Value: Off, On
NOTE
If [On] is selected, set the notification timer based on the amount of toner in the waste
toner box. The setting range is 10 to 90% (in 10% increments).
Item Description
NOTE
This function is displayed when an optional Sheet Finisher is installed.
8-30
Setup and Registration (System Menu) > System Menu
Display Status/Log
[System Menu/Counter] key > [Common Settings] > [Display Status/Log]
Set the display method of the Status/Log.
Item Description
Display Jobs Detail Status Value: Show All, My Jobs Only, Hide All
Display Jobs Log Value: Show All, My Jobs Only, Hide All
Item Description
Message Banner Print Set whether the confirmation screen appears before each sheet is printed when
printing multiple banner sheets.
Value: Off, On
Item Description
Printing Jobs Column 1 Value: Job Name, User Name, Print Pages x Copies, Total Printed Pages
Printing Jobs Column 2 Value: Job Name, User Name, Print Pages x Copies, Total Printed Pages
Sending Jobs Column 1 Value: Job Name, User Name, Destination, Original Pages, Color/Black & White
Sending Jobs Column 2 Value: Job Name, User Name, Destination, Original Pages, Color/Black & White
Storing Jobs Column 1 Value: Job Name, User Name, Original Pages, Color/Black & White
Storing Jobs Column 2 Value: Job Name, User Name, Original Pages, Color/Black & White
8-31
Setup and Registration (System Menu) > System Menu
Item Description
Place to Show Select where to show the message in the touch panel.
Value:
Login Screen: Login screen of user login administration
Home Screen: Home Screen
Login Screen+Home Screen: Login screen and Home screen of user login
administration
Title Enter a maximum of 30 characters for the title to display on the message board.
Body Enter a maximum of 300 characters for the body to display on the message board.
Raise Priority Raise the priority of the message board selected on the list.
Lower Priority Lower the priority of the message board selected on the list.
Remote Printing
[System Menu/Counter] key > [Common Settings] > [Remote Printing]
Item Description
Remote Printing Select whether to prohibit printing that is performed without operating the machine.
When [Prohibit] is selected, a document that has been stored in the document box
from the Printing System Driver can be printed from the machine. This prevents
another person from seeing that document.
Value: Prohibit, Permit
NOTE
If [Prohibit] is selected, printing and storing using Quick Copy and Proof and Hold
functions are disabled. Printing a received FAX (optional) is not prohibited.
8-32
Setup and Registration (System Menu) > System Menu
Item Description
Layout (JaWS Application) Select the JaWS numeric keypad layout to display upon startup.
Value: Floating, Horizontal, On the Right
Item Description
Prevent Light Reflection Prevent light reflection when using the Erase Shadowed Areas feature.
Value: Off, On
Item Description
Function Key 1 Value: None, Copy, Send, FAX Server, FAX*1, Custom Box, Job Box, USB Drive,
FAX Box*1, FAX Memory RX Box*1, Send to Me (E-mail), Send to Me from Box
Function Key 2 (E-mail), Internet Browser, ID Card Copy, Program*2, Application*3
Function Key 3 NOTE
You can select the functions to be displayed for [All], [Application], [Program] and
[Others].
Item Description
Show Power Off Message Set the mode whether display a confirmation message in power supply off.
Value: Off, On
8-33
Setup and Registration (System Menu) > System Menu
Item Description
Clear Set. after Job Started Set whether to reset function settings to their defaults after the job starts.
Value: Clear, Do Not Clear
Item Description
Direct Printing from Web Set whether to allow Direct Printing from Embedded Web Server RX.
Value: Not Allowed, Allowed
Embedded Web Server RX User Guide
Home
[System Menu/Counter] key > [Home]
Configure settings for Home screen.
Editing the Home Screen (page 2-13)
8-34
Setup and Registration (System Menu) > System Menu
Copy
[System Menu/Counter] key > [Copy]
Configures settings for copying functions.
Item Description
Auto Image Rotation Action Set whether the image is rotated when the orientation of the document to be printed is
different from the orientation of the paper.
Value
Unrotated Manual Copy: If a paper source or zoom ratio is specified, the image
is not rotated.
Apply All: Rotates all images.
Follow Image Size: The image is rotated if the rotated image fits on the paper.
Auto Paper Selection If [Auto] is selected for Paper Selection, set the paper size selection method when
the zoom changes.
Value
Most Suitable Size: Selects paper size based on the current zoom and the size
of the original.
Same as Original Size: Selects paper that matches the size of the original,
regardless the zoom.
Auto % Priority When a paper source of different size from the original is selected, select whether
automatic zoom (reduce/zoom) is performed.
Value: Off, On
Paper Size for Small Specify the paper size to be used for a case where the original is too small to be
Original detected in the Auto Paper Selection mode.
Value: Default Paper Source, A4-R, A4, A5-R, A6-R, B5-R, B5, B6-R, Letter-R,
Letter, Statement-R
Preset Limit Restrict the number of copies that can be made at one time.
Value: 1 to 9999 copies
Reserve Next Priority Specify whether the default screen appears when a subsequent copy job is reserved
while printing is in progress. To have the default screen appear, select [On].
Value: Off, On
Quick Setup Registration Select the functions to be registered for Quick Setup.
Six keys of the Quick Setup screen are allocated to typical functions but can be
changed as necessary.
Six items in the following options are available.
Value: Paper Selection, Zoom, Staple/Punch*1, Density, Duplex, Combine,
Collate/Offset, Original Image, Original Size, Original Orientation,
Continuous Scan, Background Density Adj.
Org. Size of Undetected Specify the action when original size is not detected.
Org. Value: Use Default Source Size, Display Size Select. Screen
*1 This setting is displayed when the optional Document Finisher is installed. When a punching unit is not installed, this
item name is "Staple".
8-35
Setup and Registration (System Menu) > System Menu
Send
[System Menu/Counter] key > [Send]
Configures settings for sending functions.
Item Description
Quick Setup Registration Select the functions to be registered for Quick Setup. Six keys of the Quick Setup
screen are allocated to typical functions but can be changed as necessary.
Six items in the following options are available.
Value: Original Size, 2-sided/Book Original*1, Sending Size, Original
Orientation, File Format, Density, Original Image, Scan Resolution, FAX TX
Resolution*2, Color Selection, Zoom, Continuous Scan, Background Density
Adj.
Dest. Check before Send Select whether to display the confirmation screen of destinations after pressing the
[Start] key when performing sending jobs.
Value: Off, On
Color Type Set the color type when you send color documents.
Value: RGB, sRGB
Entry Check for New Dest. When adding new destination, select whether to display the entry check screen to
check the entered destination.
Value: Off, On
Default Screen Set the default screen displayed when you select the [Send] key.
Value: Destination, Address Book
8-36
Setup and Registration (System Menu) > System Menu
Item Description
Send and Forward Select whether to forward the original to another destination when sending images.
NOTE
When selecting [On], select rules to forward from [E-mail], [Folder (SMB)], [Folder
(FTP)], [FAX]*2, [i-FAX (Via server-On)]*3, and [i-FAX (Via server-Off)]*3.
Destination Set the destination to which the original is forwarded. One destination can be set.
Follow the steps below to register the destination.
• Address Book
• E-mail Addr Entry
• Folder Path Entry
Specifying Destination (page 5-43)
File Separation Set whether originals are divided into multiple files before being forwarded.
Value: Off, Each Page
E-mail Subject Enter a maximum of 256 characters for the subject of forwarded E-mail.
Character Entry Method (page 11-10)
FTP Encrypted TX Set whether originals are encrypted before being forwarded.
Value: Off, On
NOTE
This function is displayed when SSL is set to [On] in Security Settings.
Security Settings (page 8-63)
Recall Destination Select whether to permit usage of [Recall] on the Send screen.
Value: Prohibit, Permit
8-37
Setup and Registration (System Menu) > System Menu
Item Description
OCR Text Recognition Act. Configure settings for OCR Text Recognition Action.
Value: Speed Priority, Quality Priority
NOTE
This function can only be used when the optional OCR Scan Activation Kit is installed.
Scan Extension Kit(A) "OCR Scan Activation Kit" (page 11-6)
E-mail Settings Set SMTP server name and sender address to enable mail sending.
SMTP Auth and When the user login is set to ON, login user name, password and E-mail address of
Sender Adr login user are used for SMTP authentication and e-mail sender address.
Value
Use System Settings: Information set with [SMTP Setting/Sender Adr] is used for
SMTP authentication and E-mail sender address information.
Use Login User Information: Login User information is used for SMTP
authentication and E-mail sender address information.
NOTE
If there is no e-mail address set for the user who logged in, the Sender Address set
with [SMTP Setting/Sender Adr] is used for E-mail sender address information.
*1 When the optional document processor is not installed, this is set to "Book Original".
*2 Displayed only when the optional fax kit is installed.
*3 This function is displayed when the optional Internet FAX Kit is activated.
PDF* 1 Low Quality (High Comp.) to Auto Color (Color/Grayscale), Auto Color (Color/
5 High Quality (Low Comp.) Black and White), Full Color, Grayscale, Black and
White
TIFF 1 Low Quality (High Comp.) to Auto Color (Color/Grayscale), Auto Color (Color/
5 High Quality (Low Comp.) Black and White), Full Color, Grayscale, Black and
White
8-38
Setup and Registration (System Menu) > System Menu
JPEG 1 Low Quality (High Comp.) to Auto Color (Color/Grayscale), Full Color, Grayscale
5 High Quality (Low Comp.)
XPS 1 Low Quality (High Comp.) to Auto Color (Color/Grayscale), Auto Color (Color/
5 High Quality (Low Comp.) Black and White), Full Color, Grayscale, Black and
White
OpenXPS 1 Low Quality (High Comp.) to Auto Color (Color/Grayscale), Auto Color (Color/
5 High Quality (Low Comp.) Black and White), Full Color, Grayscale, Black and
White
High Comp. PDF *1 Compression Ratio Priority, Auto Color (Color/Grayscale), Auto Color (Color/
Standard, Quality Priority Black and White), Full Color, Grayscale
*1 File format can be selected. (Value: [Off] / [PDF/A-1a] / [PDF/A-1b] / [PDF/A-2a] / [PDF/A-2b] / [PDF/A-2u])
Password to Open Off, On Enter the password to open the PDF file.
Document Select [Password], enter a password (up to 256
characters) and then select [OK].
Select [Confirmation] to enter the password again for
confirmation, and select [OK].
Password to Edit/Print Off, On Enter the password to edit the PDF file.
Document Select [Password], enter a password (up to 256
characters) and then select [OK].
Select [Confirmation] to enter the password again for
confirmation, and select [OK].
When you have entered the password to edit/print
document, you can specifically limit the operation.
Detail Printing Not Allowed, Allowed Restricts printing of the PDF file.
Allowed
Page Layout except Can change the page layout except extracting the pages
extracting Pages of the PDF file.
Any except extracting Can conduct all operations except extracting the pages of
Pages the PDF file.
Copying of Disable, Enable Restricts the copying of text and objects on the PDF file.
Text/Images/
Others
8-39
Setup and Registration (System Menu) > System Menu
Password to Open Off, On Enter the password to open the PDF file.
Document Select [Password], enter a password (up to 256
characters) and then select [OK].
Select [Confirmation] to enter the password again for
confirmation, and select [OK].
Password to Edit/Print Off, On Enter the password to edit the PDF file.
Document Select [Password], enter a password (up to 256
characters) and then select [OK].
Select [Confirmation] to enter the password again for
confirmation, and select [OK].
When you have entered the password to edit/print
document, you can specifically limit the operation.
Any except extracting Can conduct all operations except extracting the pages of
Pages the PDF file.
Copying of Disable, Enable Restricts the copying of text and objects on the PDF file.
Text/Images/
Others
8-40
Setup and Registration (System Menu) > System Menu
Item Description
Quick Copy Job To maintain free space on the hard disk, you can set the maximum number of stored
Retention jobs.
Value: number between 0 and 300
NOTE
When 0 is set, Quick Copy cannot be used.
Repeat Copy Job To maintain free space on the hard disk, you can set the maximum number of stored
Retention jobs.
Value: number between 0 and 50
NOTE
This function will not be displayed when the Data Security Function is active.
When 0 is set, Repeat Copy cannot be used.
Deletion of Job This setting specifies that documents, such as Private Printing, Quick Copying, or
Retention Proof and Hold Printing, saved temporarily in the job box are automatically deleted
after they have been saved for a set time.
Value: Off, 1 hour, 4 hours, 1 day, 1 week
NOTE
This function is valid for documents saved after the function is set. Regardless of this
function setting, temporary documents are deleted when the power switch is turned
off.
8-41
Setup and Registration (System Menu) > System Menu
Item Description
Quick Setup Registration Select the functions to be registered for Quick Setup. Six keys of the Quick Setup
screen are allocated to typical functions but can be changed as necessary.
Store File Select the functions to be registered for Store File Quick Setup.
Color Selection, Storing Size, Density, 2-sided/Book Original*2, Scan
Resolution, Zoom, Original Orientation, Original Size, Original Image,
Continuous Scan, Background Density Adj.
Value: Off, Key 1 to 6
FAX
[System Menu/Counter] key > [FAX]
Configure settings for FAX.
Printer
[System Menu/Counter] key > [Printer]
Printing from computers, settings are generally made on the application software screen. However, the following
settings are available for configuring the defaults to customize the machine.
Item Description
Emulation Select the emulation for operating this machine by commands oriented to other types
of printers.
Value: PCL6, KPDL, KPDL (Auto)
NOTE
When you have selected [KPDL (Auto)], set "Alt Emulation", too.
When you have selected [KPDL] or [KPDL (Auto)], set "KPDL Error Report", too.
Alt Emulation When you have selected [KPDL (Auto)] as emulation mode, you can switch between
KPDL and another emulation mode (alternative emulation) automatically according to
the data to print.
Value: PCL6
KPDL Error Report When an error has occurred during printing in KPDL emulation mode, set whether or
not the error report is output.
Value: Off, On
8-42
Setup and Registration (System Menu) > System Menu
Item Description
EcoPrint EcoPrint conserves toner when printing. This is recommended for test copies where
faded printing is not a problem.
Value: Off, On
Toner Save Level (EcoPrint) Select the default Toner Save Level (EcoPrint).
Value: 1 (Low) to 5 (High)
NOTE
Raising the level reduces toner consumption, but image quality falls.
Override A4/Letter Select whether to treat A4 size and Letter, which are similar in size, as the same size
when printing.
Value
Off: A4 and Letter are not regarded as the same in size.
On: A4 and Letter are regarded as the same in size. The machine will use
whichever size is in the paper source.
Form Feed TimeOut Receiving print data from the computer, the machine may sometimes wait if there is
no information signaling that the last page does not have any more data to be printed.
When the preset timeout passes, the machine automatically prints paper. The options
are between 5 and 495 seconds.
Value: 5 to 495 seconds (in 5 second increments)
LF Action Set the line feed action when the machine receives the line feed code (character
code 0AH).
Value: LF Only, LF and CR, Ignore LF
CR Action Set the character return action when the machine receives the character return code
(character code 0DH).
Value: CR Only, LF and CR, Ignore CR
Job Name Set whether the job name set in the Printing System Driver is
displayed. Value: Off, On
NOTE
When selecting [On], select the job name to be displayed from [Job Name], [Job No.
& Job Name], or [Job Name & Job No.].
User Name Set whether the user name set in the Printing System Driver is
displayed. Value: Off, On
Paper Feed Mode While printing from the computer, select how to feed paper when the paper source
and type are specified.
Value
Auto: Search the paper source that matches the selected paper size and type.
Fixed: Print on paper loaded in the specified paper source.
8-43
Setup and Registration (System Menu) > System Menu
Item Description
MP Tray Priority If paper is set in the MP Tray then it is possible for priority to be given to that MP tray
in the paper feed.
Value
Off: The Printing System Driver settings are followed.
Auto Feed: If Auto is selected in the Printing System Driver and there is paper
in the MP tray then the paper feed will be from the MP tray.
Always: If there is paper in the MP tray then the paper feed will be from the
MP tray regardless of what is set in the Printing System Driver.
Auto Cassette Change Select the following actions when the paper runs out in the paper source while
printing.
Value: Off, On
NOTE
• When selecting [Off], the machine displays "Add the following paper in cassette
#." (# is a cassette number) or "Add the following paper in the multipurpose tray.",
and stops printing.
• Load the paper according to the paper source displayed to resume printing.
• To print from the other paper cassette, select [Paper Selection]. Select the
desired paper source.
• When selecting [On], the machine continues printing automatically when the other
cassette contains the same paper as the currently-used cassette.
Wide A4 Turn this to on to increase the maximum number of characters that can be printed in a
line for an A4 page (78 characters at 10 pitch) and Letter size page (80 characters at
10 pitch). This setting is only effective in PCL6 emulation.
Value: Off, On
NOTE
Settings that are received from the Printing System Driver have priority over the
operation panel settings.
Printing Job Terminator You can select the condition which regarded as a job termination if the print job could
not be processed until the end due to your environment and the other reason.
Value:
EOJ (End of Job): The command recognized as a termination of the job data is
regarded as one job until it is detected.
End of Network Session: The data included in a network session at network
connection is regarded as one job.
UEL (Universal Exit Language): The UEL included in the termination of the job
data is regarded as one job until it is detected.
8-44
Setup and Registration (System Menu) > System Menu
Report
Print reports to check the machine settings, status, and history. Settings for printing reports can also be configured.
Print Report
[System Menu/Counter] key > [Report] > [Print Report]
Item Description
Status Page Prints the status page, allowing you to check the information including current
settings, available memory space, and optional equipment installed.
Status Page
Font List Prints the font list, allowing you to check the font samples installed in the machine.
Network Status Prints the network status, allowing you to check the information including network
interface firmware version, network address and protocol.
Service Status Prints the service status. More detailed information is available than on the Status
Page. Service personnel usually print the service status pages for maintenance
purpose.
8-45
Setup and Registration (System Menu) > System Menu
Item Description
Optional Network Status Prints the optional network status, allowing you to check the information including
optional network interface firmware version, network address and protocol.
NOTE
This function is displayed when the optional Network Interface Kit or Wireless
Network Interface Kit is installed.
Item Description
Send Result Report Automatically print a report of transmission result when a transmission is complete.
Attach Image of NW
FAX Operation Guide
FAX*1
Canceled before Print a send result report if the job is canceled before being sent.
Sending*2 Value: Off, On
Recipient Format*2 Select the Recipient Format for the send result report.
Value: Name or Destination, Name and Destination
8-46
Setup and Registration (System Menu) > System Menu
Item Description
Auto Sending This function automatically sends the log history to the specified destinations
whenever a set number of jobs has been logged.
Value: Off, On
NOTE
If [On] is selected, specify the number of job histories. The setting range is 1 to 1,500.
Send Log History You can also send the log history to the specified destinations manually.
Destination Set the destination to which log histories are sent. Only E-mail address can be set.
Job Log Subject Set the subject automatically entered when sending log histories by E-mail.
Value: Up to 256 characters
SSFC Log Subject Enter the subject of the printed job history with IC card authentication.
Value: Up to 256 characters
Personal Information Select whether to include personal information in the job log.
Value: Include, Exclude
8-47
Setup and Registration (System Menu) > System Menu
Item Description
NOTE
If [On] is selected, set the number of histories to be recorded. The setting range is 1
to 1,000.
Auto Sending Select whether the login history is automatically sent to the set address when the
number of entries reaches the number set in "Login History".
Value: Off, On
NOTE
This function is displayed when "Login History" is set to [On].
Destination Set the destination to which login histories are sent. E-mail address only can be set as
destination.
NOTE
This function is displayed when "Login History" is set to [On].
Subject Set the subject automatically entered when sending login histories by E-mail.
Value: Up to 256 characters
NOTE
This function is displayed when "Login History" is set to [On].
NOTE
If the user authentication screen appears, enter your login user name and login password and select [Login]. For this,
you need to login as an administrator or as a user with privileges to carry out this setting. The factory default login user
name and login password are set as shown below.
8-48
Setup and Registration (System Menu) > System Menu
Item Description
Device Log History Select whether to record the device log history.
Value: Off, On
NOTE
If [On] is selected, set the number of histories to be stored. The setting range is 1 to
1,000.
Auto Sending Select whether the device log history is automatically sent to the set address when
the number of entries reaches the number set in "Device Log History".
Value: Off, On
NOTE
This function is displayed when "Device Log History" is set to [On].
Destination Set the destination to which device log histories are sent. E-mail address only can be
set as destination.
NOTE
This function is displayed when "Device Log History" is set to [On].
Subject Set the subject automatically entered when sending device log histories by E-mail.
Value: Up to 256 characters
NOTE
This function is displayed when "Device Log History" is set to [On].
NOTE
If the user authentication screen appears, enter your login user name and login password and select [Login]. For this,
you need to login as an administrator or as a user with privileges to carry out this setting. The factory default login user
name and login password are set as shown below.
8-49
Setup and Registration (System Menu) > System Menu
Item Description
Secure Comm. Error Log Select whether to record the secure communication error log history.
Value: Off, On
NOTE
If [On] is selected, set the number of histories to be stored. The setting range is 1 to
1,000.
Auto Sending Select whether the secure communication error log history is automatically sent to the
set address when the number of entries reaches the number set in "Secure Comm.
Error Log".
Value: Off, On
NOTE
This function is displayed when "Secure Communication Error Log History" is set to
[On].
Destination Set the destination to which secure communication error log histories are sent. E-mail
address only can be set as destination.
NOTE
This function is displayed when "Secure Communication Error Log History" is set to
[On].
Subject Set the subject automatically entered when sending secure communication error log
histories by E-mail.
Value: Up to 256 characters
NOTE
This function is displayed when "Secure Communication Error Log History" is set to
[On].
NOTE
If the user authentication screen appears, enter your login user name and login password and select [Login]. For this,
you need to login as an administrator or as a user with privileges to carry out this setting. The factory default login user
name and login password are set as shown below.
8-50
Setup and Registration (System Menu) > System Menu
System/Network
Configures machine system settings.
Network
Configures network settings.
Host Name
[System Menu/Counter] key > [System/Network] > [Network] > [Host Name]
Item Description
Host Name Check the host name of the machine. Host name can be changed from Command
Center RX.
Changing Device Information (page 2-65)
NOTE
This function is displayed when the Wireless Network Interface Kit (IB-35) is installed.
The Wireless Network Interface Kit is an option for some models. Contact your dealer or our sales or service
representatives for detail.
IB-35 "Wireless Network Interface Kit" (page 11-6)
Item Description
NOTE
• Up to 32 characters can be entered.
• This function is displayed when [Wi-Fi Direct] is set to [On].
NOTE
• If you select [ON], set the waiting time for automatic disconnection.
• This function is displayed when [Wi-Fi Direct] is set to [On].
8-51
Setup and Registration (System Menu) > System Menu
Item Description
Persistent Group Set whether Wi-Fi Direct connection as Persistent Group (information for the
connection is kept even if the power is turned off).
Value: Off, On
NOTE
This function is displayed when [Wi-Fi Direct] is set to [On].
Wi-Fi Settings
[System Menu/Counter] key > [System/Network] > [Network] > [Wi-Fi Settings]
Set Wi-Fi.
NOTE
This function is displayed when the Wireless Network Interface Kit (IB-35) is installed.
The Wireless Network Interface Kit is an option for some models. Contact your dealer or our sales or service
representatives for detail.
IB-35 "Wireless Network Interface Kit" (page 11-6)
Wi-Fi
Item Description
Setup
Item Description
Quick Setup If the machine will connect to an access point that supports the automatic wireless
network setup, connection settings can be configured by Quick Setup.
Available Network Displays access points to which the machine can connect.
WEP Key Index Select the key index of the access point.
Value: 0 to 3
Push Button Method If the access point supports the push button method, wireless settings can be
configured using the push button. This setting executes push button, and the
connection is started by pressing the push button on the access point.
NOTE
The push button method supports only the WPS.
PIN Code Method Starts connection using the machine's PIN code. Enter the PIN code into the access
(Device) point. The PIN code of the machine is automatically generated.
8-52
Setup and Registration (System Menu) > System Menu
Item Description
Custom Setup The detailed settings for wireless LAN can be changed.
Network Name (SSID) Set the SSID (Service Set Identifier) of the wireless LAN to which the machine
connects.
NOTE
Up to 32 characters can be entered.
Encryption Select encryption method. The setting values vary depending on the Network
Authentication setting.
Network Encryption
Authentication
Open Disable ―
8-53
Setup and Registration (System Menu) > System Menu
TCP/IP Setting
Item Description
IPv4 Set up TCP/IP (IPv4) to connect to the network. This setting is available when [TCP/
IP] is set to [On].
NOTE
When DHCP is set to [On], this function will be grayed out and the value cannot be
entered.
NOTE
When DHCP is set to [On], this function will be grayed out and the value cannot be
entered.
NOTE
When DHCP is set to [On], this function will be grayed out and the value cannot be
entered.
IMPORTANT
• When setting the Auto-IP, enter "0.0.0.0" in [IP Address].
• After changing the setting, restart the network or turn the machine OFF and then ON.
8-54
Setup and Registration (System Menu) > System Menu
Item Description
IPv6 Set up TCP/IP (IPv6) to connect to the network. This setting is available when [TCP/
IP] is [On].
NOTE
Selecting [On] displays IP address in [IP Address (Link Local)] after restarting the
network.
NOTE
This function is displayed when [IPv6] is set to [On].
Selecting [On] displays IP address in [IP Address (Stateless)] after restarting the
network.
Manual Setting Manually specify the IP address, prefix length, and gateway address of TCP/IP
(IPv6).
Value
IP Address (Manual): 128-bits address is expressed in eight groups consisting
of four-digit hexadecimal digits. The groups are separated
by colon (:).
Prefix Length: 0 to 128
Default Gateway: 128-bits address is expressed in eight groups consisting of
four-digit hexadecimal digits. The groups are separated by
colon (:).
NOTE
This function is displayed when [IPv6] is set to [On].
To enter "Default Gateway", set [RA (Stateless)] to [Off].
NOTE
This function is displayed when [IPv6] is set to [On].
Selecting [On] displays IP address in [IP Address (Stateful)] after restarting the
network.
IMPORTANT
After changing the setting, restart the network or turn the machine OFF and then ON.
Restart Network
Item Description
8-55
Setup and Registration (System Menu) > System Menu
TCP/IP Setting
Item Description
IPv4 Set up TCP/IP (IPv4) to connect to the network. This setting is available when [TCP/
IP] is set to [On].
NOTE
When DHCP is set to [On], this function will be grayed out and the value cannot be
entered.
NOTE
When DHCP is set to [On], this function will be grayed out and the value cannot be
entered.
NOTE
When DHCP is set to [On], this function will be grayed out and the value cannot be
entered.
IMPORTANT
• When setting the Auto-IP, enter "0.0.0.0" in [IP Address].
• After changing the setting, restart the network or turn the machine OFF and then ON.
8-56
Setup and Registration (System Menu) > System Menu
Item Description
IPv6 Set up TCP/IP (IPv6) to connect to the network. This setting is available when [TCP/
IP] is [On].
NOTE
Selecting [On] displays IP address in [IP Address (Link Local)] after restarting the
network.
NOTE
This function is displayed when [IPv6] is set to [On].
Selecting [On] displays IP address in [IP Address (Stateless)] after restarting the
network.
Manual Setting Manually specify the IP address, prefix length, and gateway address of TCP/IP
(IPv6).
Value
IP Address (Manual): 128-bits address is expressed in eight groups consisting
of four-digit hexadecimal digits. The groups are separated
by colon (:).
Prefix Length: 0 to 128
Default Gateway: 128-bits address is expressed in eight groups consisting of
four-digit hexadecimal digits. The groups are separated by
colon (:).
NOTE
This function is displayed when [IPv6] is set to [On].
To enter "Default Gateway", set [RA (Stateless)] to [Off].
NOTE
This function is displayed when [IPv6] is set to [On].
Selecting [On] displays IP address in [IP Address (Stateful)] after restarting the
network.
IMPORTANT
After changing the setting, restart the network or turn the machine OFF and then ON.
8-57
Setup and Registration (System Menu) > System Menu
LAN Interface
Item Description
LAN Interface Specify the settings for the LAN interface to be used.
Value: Auto, 10BASE-T Half, 10BASE-T Full, 100BASE-TX Half, 100BASE-TX Full,
1000BASE-T
IMPORTANT
After changing the setting, restart the network or turn the machine OFF and then ON.
Bonjour
[System Menu/Counter] key > [System/Network] > [Network] > [Bonjour]
Item Description
Wi-Fi Direct Set whether to enable this function for each network.
Value: Disable, Enable
Wi-Fi
Wired Network
IPSec
[System Menu/Counter] key > [System/Network] > [Network] > [IPSec]
Item Description
Protocol Settings
[System Menu/Counter] key > [System/Network] > [Network] > [Protocol Settings]
Configure protocol settings.
Item Description
FTP Client (Transmission) Select whether to send documents using FTP. To use the FTP Client, set the protocol
to [On]. The default port number is 21.
Value: Off, On
Wi-Fi Direct Set whether to enable this function for each network.
Value: Disable, Enable
Wi-Fi
Wired Network
8-58
Setup and Registration (System Menu) > System Menu
Item Description
SMB Client (Transmission): Select whether to send documents using SMB. To use the SMB Client, set the
protocol to [On]. The default port number is 445.
Value: Off, On
Wi-Fi Direct Set whether to enable this function for each network.
Value: Disable, Enable
Wi-Fi
Wired Network
Wi-Fi Direct Set whether to enable this function for each network.
Value: Disable, Enable
Wi-Fi
Wired Network
WSD Print Set whether to use our proprietary web services. WIA driver, TWAIN driver and
Network FAX driver use this Enhanced WSD web service.*1
Value: Off, On
Wi-Fi Direct Set whether to enable this function for each network.
Value: Disable, Enable
Wi-Fi
Wired Network
ThinPrint Select whether to use ThinPrint. To use the Thin Print protocol, set the protocol to
[On]. The default port number is 4000.*1, *2
Value: Off, On
NOTE
This function is displayed only when the optional ThinPrint Option is activated.
Wi-Fi Direct Set whether to enable this function for each network.
Value: Disable, Enable
Wi-Fi
Wired Network
Thin Print over SSL To use the Thin Print over SSL protocol, set [Thin Print Over SSL] and [SSL] to [On].
Value: Off, On
NOTE
When selecting [On], it also requires a certificate for SSL. The default certificate is the
self-certificate of the machine.
Embedded Web Server RX User Guide
8-59
Setup and Registration (System Menu) > System Menu
Item Description
Wi-Fi Direct Set whether to enable this function for each network.
Value: Disable, Enable
Wi-Fi
Wired Network
Wi-Fi Direct Set whether to enable this function for each network.
Value: Disable, Enable
Wi-Fi
Wired Network
IPP Selects whether to receive documents using IPP. To use the IPP protocol, set [IPP] to
[On], and set [SSL] to [Off]. In addition, select [Not Secure (IPP&IPPS)] on IPP
Security under Security Settings from the Embedded Web Server RX. The default
port number is 631.*1
Value: Off, On
Wi-Fi Direct Set whether to enable this function for each network.
Value: Disable, Enable
Wi-Fi
Wired Network
IPP over SSL To use the IPP protocol, set [IPP] and [SSL] to [On]. The default port number is
443.*1, *2
Value: Off, On
NOTE
When selecting [On], it also requires a certificate for SSL. the default certificate is the
self-certificate of the machine.
Embedded Web Server RX User Guide
Wi-Fi Direct Set whether to enable this function for each network.
Value: Disable, Enable
Wi-Fi
Wired Network
Wi-Fi Direct Set whether to enable this function for each network.
Value: Disable, Enable
Wi-Fi
Wired Network
Wi-Fi Direct Set whether to enable this function for each network.
Value: Disable, Enable
Wi-Fi
Wired Network
8-60
Setup and Registration (System Menu) > System Menu
Item Description
Wi-Fi Direct Set whether to enable this function for each network.
Value: Disable, Enable
Wi-Fi
Wired Network
Wi-Fi Direct Set whether to enable this function for each network.
Value: Disable, Enable
Wi-Fi
Wired Network
Wi-Fi Direct Set whether to enable this function for each network.
Value: Disable, Enable
Wi-Fi
Wired Network
Enhanced WSD over SSL Set whether to use our proprietary web services over SSL.*1, *2
Value: Off, On
NOTE
Selecting [Off] will disable the functionality of WIA, TWAIN and Network FAX drivers.
Wi-Fi Direct Set whether to enable this function for each network.
Value: Disable, Enable
Wi-Fi
Wired Network
Wi-Fi Direct Set whether to enable this function for each network.
Value: Disable, Enable
Wi-Fi
Wired Network
eSCL over SSL Selects whether to receive scanned documents using eSCL over SSL.*1, *2
Wi-Fi Direct Set whether to enable this function for each network.
Value: Disable, Enable
Wi-Fi
Wired Network
8-61
Setup and Registration (System Menu) > System Menu
Item Description
VNC (RFB) This is set when starting up a VNC Viewer (E.g. RealVNC) to use the Remote
Operation.*1
The default port number is 9062.
Value: Off, On
Wi-Fi Direct Set whether to enable this function for each network.
Value: Disable, Enable
Wi-Fi
Wired Network
VNC (RFB) over SSL This is set when starting up a VNC Viewer (E.g. RealVNC) to use Remote Operation
protected by SSL.*1, *2
The default port number is 9063.
Value: Off, On
NOTE
When selecting [On], it also requires a certificate for SSL. The default certificate is the
self-certificate of the machine.
Wi-Fi Direct Set whether to enable this function for each network.
Value: Disable, Enable
Wi-Fi
Wired Network
Enhanced VNC over SSL This is set when starting up Embedded Web Server RX to use Remote Operation
protected by SSL.*1, *2
The default port number is 9061.
Value: Off, On
NOTE
• The default setting is [On].
• When selecting [On], it also requires a certificate for SSL. The default certificate is
the self-certificate of the machine.
Wi-Fi Direct Set whether to enable this function for each network.
Value: Disable, Enable
Wi-Fi
Wired Network
Wi-Fi Direct Set whether to enable this function for each network.
Value: Disable, Enable
Wi-Fi
Wired Network
8-62
Setup and Registration (System Menu) > System Menu
Item Description
REST over SSL Select whether to communicate using REST over SSL.*1, *2
Value: Off, On
NOTE
When selecting [On], it also requires a certificate for SSL. the default certificate is the
self-certificate of the machine.
Wi-Fi Direct Set whether to enable this function for each network.
Value: Disable, Enable
Wi-Fi
Wired Network
IMPORTANT
Depending on the protocol, there are models where you need to restart the network or turn the machine OFF
and then ON after changing the setting.
Security Settings
[System Menu/Counter] key > [System/Network] > [Network] > [Security Settings]
Item Description
SSL Select whether to use SSL for communication.
Value: Off, On
Proxy
[System Menu/Counter] key > [System/Network] > [Network] > [Proxy]
Item Description
Proxy Set the proxy for connection to the Internet from an application.
Value: Off, On
Use the Same Proxy Set whether the same proxy server is used for all protocols. To use the same proxy
Server for All server, select the [Use the Same Proxy Server for All Protocols] checkbox.
Protocols
Proxy Server (HTTPS) Set a proxy server (HTTPS). This setup is available when "Use the Same Proxy
Server for All Protocols" is [Off].
Value: (Enter the proxy address and port number.)
Do Not Use Proxy for Set domains for which no proxy is used.
Following Domains Value: (Enter the domain name.)
8-63
Setup and Registration (System Menu) > System Menu
Ping
[System Menu/Counter] key > [System/Network] > [Network] > [Ping]
Item Description
Ping Checks if communication with the destination by entering the host name or IP
address of the destination is possible.
NOTE
If [Primary Network (Client)] is set to [Others], this item is not displayed.
Restart Network
[System Menu/Counter] key > [System/Network] > [Network] > [Restart Network]
Item Description
IP Filter (IPv4)
[System Menu/Counter] key > [System/Network] > [Network] > [IP Filter (IPv4)]
Item Description
IP Filter (IPv4) Configure IP filters. IP filters restrict access to the machine based on the IP
addresses and protocols.
Specify the IP addresses or network addresses of the hosts to which access is
granted from Embedded Web Server RX. If nothing is specified on this page,
access from all hosts is allowed.
Value: Off, On
Embedded Web Server RX User Guide
IP Filter (IPv6)
[System Menu/Counter] key > [System/Network] > [Network] > [IP Filter (IPv6)]
Item Description
IP Filter (IPv6) Configure IP filters. IP filters restrict access to the machine based on the IP
addresses and protocols.
Specify the IP addresses or network addresses of the hosts to which access is
granted from Embedded Web Server RX. If nothing is specified on this page,
access from all hosts is allowed.
Value: Off, On
Embedded Web Server RX User Guide
8-64
Setup and Registration (System Menu) > System Menu
Optional Network
[System Menu/Counter] key > [System/Network] > [Optional Network]
Basic
Configure settings for the optional Network Interface Kit.
NOTE
This menu is displayed when the optional Network Interface Kit or Wireless Network Interface Kit is installed.
Item Description
Host Name Check the host name of the machine. Host name can be changed from
Embedded Web Server RX.
Changing Device Information (page 2-65)
NOTE
This function is displayed when the optional Network Interface Kit is installed.
8-65
Setup and Registration (System Menu) > System Menu
Wireless Network
Configure settings for the optional Wireless Network Interface Kit.
NOTE
This function is displayed when the Wireless Network Interface Kit (IB-51) is installed.
Item Description
Quick Setup If the machine will connect to an access point that supports the automatic wireless
network setup, connection settings can be configured by Quick Setup.
Available Network Select access points to which the machine can be connected, enter the Preshared
Key and start a connection.
Push Button Method If the access point supports the push button method, wireless settings can be
configured using the push button. This setting executes push button, and the
connection is started by pressing the push button on the access point.
NOTE
The push button method supports only the WPS.
PIN Code Method Starts connection using the machine's PIN code. Enter the PIN code into the access
(Device) point. The PIN code of the machine is automatically generated.
PIN Code Method Starts connection using the PIN code of the access point. Enter the PIN code of the
(Terminal) access point.
8-66
Setup and Registration (System Menu) > System Menu
Item Description
Custom Setup The detailed settings for wireless LAN can be changed.
Network Name (SSID) Set the SSID (Service Set Identifier) of the wireless LAN to which the machine
connects.
NOTE
Up to 32 characters can be entered.
Channel Set channel. Use [-] / [+] or the numeric keys to enter a number.
Value: 1 to 11
Network Select network authentication type. To select other options, open the device home
Authentication page from a computer.
Value: Open, Shared, WPA-PSK*1, WPA2-PSK*1
Encryption Select encryption method. If the option other than [Disable] is selected, enter the
WEP key or the Preshared key. The setting values vary depending on the Network
Authentication setting. Select [Data Encryption].
When Network Authentication is set to [Open] or [Shared]:
Value: Disable, WEP
When Network Authentication is set to [WPA-PSK] or [WPA2-PSK]:
Value: TKIP*2, AES, Auto*2, Preshared Key
NOTE
• If [WEP] is selected, enter the WEP key. Up to 26 characters can be entered.
• If [TKIP], [AES] or [Auto] is selected, enter the Preshared key. Enter the value in 8
to 64 characters.
8-67
Setup and Registration (System Menu) > System Menu
NOTE
This function is displayed when the optional Network Interface Kit (IB-50) or Wireless Network Interface Kit (IB-51 or
IB-35) is installed.
The Wireless Network Interface Kit (IB-35) is an option for some models. Contact your dealer or our sales or service
representatives for detail.
IB-35 "Wireless Network Interface Kit" (page 11-6)
Item Description
Primary Network (Client) Select the network interface to be used for the send function that this machine
functions as a client, the network authentication and connecting to external address
book.
Value: Wi-Fi, Wired Network, Optional Network
NOTE
• [Wi-Fi] is displayed when the Wireless Network Interface Kit (IB-35) is installed.
• [Optional Network] is displayed when the optional Network Interface Kit (IB-50)
or Wireless Network Interface Kit (IB-51) is installed.
• You can set and use "[Wired Network] or [Wi-Fi]", and "[Optional Network] (IB-
50 or IB-51)" individually for the e-mail send connection.
Security Level
[System Menu/Counter] key > [System/Network] > [Security Level]
Item Description
NOTE
This function is available when you have logged in as machine administrator.
Adding a User (Local User List) (page 9-8)
8-68
Setup and Registration (System Menu) > System Menu
Item Description
USB Host This locks and protects the USB port (USB host).
Value: Unblock, Block
USB Device This locks and protects the USB interface connector (USB Device).
Value: Unblock, Block
USB Drive This locks and protects the USB memory slot.
Value: Unblock, Block
NOTE
This function is available when USB Host is set to [Unblock].
Optional Interface 1 This locks and protects the optional interface slots.
Value: Unblock, Block
Optional Interface 2
NOTE
You can set this feature for each slot.
IMPORTANT
After changing the setting, restart the network or turn the machine OFF and then ON.
8-69
Setup and Registration (System Menu) > System Menu
Data Security
[System Menu/Counter] key > [System/Network] > [Data Security]
Configure settings for data stored in the SSD, hard disk, and machine's memory.
Item Description
NOTE
• This function is displayed when the Data Security Function is active.
• Enter the security password to change security functions.
NOTE
This method may take more time than Once Overwrite method to process a larger
amount of data.
Security Password Customize the security password so that only the administrator can use the Data
Encryption/Overwrite.
Enter a new security password 6 to 16 alphanumeric characters and symbols.
Enter the password again for confirmation.
IMPORTANT
Avoid any easy-to-guess numbers for the security password (e.g. 11111111 or
12345678).
System Initialization Overwrite all the data stored in the hard disk/SSD when disposing of the machine.
IMPORTANT
If you accidentally turn the power switch off during initialization, the hard disk/
SSD might possibly crash or initialization might fail.
NOTE
If you accidentally turn the power switch off during initialization, turn the power switch
on again. Initialization automatically restarts.
8-70
Setup and Registration (System Menu) > System Menu
Item Description
Data Sanitization Return the following information registered in the machine to the factory defaults.
• Address Book
• Favorites
• System settings
• Fax transmission and reception / forwarding data
• Transmission histories
• Local FAX Name
• Local FAX Number
• Data saved in Custom Box
• Optional applications
NOTE
• Print the data sanitization report and then confirm that security data is deleted.
Data Sanitization Report (page 8-46)
• Once in progress, the processing cannot canceled.
• Before performing this function, disconnect modular, network, and other cables.
• Before performing this function, set all interface block settings to [Unblock].
Interface Block Setting (page 8-69)
• Do not turn the power off while sanitizing the data. If the power is turned off during
data erasing, erasing will be executed automatically when the power is restored,
however, complete erasure cannot be guaranteed.
Reserve a Completely erase address and image data saved in the device at the scheduled time.
Sanitization Time Value: Off, On
If [On] is selected, set the date and time that sanitization is to be performed. The
setting range is Year (2000 to 2035), Month (1 to 12), Day (1 to 31), Hour (00 to 23).
Device Use After The device use restriction after the data sanitization is completed.
Sanitization The device cannot be used if [Prohibit] is selected.
Value: Permit, Prohibit
8-71
Setup and Registration (System Menu) > System Menu
Information erased
Item Description
Address Settings This specifies a prefix, suffix, and domain name to be attached to a destination.
NOTE
• This setting is available when [FAX Server] is set to [On].
• For information about the FAX Server, contact the FAX Server administrator.
NOTE
This setting is available when [FAX Server] is set to [On].
Address Book Defaults This specifies the External Address Book to be used.
NOTE
• This setting is available when [FAX Server] is set to [On].
• This is not displayed if the External Address Book setting is not configured.
Embedded Web Server RX User Guide
8-72
Setup and Registration (System Menu) > System Menu
Optional Function
[System Menu/Counter] key > [System/Network] > [Optional Function]
Item Description
Optional Function You can use the optional applications installed on this machine.
Applications (page 11-8)
Bluetooth Settings
[System Menu/Counter] key > [System/Network] > [Bluetooth Settings]
Item Description
Item Description
Restart Entire Device Restart the machine without turning the main power switch off. Use this to deal with
any unstable operation by the machine. (Same as the computer restart.)
NOTE
When using the remote service settings, it is necessary to make a contract with our company.
Please contact our sales office or our authorized dealer (purchase source) for the details.
NFC
[System Menu/Counter] key > [System/Network] > [NFC]
Item Description
8-73
Setup and Registration (System Menu) > System Menu
Remote Operation
[System Menu/Counter] key > [System/Network] > [Remote Operation]
Item Description
NOTE
When selecting [Administrator Only], the remote operation using VNC software is
unavailable.
Motion Sensor
[System Menu/Counter] key > [System/Network] > [Motion Sensor]
Item Description
Motion Sensor Automatically wake up from low power mode or sleep mode when someone
approaches the device.
Value: Off, On
When selecting [On], set the sensitivity of the Motion Sensor. The setting range is [1]
(Low) to [3] (High).
8-74
Setup and Registration (System Menu) > System Menu
Edit Destination
Address Book
[System Menu/Counter] key > [Edit Destination] > [Address Book]
Configure settings for address book.
Adding a Destination (Address Book) (page 3-35)
Print List
[System Menu/Counter] key > [Edit Destination] > [Print list]
Item Description
One Touch Key List (All) Prints One Touch List, allowing you to check the destinations that have been
registered on the One Touch Keys.
Item Description
Sort Select the default sort setting of the address for the address book.
Value: No., Name
Narrow Down This procedure can be used to filter (narrow down) the types of destination listed
when the address book is displayed.
Value: Off, E-mail, Folder, FAX*1, i-FAX*2, Group
Address Book Type*3 Select whether the machine's address book or the External Address Book appears
when the address book is displayed.
Value: Machine Address Book, Ext Address Book
8-75
Setup and Registration (System Menu) > System Menu
Edit Restriction
[System Menu/Counter] key > [Edit Destination] > [Edit Restriction]
Item Description
Address Book Restrict editing of the address book. If you selected [Administrator Only], you can
only edit the Address Book by logging in with administrator privileges.
Value: Off, Administrator Only
One-Touch Key Restrict editing of the One Touch Key. If you selected [Administrator Only], you can
only edit the One Touch Key by logging in with administrator privileges.
Value: Off, Administrator Only
User Property
[System Menu/Counter] key > [User Property]
Allows you to view information about logged in users and edit some of that information.
Enabling User Login Administration (page 9-3)
Date/Timer/Energy Saver
[System Menu/Counter] key > [Date/Timer/Energy Saver]
Configures settings related to the date and time.
Item Description
Date/Time Set the date and time for the location where you use the machine. If you perform
Send as E-mail, the date and time set here will be displayed on the header.
Value: Year (2000 to 2035), Month (1 to 12), Day (1 to 31), Hour (00 to 23), Minute
(00 to 59), Second (00 to 59)
NOTE
If you change the date/time while using the trial version of an application, you will no
longer be able to use the application.
Date Format Select the display format of year, month, and date. The year is displayed in Western
notation.
Value: MM/DD/YYYY, DD/MM/YYYY, YYYY/MM/DD
Time Zone Set the time difference from GMT. Choose the nearest listed location from the list. If
you select a region that utilizes summer time, configure settings for summer time.
Setting Date and Time (page 2-29)
8-76
Setup and Registration (System Menu) > System Menu
Item Description
Auto Panel Reset If no jobs are run for a certain period of time, automatically reset settings and return to
the default setting. Select to use Auto Panel Reset or not.
Value: Off, On
NOTE
For setting the time until the panel is automatically reset, refer to the following:
Panel Reset Timer (page 8-77)
Auto Error Clear If an error occurs during processing, processing stops to wait for the next step to be
taken by the user. In the Auto Error Clear mode, automatically clear the error after a
set amount of time elapses.
Value: Off, On
NOTE
For setting the automatic error recovery time, refer to the following:
Error Clear Timer (page 8-78)
Low Power Timer Set amount of time before entering the Low Power mode.
Value
For Europe: 1 to 120 minutes (1 minute increments)
Except for Europe: 1 to 240 minutes (1 minute increments)
Low Power Mode (page 2-40)
Panel Reset Timer If you select [On] for Auto Panel Reset, set the amount of time to wait before Auto Panel
Reset.
Value: 5 to 495 seconds (in 5 second increments)
NOTE
This function is displayed when [Auto Panel Reset] is set to [On].
Interrupt Clear Timer Set the period after which the machine reverts to Normal mode when it has been set
to Interrupt Copy mode and then left unused.
Value: 5 to 495 seconds (in 5 second increments)
Error Job Skip Set whether a job for which a "Add paper in cassette #" or "Add paper in Multipurpose
tray" error occurred when the job was started is automatically skipped after a set period
of time elapses.
Value: Off, On
NOTE
• When a job is skipped, it is moved to the end of the job queue.
• If [On] is selected, set the time until the job is skipped. The setting range is 5 to 90
(5 second increments).
8-77
Setup and Registration (System Menu) > System Menu
Item Description
Error Clear Timer If you select [On] for Auto Error Clear, set the amount of time to wait before
automatically clearing errors.
Value: 5 to 495 seconds (in 5 second increments)
NOTE
This function is displayed when [Auto Error Clear] is set to [On].
Unusable Time*1 Set a time period during which the machine will not print received faxes.
FAX Operation Guide.
Sleep Rules (models for Select whether to use the Sleep mode for the following functions individually:
Europe) • ID Card Reader*2
• Application
Value: Off, On
NOTE
• If the sleep condition is not turned off, the machine will not wake from sleep mode
even if it receives a print job from a computer connected by USB cable. Also, the
ID card cannot be recognized.
• This function will not be displayed when the optional Network Interface Kit or Fiery
controller is installed.
NOTE
This function will not be displayed when the optional Network Interface Kit or Fiery
controller is installed.
Sleep Rules Select whether to use the Energy Saver mode for the following functions individually:
• ID Card Reader*2
• Application
Value: Off, On
NOTE
When the machine has entered sleep mode with Energy Saver setting, it does not
wake from sleep mode when it receives print data from a PC connected by USB
cable. Also, the ID card cannot be recognized.
8-78
Setup and Registration (System Menu) > System Menu
Item Description
Weekly Timer Settings Configure settings for switching the machine into Sleep mode and waking it
automatically at a specified time for each day of the week.
Schedule Specify the time for each day of the week at which the machine enters Sleep mode
and recovers.
Retry Times Set the number of retry to switch the machine into Sleep mode.
Value: Limited Retries, Unlimited Retries
NOTE
If [Limited Retries] is selected, set the number of retry. The setting range is 0 to 10.
Retry is not performed when "0" is set.
If [Unlimited Retries] is selected, retry is performed until the machine enters Sleep
mode.
Power Off Rule (models for Select whether or not the machine enters Power Off mode for the following function.
Europe) Select [On] to set the Power Off mode.
• Network
• FAX*1
• USB Cable
• USB Host
• NIC*3
• Remote Diagnostics
• Application
Value: Off, On
NOTE
Even when any of the functions is set to [On], if either [FAX] or [NIC] is set to [Off],
the machine does not enter Power Off Mode.
Even when [Network] or [USB Cable] is set to [Off], if the machine does not
communicate with the other devices, the machine will enter Power Off Mode.
Power Off Timer (models Select whether to turn off the power automatically after a period of inactivity.
for Europe) Value: 1 hour, 2 hours, 3 hours, 4 hours, 5 hours, 6 hours, 9 hours, 12 hours,
1 day, 2 days, 3 days, 4 days, 5 days, 6 days, 1 week
Ping Timeout Set the time until timeout occurs when [Ping] is executed in "System/Network".
Value: 1 to 30 seconds (in 1 second increments)
8-79
Setup and Registration (System Menu) > System Menu
Adjustment/Maintenance
[System Menu/Counter] key > [Adjustment/Maintenance]
Adjust printing quality and conduct machine maintenance.
Item Description
Send/Box Adjust scan density when sending or storing the data in Document Box. Adjustment
can be made in 7 levels.
Value: -3 (Lighter), -2, -1, 0 (Normal), +1, +2, +3 (Darker)
Copy (Auto) Darkens or lightens overall background density adjustment during copying.
Adjustment can be made in 7 levels.
Value: -3 (Lighter), -2, -1, 0 (Normal), +1, +2, +3 (Darker)
Send/Box (Auto) Darkens or lightens overall background density when sending images or storing them
in the Document Box. Adjustment can be made in 7 levels.
Value: -3 (Lighter), -2, -1, 0 (Normal), +1, +2, +3 (Darker)
Copy All Sharpen or blur overall image outlines during copying. Adjustment can be made in 7
levels.
Value: -3 (Blur), -2, -1, 0, +1, +2, +3 (Sharpen)
Text/Fine Sharpen text/fine line during copying. Adjustment can be made in 4 levels.
Line Value: 0 (Normal), 1, 2, 3 (Sharpen)
Send/Box All Sharpen or blur overall image outlines when sending or storing them in the Document
Box. Adjustment can be made in 7 levels.
Value: -3 (Blur), -2, -1, 0, +1, +2, +3 (Sharpen)
Text/Fine Adjust sharpness of the text/fine line when during sending or storing them in the
Line Document Box. Adjustment can be made in 4 levels.
Value: 0 (Normal), 1, 2, 3 (Sharpen)
NOTE
This setting does not appear in some regions.
Drum Refresh Remove image blur and white dots from the printout. It takes about 1 minute. The
time required may vary depending on the operating environment.
Drum Refresh (page 10-56)
NOTE
Drum Refresh cannot be performed while printing. Execute Drum Refresh after the
printing is done.
8-80
Setup and Registration (System Menu) > System Menu
Item Description
Correcting Black Lines Correct fine lines (streaks caused by contamination), which may appear on the
image, when the document processor is used.
Value
Off: No correction performed.
On (Low): Correction performed. The reproduction of fine lines on the original
may become lighter than when using [Off].
On (High): Select this item if a streak remains after using [On (Low)]. The
reproduction of fine lines on the original may become lighter than when using
[On (Low)].
System Initialization Initialize the hard disk installed on the machine to return it to the factory defaults.
NOTE
This function will not be displayed when the Data Security Function is active.
Silent Mode Set the Silent Mode. Select this mode when the running noise is uncomfortable.
Value: Off, On
NOTE
When [On] is selected, it may take time for the next print job to start.
Auto Color Correction This setting allows you to adjust the detection level used by the machine to determine
whether the original is color or black and white in Auto Color Selection Mode. Setting
a lower value will result in more originals being identified as color, while a larger value
will tend to increase the number of originals being identified as black and white.
Value: 1 (Color), 2, 3, 4, 5 (B & W)
NOTE
When [Custom] is displayed as setting item, the setting cannot be changed.
Tone Curve Adjustment After prolonged use, or from the effects of surrounding temperature or humidity, the
printed output tone may differ from the original. Perform this function to ensure
consistency with the original tone.
Tone Curve Adjustment (page 10-54)
Calibration Calibrate the device to ensure consistency with the original tone.
Calibration (page 10-56)
NOTE
Perform Tone Curve Adjustment when consistency with the original tone is not
ensured.
8-81
Setup and Registration (System Menu) > System Menu
Item Description
Developer Refresh Adjust the printed image that is too light or incomplete, even though there is enough
toner.
Developer Refresh (page 10-57)
NOTE
Waiting time may be longer when the toner is refilled during developer refresh.
Laser Scanner Cleaning Remove vertical white lines from the printout.
Laser Scanner Cleaning (page 10-56)
Send/Box Increases or decreases the overall contrast when documents are sent or saved in a
document box.
Value: -3 (Lower), -2, -1, 0 (Normal), +1, +2, +3 (Higher)
Auto Drum Refresh Select the time length of the drum refresh.
Value
Off: The Auto Drum Refresh will not be performed.
Short: Perform Auto Drum Refresh as Short.
Standard: Perform Auto Drum Refresh as Standard.
Long: Perform Auto Drum Refresh as Long.
NOTE
This function is displayed when using a genuine toner container.
8-82
Setup and Registration (System Menu) > System Menu
Internet
[System Menu/Counter] key > [Internet]
Configure settings related to the internet.
Item Description
Browser Environment This specifies Internet browser preferences such as your home page setting and how
pages are displayed.
Value:
Home page: (Enter the address for Home page.)
Text Size: Large, Medium, Small
Display Mode: Normal, Just-Fit Rendering, Smart-Fit Rendering
Cookie: Accept All, Reject All, Prompt before Accepting
NOTE
This function is not displayed when [Internet Browser] is set to [Off].
NOTE
To use proxy from Internet Browser, refer to the following:
Proxy (page 8-63)
Application
[System Menu/Counter] key > [Application]
Configure settings for Application.
Application (page 5-13)
8-83
9 User Authentication
and Accounting
(User Login,
Job Accounting)
This chapter explains the following topics:
Overview of User Login Administration ......... 9-2 Job Accounting (Local) ............................... 9-36
Managing the Job Account from PC ... 9-2 Adding an Account ............................ 9-36
Managing the Users to Use TWAIN Restricting the Use of the Machine ... 9-37
for Scanning ........................................ 9-2 Editing an Account ............................ 9-38
Managing the Users to Use WIA for Deleting an Account .......................... 9-39
Scanning ............................................. 9-2 Job Accounting for Printing ............... 9-40
Managing the Users to Send Faxes Job Accounting for Scan Using
from a PC ............................................ 9-2 TWAIN .............................................. 9-41
Enabling User Login Administration .............. 9-3 Job Accounting for Scan Using WIA .... 9-42
Setting User Login Administration ................. 9-5 Job Accounting for the FAX
Authentication Security ....................... 9-5 Transmitted from a Computer ........... 9-43
Adding a User (Local User List) .......... 9-8 Configuring Job Accounting ........................ 9-44
Changing User Properties ................. 9-11 Default Setting .................................. 9-44
User Login Administration for Printing ... 9-14 Counting the Number of Pages
Managing the Users to Scan Using Printed .............................................. 9-46
TWAIN .............................................. 9-15 Print Accounting Report .................... 9-48
Managing the Users to Scan Using Using Job Accounting ................................. 9-49
WIA ................................................... 9-16 Login/Logout ..................................... 9-49
Managing the Users that Send Faxes Apply Limit .................................................. 9-50
from a PC .......................................... 9-17 Copy/Printer Count ..................................... 9-51
Local Authorization ........................... 9-18 Unknown ID Job .......................................... 9-52
Group Authorization Settings ............ 9-19 Unknown ID Job ............................... 9-52
Guest Authorization Set. ................... 9-22 Registering Information for a User
Obtain NW User Property ................. 9-25 whose ID is Unknown ....................... 9-53
Simple Login Settings ....................... 9-27
ID Card Settings ............................... 9-30
PIN Code Authorization .................... 9-31
Using User Login Administration ................. 9-32
Login/Logout ..................................... 9-32
Overview of Job Accounting ....................... 9-33
To Manage the Number of Sheets
Used on Jobs Printed from a PC ...... 9-33
Managing the Scan Job Account by
Using TWAIN .................................... 9-33
Managing the Scan Job Account by
Using WIA ......................................... 9-33
Managing the FAX Job Transmitted
from a PC .......................................... 9-33
Enabling Job Accounting ............................ 9-34
Job Accounting Access ..................... 9-35
9-1
User Authentication and Accounting (User Login, Job Accounting) > Overview of User Login Administration
1 Enable User Login 2 Set the user 3 Enter the login user name and password
Administration (page 9-3) (page 9-8) and execute the job (page 9-32)
UserA
Access are in three levels - "User", "Administrator", and "Machine Administrator". The security levels can be modified
only by the "Machine Administrator".
User A
User B
User C
9-2
User Authentication and Accounting (User Login, Job Accounting) > Enabling User Login Administration
Item Descriptions
Local Authentication User authentication based on user properties on the local user list
stored in the machine.
NOTE
If the login user name entry screen appears during operations, enter a login user name
and password, and select [Login]. For this, you need to login as an administrator or as a
user with privileges to carry out this setting.
The factory default login user name and login password are set as shown below.
NOTE
• If two or more domains are registered, select [Default Domain] and select the default
domain.
• Once this setting is done, network authentication will be done in the order of a primary
server and a secondary server registered in the specified domain at the time of log-in.
• The network authentication will be done to the server set as [Default Host Name]
before the primary server set for each domain.
9-3
User Authentication and Accounting (User Login, Job Accounting) > Enabling User Login Administration
2 Select [OK].
"Do you want to add a new function to the home screen?" appears when [OK] is selected.
To add a new function, select [Yes]. The selection screen for functions displayed in the
home screen will appear.
Available Functions to Display on Desktop (page 2-14)
NOTE
If the login user name and password are rejected, check the following settings.
• Network Authentication setting of the machine
• User property of the Authentication Server
• Date and time setting of the machine and the Authentication Server
If you cannot login because of the setting of the machine, login with any administrator
registered in the local user list and correct the settings.
9-4
User Authentication and Accounting (User Login, Job Accounting) > Setting User Login Administration
Authentication Security
If user authentication is enabled, configure the user authentication settings.
NOTE
If the login user name entry screen appears during operations, enter a login user name
and password, and select [Login]. For this, you need to login as an administrator or as a
user with privileges to carry out this setting.
The factory default login user name and login password are set as shown below.
2 "User Login Setting" [Next] > "Authentication Security" [Next] > "User Account Lockout
Set" [Next]
9-5
User Authentication and Accounting (User Login, Job Accounting) > Setting User Login Administration
Item Descriptions
Lockout Policy Specify the conditions and the extent to which the account lockout
is applied.
Value
Number of Retries until Locked:
Specify how many login retries are
allowed until the account is locked out.
(1 to 10 times)
Lockout Duration: Specify how long the account is to be
locked out until it is unlocked.
(1 to 60 minutes)
Lockout Target: Specify the extent to which the account
lockout is applied. You can select from
[All] or [Remote Login Only]. Remote
Login Only locks out all operations from
outside the operation panel.
Locked out Users Displays a list of locked out users. You can unlock a user by
List selecting the user in the list, and selecting [Unlock].
NOTE
This function is displayed when account lockout policy is enabled.
9-6
User Authentication and Accounting (User Login, Job Accounting) > Setting User Login Administration
NOTE
If the login user name entry screen appears during operations, enter a login user name
and password, and select [Login]. For this, you need to login as an administrator or as a
user with privileges to carry out this setting.
The factory default login user name and login password are set as shown below.
2 "User Login Setting" [Next] > "Authentication Security" [Next] > "Password Policy Settings"
[Next]
Item Descriptions
Minimum password Set the minimum password length of characters for password.
length Value: Off, On (1 to 64 characters)
Policy Violated User List of users do not meet password policy requirements.
List
9-7
User Authentication and Accounting (User Login, Job Accounting) > Setting User Login Administration
NOTE
By default, one of each default user with machine administrator rights and administrator privileges is already stored.
Each user's properties are:
Machine Administrator
User Name: DeviceAdmin
Login User Name: d-COPIA 5001MF 5000, d-COPIA 6001MF: 6000
Login Password: d-COPIA 5001MF: 5000, d-COPIA 6001MF: 6000
Access Level: Machine Administrator
Administrator
User Name: Admin
Login User Name: Admin
Login Password: Admin
Access Level: Administrator
* Upper case and lower case letters are distinguished (case sensitive).
It is recommended to periodically change the user name, login user name and login password regularly for your
security.
NOTE
If the login user name entry screen appears during operations, enter a login user name
and password, and select [Login]. For this, you need to login as an administrator or as a
user with privileges to carry out this setting.
The factory default login user name and login password are set as shown below.
Item Descriptions
User Name Enter the name displayed on the user list (up to 32 characters).
Login User Name Enter the login user name to login (up to 64 characters). The
same login user name cannot be registered.
Login Password Enter the password to login (up to 64 characters). Reenter the
same password for confirmation and select the [OK] key.
9-8
User Authentication and Accounting (User Login, Job Accounting) > Setting User Login Administration
Item Descriptions
System Admin If the user privileges set in the [Access Level] are [User], select
Permission the privileges that can be set from the following.
• Original/Paper Settings
• Address Book
• User/Account Information
• Basic Network Settings
• Basic Device Settings
• Advanced Device/Network Settings
Account Name Add an account where the user belongs. The user, who registered
his/her account name, can login without entering the account ID.
Overview of Job Accounting (page 9-33)
NOTE
• Select [Name] or [ID] from the "Sort" to sort the account list.
• Select [Search (Name)] or [Search (ID)] to search by account
name or account ID.
E-mail Address The user can register his/her E-mail address. The registered
address will be automatically selected for subsequent operations
that need any E-mail function.
NOTE
This function is displayed when the optional ID Card
Authentication Kit is activated.
Applications (page 11-8)
9-9
User Authentication and Accounting (User Login, Job Accounting) > Setting User Login Administration
Item Descriptions
Print Select whether or not use of the print function of the printer is
Restriction prohibited.
Applicable print functions are as follows:
• Print from Box
• Print from USB Drive
• Print Report
• Print from PC
Copy Select whether or not use of the copy print function is prohibited.
Restriction
FAX TX Select whether or not use of the fax send function is prohibited.
Restriction*2
Storing Restr. Select whether or not use of the box store function is prohibited.
in Box
Storing Restr. Select whether or not use of the USB drive store function is
in USB Drive prohibited.
My Panel You can register the language selection, initial screen, and
shortcut settings for each user. Settings registered here can be
applied simply by logging in.
NOTE
For details on entering characters, refer to the following:
Character Entry Method (page 11-10)
If you selected [Send] in the Default Screen for "My Panel", select the screen to display from
[Destination], [Machine Address Book], or a registered external address book.
3 Select [Save].
A new user is added on the local user list.
NOTE
If simple login is enabled, a confirmation screen appears when new registration is finished
asking if you will configure simple login settings. To configure simple login settings, select
[Yes]. If you select [No], you will return to the user list screen.
For the procedure for configuring simple login settings, refer to the following:
Simple Login Settings (page 9-27)
9-10
User Authentication and Accounting (User Login, Job Accounting) > Setting User Login Administration
NOTE
To change the user information of the machine administrator, you must log in with machine administrator authority.
You can only view user information if you log in as a regular user.
The factory default login user name and login password are set as shown below.
NOTE
If the login user name entry screen appears during operations, enter a login user name
and password, and select [Login]. For this, you need to login as an administrator or as a
user with privileges to carry out this setting.
The factory default login user name and login password are set as shown below.
1 Select the user whose properties you wish to change > [Detail]
NOTE
Select [Name] or [ID] from the "Sort" to sort the user list.
Select [Search (Name)] or [Search (ID)] to search by name or login user name.
2 Refer to step 3 of "Adding a User (Local User List)" to change a user property.
Adding a User (Local User List) (page 9-8)
9-11
User Authentication and Accounting (User Login, Job Accounting) > Setting User Login Administration
Deleting a user
NOTE
The default user with machine administrator rights cannot be deleted.
Item Description
User Name Changes the name shown on the user list. Up to 32 characters
can be entered.
Login User Name Displays the login user name that is entered at login.
E-mail Address Changes the user's e-mail address. Up to 256 characters can
be entered.
NOTE
This function appears when Local Authorization is set to [On],
Group Authorization is set to [On], and Guest Authorization
Setting is set to [On].
9-12
User Authentication and Accounting (User Login, Job Accounting) > Setting User Login Administration
Item Description
Authorization Rules Displays the usage restriction that is set for the logged in user.
NOTE
This function appears when Local Authorization is set to [On],
Group Authorization is set to [On], or Guest Authorization
Setting is set to [On].
[Job Accounting Rules] shows the account name set for the
logged in user and the usage restrictions that are set for that
account.
This function appears when job accounting is set to [On]. For
information on job accounting, refer to the following:
Job Accounting Access (page 9-35)
NOTE
This function does not appear when Simple Login is set to [Off]
or the user is not registered in Simple Login.
NOTE
This function is displayed when the optional ID Card
Authentication Kit is activated.
Applications (page 11-8)
This function does not appear when the server type is set to
[Ext.] in Network Authentication, and logged in with the user
account certificated in the server specified as the [Ext.] server
type.
My Panel Register the language and default screen for each user. Once
registered, the setting will be applied simply by login. Network
users are not displayed.
2 Select [Save].
The user information is changed.
9-13
User Authentication and Accounting (User Login, Job Accounting) > Setting User Login Administration
NOTE
In Windows 7, click [Start] button on the Windows, and then click [Devices and
Printers].
2 Right-click the Printing System Driver icon of the machine, and click the [Printer properties] menu of
the Printing System Driver.
9-14
User Authentication and Accounting (User Login, Job Accounting) > Setting User Login Administration
3 Click [OK].
NOTE
For other settings of job accounting, refer to the following:
Printing System Driver User Guide
NOTE
In Windows 7, select [Start] button on the Windows, [All Programs], [Olivetti] and then
[TWAIN Driver Setting].
2 Select the checkbox beside [Authentication], and enter Login User Name and Password.
3 Click [OK].
9-15
User Authentication and Accounting (User Login, Job Accounting) > Setting User Login Administration
NOTE
In Windows 7, click [Start] button on the Windows and enter [Scanner] in [Program and
File Search]. Click [View scanners and cameras] in the search list then the Scanners
and Cameras screen appears.
2 Select the same name as this machine from WIA Drivers, and press [Properties].
1
2
1 2
2 Click [OK].
9-16
User Authentication and Accounting (User Login, Job Accounting) > Setting User Login Administration
NOTE
In Windows 7, click [Start] button on the Windows, and then click [Devices and
Printers].
2 Right-click the Printing System Driver icon of the machine, and click the [Printer properties] menu of
the Printing System Driver.
3 Click [OK].
9-17
User Authentication and Accounting (User Login, Job Accounting) > Setting User Login Administration
Local Authorization
Select whether or not to use Local Authorization.
NOTE
When using Local Authorization, the user authentication type must be set to [Local Authentication].
Enabling User Login Administration (page 9-3)
NOTE
If the login user name entry screen appears during operations, enter a login user name
and password, and select [Login]. For this, you need to login as an administrator or as a
user with privileges to carry out this setting.
The factory default login user name and login password are set as shown below.
9-18
User Authentication and Accounting (User Login, Job Accounting) > Setting User Login Administration
NOTE
To use the group authorization settings, [Network Authentication] must be selected for the authentication method in
"Enabling User Login Administration". Select "On" for "LDAP" in "Protocol Detail".
Enabling User Login Administration (page 9-3)
Protocol Settings (page 8-58)
Group Authorization
NOTE
If the login user name entry screen appears during operations, enter a login user name
and password, and select [Login]. For this, you need to login as an administrator or as a
user with privileges to carry out this setting.
The factory default login user name and login password are set as shown below.
2 "User Login Setting" [Next] > "Group Authorization Set." [Next] >
"Group Authorization" [Change]
9-19
User Authentication and Accounting (User Login, Job Accounting) > Setting User Login Administration
NOTE
If the login user name entry screen appears during operations, enter a login user name
and password, and select [Login]. For this, you need to login as an administrator or as a
user with privileges to carry out this setting.
The factory default login user name and login password are set as shown below.
2 "User Login Setting" [Next] > "Group Authorization Set." [Next] > "Group List" [Change]
Item Descriptions
Group ID*1 Enter the ID displayed on the group list (between 1 and
4294967295).
Group Name Enter the name displayed on the group list (up to 32 characters).
Print Restriction Select whether or not to reject usage of print functions for the
printer.
Applicable print functions are as follows:
• Print from Box
• Print from USB Drive
• Print Report
Print from PC
Send Restriction Select whether or not to reject usage of the send functions.
FAX Transmission*2 Select whether or not to reject usage of the FAX transmissions.
Storing Restr. in Box Select whether or not to reject usage of storing in the document
boxes.
Storing Restr. in USB Select whether or not to reject usage of storing in the USB drive.
Drive
9-20
User Authentication and Accounting (User Login, Job Accounting) > Setting User Login Administration
*1 For "Group ID", specify PrimaryGroupID assigned by Active Directory of Windows. If you
are using Windows Server 2008, check Attribute Editor tab of user properties. If you are
using Windows Server 2000/2003, check ADSIEdit. ADSIEdit is a support tool included on
the installation DVD for Windows Server OS (under \SUPPORT\TOOLS).
*2 Displayed only when the optional FAX Kit is installed.
NOTE
For details on entering characters, refer to the following:
Character Entry Method (page 11-10)
9-21
User Authentication and Accounting (User Login, Job Accounting) > Setting User Login Administration
NOTE
• To use Guest Authorization Set., User Login Administration must be enabled in "Enabling User Login
Administration".
Enabling User Login Administration (page 9-3)
• Cannot be used when the Key Counter option is used.
NOTE
If the login user name entry screen appears during operations, enter a login user name
and password, and select [Login]. For this, you need to login as an administrator or as a
user with privileges to carry out this setting.
The factory default login user name and login password are set as shown below.
2 "User Login Setting" [Next] > "Guest Authorization Set." [Next] >
"Guest Authorization" [Change]
NOTE
If the guest authorization setting is enabled, the [Authentication/Logout] key must be
selected when logging in.
In the guest user default settings, only monochrome copying can be used. If you wish to use
a different function, log in as a user who can use that function, or change the settings in the
guest properties.
9-22
User Authentication and Accounting (User Login, Job Accounting) > Setting User Login Administration
NOTE
If the login user name entry screen appears during operations, enter a login user name
and password, and select [Login]. For this, you need to login as an administrator or as a
user with privileges to carry out this setting.
The factory default login user name and login password are set as shown below.
2 "User Login Setting" [Next] > "Guest Authorization Set." [Next] > "Guest Property" [Next]
Item Descriptions
User Name Enter the name displayed on the user list (up to 32 characters).
The default setting is "Guest User".
Access Level The authority of the user appears. This cannot be changed.
9-23
User Authentication and Accounting (User Login, Job Accounting) > Setting User Login Administration
Item Descriptions
9-24
User Authentication and Accounting (User Login, Job Accounting) > Setting User Login Administration
NOTE
To obtain the network user property from the LDAP server, [Network Authentication] must be selected for the
authentication method in "Enabling User Login Administration". Select "On" for "LDAP" in "Protocol Detail".
Enabling User Login Administration (page 9-3)
Protocol Settings (page 8-58)
NOTE
If the login user name entry screen appears during operations, enter a login user name
and password, and select [Login]. For this, you need to login as an administrator or as a
user with privileges to carry out this setting.
The factory default login user name and login password are set as shown below.
Item Descriptions
Server Name*1 Enter the LDAP server name or the IP address (up to 256
characters). If a server name is not entered, user information will
be acquired from the server set for Network Authentication.
Port Port number for LDAP server. The default port number is 389.
Name 1*2 Enter the LDAP Attribute to obtain the user name to be displayed
from the LDAP server (up to 32 characters).
Name 2*3 Enter the LDAP Attribute to obtain the user name to be displayed
from the LDAP server (up to 32 characters).
E-mail Address*4 Enter the LDAP Attribute to obtain the E-mail address from the
LDAP server (up to 256 characters).
Authentic at Type*5 Set the authentication method. Select [Simple] or [SASL]. After
changing the setting, restart the system or turn the power off and
then on.
9-25
User Authentication and Accounting (User Login, Job Accounting) > Setting User Login Administration
Item Descriptions
Search Timeout Set the amount of time to wait before time-out in seconds (from 5
to 255 seconds).
LDAP Security Select the type of encryption according to the type of security
employed by the LDAP server. The value is [Off], [SSL/TLS] or
[STARTTLS].
*1 If using Active Directory of Windows, the server name may be the same as the server
name entered in the network authentication.
*2 If using Active Directory of Windows, displayName of Attribute may be used as "Name 1".
*3 "Name 2" can be left out. When you assign displayName in "Name 1" and department in
"Name 2", and if the value of displayName is "Mike Smith" and the value of department is
"Sales" in Active Directory of Windows, the user name appears as "Mike Smith Sales".
*4 If using Active Directory of Windows, mail of Attribute may be used as E-mail Address.
*5 Appears when the server type is set to "Kerberos" in "Network Authentication".
9-26
User Authentication and Accounting (User Login, Job Accounting) > Setting User Login Administration
NOTE
• For user registration, refer to the following:
Adding a User (Local User List) (page 9-8)
• To use Simple Login, User Login Administration must be enabled in "Enabling User Login Administration".
Enabling User Login Administration (page 9-3)
• When the guest authorization setting is enabled, the Simple Login screen is not displayed.
NOTE
If the login user name entry screen appears during operations, enter a login user name
and password, and select [Login]. For this, you need to login as an administrator or as a
user with privileges to carry out this setting.
The factory default login user name and login password are set as shown below.
2 "User Login Setting" [Next] > "Simple Login Settings" [Next] > "Simple Login" [Change]
9-27
User Authentication and Accounting (User Login, Job Accounting) > Setting User Login Administration
NOTE
If the login user name entry screen appears during operations, enter a login user name
and password, and select [Login]. For this, you need to login as an administrator or as a
user with privileges to carry out this setting.
The factory default login user name and login password are set as shown below.
2 "User Login Setting" [Next] > "Simple Login Settings" [Next] > "Simple Login Key" [Next]
2 Select [Add/Edit].
3 "Display Name" [Change] > Enter the user name to be displayed > [OK]
NOTE
For details on entering characters, refer to the following:
Character Entry Method (page 11-10)
5 To specify the user from local users, select [Local User]. To specify from network users,
select [Network User].
The procedure differs depending on the transmission method selected.
NOTE
• Select [Name] or [ID] from the "Sort" to sort the account list.
• Select [Search (Name)] or [Search (ID)] to search by account name or account ID.
9-28
User Authentication and Accounting (User Login, Job Accounting) > Setting User Login Administration
Domain:
User Name domain 1
Login
User Name 0099
# Keys
Login
Password **********
# Keys
Cancel Back OK
Status m0310502
Select [Login User Name] and [Login Password], enter the information of the user to be
registered, and select [OK].
If you are specifying a user for whom a domain is set in network authentication, select the
"Domain" and select the domain where the user is registered.
NOTE
For details on entering characters, refer to the following:
Character Entry Method (page 11-10)
6 "Password" [Change] > [On] or [Off] > [OK] > "Icon" [Change]
9-29
User Authentication and Accounting (User Login, Job Accounting) > Setting User Login Administration
ID Card Settings
If ID card authentication is enabled, select the authentication type.
NOTE
This functions appears when the Card Authentication kit is activated.
Applications (page 11-8)
This function does not appear when the user logs in as a network authentication user.
NOTE
If the login user name entry screen appears during operations, enter a login user name
and password, and select [Login]. For this, you need to login as an administrator or as a
user with privileges to carry out this setting.
The factory default login user name and login password are set as shown below.
Item Descriptions
*1 This function does not appear when the server type is set to [NTLM] or [Kerberos] in
"Network Authentication".
9-30
User Authentication and Accounting (User Login, Job Accounting) > Setting User Login Administration
NOTE
When using PIN Code Authorization, the network authentication must be enabled and [Ext.] must be selected for
server type.
Enabling User Login Administration (page 9-3)
NOTE
If the login user name entry screen appears during operations, enter a login user name
and password, and select [Login]. For this, you need to login as an administrator or as a
user with privileges to carry out this setting.
The factory default login user name and login password are set as shown below.
9-31
User Authentication and Accounting (User Login, Job Accounting) > Using User Login Administration
Login/Logout
If user login administration is enabled, the login user name and login password entry screen appears each time you use
this machine.
Login
If the login user name entry screen appears during operations, log in by referring to the following:
Login (page 2-27)
Logout
When the operations are complete, select the [Authentication/Logout] key to return to the login user name and login
password entry screen.
9-32
User Authentication and Accounting (User Login, Job Accounting) > Overview of Job Accounting
A: 00000001
9-33
User Authentication and Accounting (User Login, Job Accounting) > Enabling Job Accounting
NOTE
If the login user name entry screen appears during operations, enter a login user name
and password, and select [Login]. For this, you need to login as an administrator or as a
user with privileges to carry out this setting.
The factory default login user name and login password are set as shown below.
NOTE
• To disable job accounting, select [Off].
• When the display returns to System Menu default screen, logout is automatically executed
and the screen to enter the Account ID appears. To continue the operation, enter the
Account ID.
9-34
User Authentication and Accounting (User Login, Job Accounting) > Enabling Job Accounting
NOTE
If the login user name entry screen appears during operations, enter a login user name
and password, and select [Login]. For this, you need to login as an administrator or as a
user with privileges to carry out this setting.
The factory default login user name and login password are set as shown below.
NOTE
To select [Network], network authentication must be enabled and [Ext.] must be selected
for server type.
Enabling User Login Administration (page 9-3)
9-35
User Authentication and Accounting (User Login, Job Accounting) > Job Accounting (Local)
Adding an Account
Up to 1000 individual accounts can be added. The following entries are required.
Item Descriptions
Account ID Enter the account ID as many as eight digits (between 0 and 99999999).
NOTE
If the login user name entry screen appears during operations, enter a login user name
and password, and select [Login]. For this, you need to login as an administrator or as a
user with privileges to carry out this setting.
The factory default login user name and login password are set as shown below.
2 "Job Accounting Settings" [Next] > "Job Accounting (Local)" [Next] > "Accounting List"
[Add/Edit] > [Add]
NOTE
For details on entering characters, refer to the following:
Character Entry Method (page 11-10)
NOTE
Any "Account ID" that has already registered cannot be used. Enter any other account ID.
4 Select [Save].
A new account is added on the Account List.
9-36
User Authentication and Accounting (User Login, Job Accounting) > Job Accounting (Local)
Restriction Items
"Individual" selected for Copy/Printer Count "Split" selected for Copy/Printer Count
Item Descriptions
Copy Restriction (Total) Limits the number of sheets used for copying.
Print Restriction (Total) Limits the number of sheets used for printing.
Applicable print functions are as follows:
• Print from Box
• Print from USB Drive
• Print Report
• Print from PC
Scan Restriction (Others) Limits the number of sheets scanned (excludes copying).
FAX TX Restriction Limits the number of sheets sent by fax. This is displayed when the
optional FAX Kit is installed.
FAX Port Restriction Restricts the ports used for faxing. This is displayed when two optional FAX
Kits are installed.
Item Descriptions
Print Restriction (Total) Limits the total number of sheets used for copying and printing.
Scan Restriction (Others) Limits the number of sheets scanned (excludes copying).
FAX TX Restriction Limits the number of sheets sent by fax. This is displayed only on products
with the fax function installed.
FAX Port Restriction Restricts the ports used for faxing. This is displayed when two optional FAX
Kits are installed.
IMPORTANT
Select [Off], [Use Port 1 Only] or [Use Port 2 Only] as the "FAX Port Restriction" setting.
Applying Restriction
Restriction can be applied in the following modes:
Item Descriptions
Counter Limit Restricts the print counter in one-page increments up to 9,999,999 copies.
9-37
User Authentication and Accounting (User Login, Job Accounting) > Job Accounting (Local)
Editing an Account
NOTE
If the login user name entry screen appears during operations, enter a login user name
and password, and select [Login]. For this, you need to login as an administrator or as a
user with privileges to carry out this setting.
The factory default login user name and login password are set as shown below.
2 "Job Accounting Settings" [Next] > "Job Accounting (Local)" [Next] > "Accounting List"
[Add/Edit]
2 Edit an account.
1 Select [Detail] for the account name you wish to edit.
NOTE
• Select [Name] or [ID] from the "Sort" to sort the account list.
• Select [Search (Name)] or [Search (ID)] to search by account name or account ID.
2 Select the account information to be changed and change the account information.
9-38
User Authentication and Accounting (User Login, Job Accounting) > Job Accounting (Local)
Deleting an Account
NOTE
If the login user name entry screen appears during operations, enter a login user name
and password, and select [Login]. For this, you need to login as an administrator or as a
user with privileges to carry out this setting.
The factory default login user name and login password are set as shown below.
2 "Job Accounting Settings" [Next] > "Job Accounting (Local)" [Next] >
"Accounting List" [Add/Edit]
2 Delete an account.
1 Select the account name you wish to delete.
9-39
User Authentication and Accounting (User Login, Job Accounting) > Job Accounting (Local)
NOTE
In Windows 7, click [Start] button on the Windows, and then click [Devices and
Printers].
2 Right-click the Printing System Driver icon of the machine, and click the [Printer properties] menu of
the Printing System Driver.
9-40
User Authentication and Accounting (User Login, Job Accounting) > Job Accounting (Local)
3 Click [OK].
NOTE
For other settings of job accounting, refer to the following:
Printing System Driver User Guide
NOTE
In Windows 7, select [Start] button on the Windows, [All Programs], [Olivetti] and then
[TWAIN Driver Setting].
2 Select the checkbox beside [Account], and enter the account ID.
3 Click [OK].
9-41
User Authentication and Accounting (User Login, Job Accounting) > Job Accounting (Local)
NOTE
In Windows 7, click [Start] button on the Windows and enter [Scanner] in [Program and
File Search]. Click [View scanners and cameras] in the search list then the Scanners
and Cameras screen appears.
2 Select the same name as this machine from WIA Drivers, and press [Properties].
1
2
2 Click [OK].
9-42
User Authentication and Accounting (User Login, Job Accounting) > Job Accounting (Local)
NOTE
FAX functions are available only on products with the fax function installed.
NOTE
In Windows 7, click [Start] button on the Windows, and then click [Devices and
Printers].
2 Right click the name of the machine to be used as the FAX Driver and select
[Printing preferences] from the resulting pull-down menu.
3 Click [OK].
9-43
User Authentication and Accounting (User Login, Job Accounting) > Configuring Job Accounting
NOTE
If the login user name entry screen appears during operations, enter a login user name
and password, and select [Login]. For this, you need to login as an administrator or as a
user with privileges to carry out this setting.
The factory default login user name and login password are set as shown below.
2 "Job Accounting Settings" [Next] > "Job Accounting (Local)" [Next] > "Default Setting"
[Next] > "Default Counter Limit" [Next]
2 Select [OK].
Item Description
Counter Limit When you add a new account, you can change the default
restrictions on the number of sheets used. You can set any
number from 1 to 9,999,999.
The items that can be set differ depending on whether
[Individual] or [Total] is selected for [Copy/Print Count].
Copy/Printer Count (page 9-51)
Copy Restriction Sets the default restriction on the number of sheets used for
(Total) copying.
Print Restriction Sets the default restriction on the number of sheets used for
(Total) printing.
Applicable print functions are as follows:
• Print from Box
• Print from USB Drive
• Print Report
• Print from PC
Scan Restriction Sets the default restriction on the number of sheets used for
(Others) scanning (excludes copying).
9-44
User Authentication and Accounting (User Login, Job Accounting) > Configuring Job Accounting
Item Description
FAX TX Restriction*1 Sets the default restriction on the number of sheets used for
sending faxes.
Print Restriction Sets the default restriction on the total number of sheets
(Total) used for copying and printing.
Scan Restriction Sets the default restriction on the number of sheets used for
(Others) scanning (excludes copying).
FAX TX Restriction*1 Sets the default restriction on the number of sheets used for
sending faxes.
NOTE
Paper size is available in five types, 1 to 5. These types are specified in accounting reports.
Print Accounting Report (page 9-48)
In addition to paper size, media type can also be specified (e.g. count the letter-size color paper used). If you do not
specify the media type, the number of used sheets will be counted for the specified sheet size, regardless of the media
type.
NOTE
If the login user name entry screen appears during operations, enter a login user name
and password, and select [Login]. For this, you need to login as an administrator or as a
user with privileges to carry out this setting.
The factory default login user name and login password are set as shown below.
2 "Job Accounting (Local)" [Next] > "Default Setting" [Next] > "Count by Paper Size" [Next] >
"Paper Size 1 (to 5)" [Change]
9-45
User Authentication and Accounting (User Login, Job Accounting) > Configuring Job Accounting
5 Select [OK].
NOTE
If the login user name entry screen appears during operations, enter a login user name
and password, and select [Login]. For this, you need to login as an administrator or as a
user with privileges to carry out this setting.
The factory default login user name and login password are set as shown below.
2 "Job Accounting (Local)" [Next] > "Total Job Accounting" [Next] or "Each Job Accounting"
[Check]
Item Descriptions
Printed Pages Displays the number of pages copied and printed, and the total
number of pages used. You can also use [FAX]*1, [Count by
Paper Size], and [Count by Duplex/Combine ] to check the
number of pages used.
Copy (B & W) Displays the number of pages used for black and white
copying.
Printer (B & W) Displays the number of pages used for black and white
printing.
Applicable print functions are as follows:
• Print from Box
• Print from USB Drive
• Print Report
• Print from PC
Copy/Printer (B & W) Displays the total number of pages used for black and white
copying and printing.
Count by Paper Size Displays the number of pages used in the selected paper size
as well as the number of pages used in other paper sizes.
9-46
User Authentication and Accounting (User Login, Job Accounting) > Configuring Job Accounting
Item Descriptions
Count by Duplex/ Displays the number of pages used in Duplex (1-sided) mode,
Combine Duplex (2-sided) mode and the total for both, as well as the
pages used in Combine (None) mode, Combine (2in1) mode,
Combine (4in1) mode and the total for all three.
Scanned Pages Displays the number of pages scanned for copying, faxing and
other functions, as well as the total number of pages scanned.
Total Accounting
This counts the number of pages for all accounts and resets the counts for those accounts together at the same time.
2 Select [Detail].
NOTE
• Select [Name] or [ID] from the "Sort" to sort the account names.
• Select [Search (Name)] or [Search (ID)] to search by account name or account ID. To
display an account other than your own account, select [Other Account].
9-47
User Authentication and Accounting (User Login, Job Accounting) > Configuring Job Accounting
ACCOUNT. REPORT
1 Prepare paper.
Check that A4 or Letter paper is loaded in the cassette.
NOTE
If the login user name entry screen appears during operations, enter a login user name and
password, and select [Login]. For this, you need to login as an administrator or as a user
with privileges to carry out this setting.
The factory default login user name and login password are set as shown below.
9-48
User Authentication and Accounting (User Login, Job Accounting) > Using Job Accounting
Login/Logout
If job accounting is enabled, an account ID entry screen appears each time you use this machine.
Login
1 In the account ID entry screen, enter the account ID using the numeric keys and select
[Login].
NOTE
• If you entered a wrong character, select the [Clear] key and enter the account ID
again.
• If the entered account ID does not match the registered ID, a warning beep will sound
and login will fail. Enter the correct account ID.
• By selecting [Check Counter], you can refer to the number of pages printed and the
number of pages scanned.
When the screen to enter the login user name and password appears
If user login administration is enabled, the screen to enter the login user name and password
appears. Enter a login user name and password to login. If the user has already registered the
account information, the account ID entry would be skipped.
Adding a User (Local User List) (page 9-8)
Logout
When the operations are complete, select the [Authentication/Logout] key to return to the account ID entry screen.
9-49
User Authentication and Accounting (User Login, Job Accounting) > Apply Limit
Apply Limit
This specifies how the machine behaves when the counter has reached the limit of restriction. The table below
describes the action taken.
Item Descriptions
Subsequently Printing/scanning of the job continues but the subsequent job will
be rejected.
NOTE
If the login user name entry screen appears during operations, enter a login user name
and password, and select [Login]. For this, you need to login as an administrator or as a
user with privileges to carry out this setting.
The factory default login user name and login password are set as shown below.
9-50
User Authentication and Accounting (User Login, Job Accounting) > Copy/Printer Count
Copy/Printer Count
You can select how the copying and printing page counts are shown - either the total of both or each of copying and
printing individually. The selection may influence restriction on the count and count method. For details, refer to the
following:
Restricting the Use of the Machine (page 9-37)
Counting the Number of Pages Printed (page 9-46)
Print Accounting Report (page 9-48)
NOTE
If the login user name entry screen appears during operations, enter a login user name
and password, and select [Login]. For this, you need to login as an administrator or as a
user with privileges to carry out this setting.
The factory default login user name and login password are set as shown below.
9-51
User Authentication and Accounting (User Login, Job Accounting) > Unknown User Settings
Item Descriptions
NOTE
If the login user name entry screen appears during operations, enter a login user name
and password, and select [Login]. For this, you need to login as an administrator or as a
user with privileges to carry out this setting.
The factory default login user name and login password are set as shown below.
9-52
User Authentication and Accounting (User Login, Job Accounting) > Unknown User Settings
NOTE
This function is displayed when [Unknown ID Job] is set to [Permit].
NOTE
If the login user name entry screen appears during operations, enter a login user name
and password, and select [Login]. For this, you need to login as an administrator or as a
user with privileges to carry out this setting.
The factory default login user name and login password are set as shown below.
Item Descriptions
User Name Enter the name displayed on the user list (up to 32 characters).
9-53
10 Troubleshooting
This chapter explains the following topics:
Regular Maintenance ....................................... 10-2 Remove any jammed paper in Right
Cleaning ...................................................... 10-2 Cover 2 (500-sheet×2) .............................. 10-80
Cleaning Glass Platen ................................ 10-2 Remove any jammed paper in Right
Cleaning inside of the Document Processor 10-2 Cover 2 (1,500-sheet×2) ........................... 10-81
Cleaning Slit Glass ...................................... 10-3 Remove any jammed paper in the Bridge
Toner Container Replacement .................... 10-4 Unit ............................................................ 10-83
Replace the Waste Toner Box ..................... 10-7 Remove any jammed paper in the Mailbox 10-84
Loading Paper ............................................. 10-9 Remove any jammed paper in the Inner
Replacing Staples (Inner Finisher) ............ 10-10 Finisher ..................................................... 10-85
Replacing Staples (1,000-sheet Finisher) . 10-12 Remove any jammed paper in the
Document Processor (Reverse Automatic) 10-86
Replacing Staples (4,000-sheet Finisher) . 10-13
Remove any jammed paper in the
Replacing Staples (100-sheet Staple
Document Processor (Dual Scan) ............. 10-88
Finisher) .................................................... 10-15
Remove any jammed paper in the 1,000-
Replacing Staples (Folding Unit) ............... 10-16
sheet Finisher ........................................... 10-89
Disposing of the Staple Waste .................. 10-18
Remove any jammed paper in the 4,000-
Disposing of the Punch Waste .................. 10-20
sheet Finisher/100-sheet Staple Finisher
Troubleshooting ............................................. 10-26
(Inner) ....................................................... 10-92
Solving Malfunctions ................................. 10-26 Remove any jammed paper in the 4,000-
Machine Operation Trouble ....................... 10-26 sheet Finisher/100-sheet Staple Finisher
Printed Image Trouble ............................... 10-31 (Tray A) ..................................................... 10-93
Remote Operation ..................................... 10-34 Remove any jammed paper in the 4,000-
Responding to Messages ......................... 10-36 sheet Finisher/100-sheet Staple Finisher
Adjustment/Maintenance ................................ 10-54 (Tray B) ..................................................... 10-97
Overview of Adjustment/Maintenance ...... 10-54 Remove any jammed paper in the Folding
Tone Curve Adjustment ............................. 10-54 Unit (4,000-sheet Finisher) ..................... 10-100
Drum Refresh ............................................ 10-56 Remove any jammed paper in the Folding
Calibration ................................................. 10-56 Tray (4,000-sheet Finisher) ..................... 10-105
Laser Scanner Cleaning ........................... 10-56 Remove any jammed paper in the Folding
Developer Refresh .................................... 10-57 Unit (100-sheet Staple Finisher) .............. 10-109
Clearing Paper Jams ...................................... 10-58 Remove any jammed paper in the Folding
Jam Location Indicators ............................ 10-58 Tray (100-sheet Staple Finisher) .............. 10-115
Remove any jammed paper in Cassette 1 10-60 Clearing a Staple Jam ................................... 10-119
Remove any jammed paper in Cassette 2 10-63 Clearing a Staple Jam of the Inner
Remove any jammed paper in Cassette 3 Finisher .................................................... 10-119
and 4 (500-sheet×2) .................................. 10-66 Clearing a Staple Jam of the 1,000-sheet
Remove any jammed paper in Cassette 3 Finisher ................................................... 10-121
(1,500-sheet×2) ......................................... 10-68 Clearing a Staple Jam of the 4,000-sheet
Remove any jammed paper in Cassette 4 Finisher ................................................... 10-124
(1,500-sheet×2) ......................................... 10-70 Clearing a Staple Jam of the 100-sheet
Remove any jammed paper in Cassette 5 Staple Finisher ........................................ 10-126
(Side Feeder) ............................................ 10-73 Clearing a Staple Jam of the Folding Unit
Remove any jammed paper in the (4,000-sheet Finisher) ............................. 10-129
Multipurpose Tray ..................................... 10-75 Clearing a Staple Jam of the Folding Unit
Remove any jammed paper in Right (100-sheet Staple Finisher) ..................... 10-133
Cover 1 ..................................................... 10-76
10-1
Troubleshooting > Regular Maintenance
Regular Maintenance
Cleaning
Clean the machine regularly to ensure optimum printing quality.
CAUTION
For safety, always unplug the power cord before cleaning the machine.
IMPORTANT
Do not use thinner or other organic solvents.
IMPORTANT
Do not use thinner or other organic solvents.
10-2
Troubleshooting > Regular Maintenance
IMPORTANT
Clean the slit glass surface with the supplied cleaning cloth.
NOTE
Dirt on the slit glass or the reading guide may cause black streaks to appear in the output.
10-3
Troubleshooting > Regular Maintenance
NOTE
• For the toner container, always use a genuine toner container. Using a toner container that is not genuine may
cause image defects and product failure.
• The memory chip in the toner container of this product stores information necessary for improving customer
convenience, operation of the recycling system for used toner containers, and planning and development of new
products. The stored information does not include information that makes it possible to identify individuals, and is
only used anonymously for the above purposes.
CAUTION
Do not attempt to incinerate parts which contain toner. Dangerous sparks may cause burns.
NOTE
If you close the toner container cover before replacing the container, select [Open Toner
Container Cover].
10-4
Troubleshooting > Regular Maintenance
IMPORTANT
Do not touch the points shown below.
5~6 5~6
5~6
10-5
Troubleshooting > Regular Maintenance
IMPORTANT
Insert the toner container all the way.
CLICK!
NOTE
• If the toner container cover or front cover does not close, check that the new toner container is installed correctly.
• Return the exhausted toner container to your dealer or service representative. The collected toner container will be
recycled or disposed in accordance with the relevant regulations.
10-6
Troubleshooting > Regular Maintenance
CAUTION
Do not attempt to incinerate parts which contain toner. Dangerous sparks may cause burns.
3 Put used Waste Toner Box into the plastic waste bag.
10-7
Troubleshooting > Regular Maintenance
CLICK!
NOTE
Return the exhausted waste toner box to your dealer or service representative. The collected waste toner box will be
recycled or disposed in accordance with the relevant regulations.
10-8
Troubleshooting > Regular Maintenance
Loading Paper
When Cassette # runs out of paper, the following messages will be displayed.
"Add paper in cassette #."
"Add paper in Multipurpose tray."
Loading in Cassette 1 (page 3-4)
Loading in Cassette 2 (page 3-7)
Loading Paper in the Multipurpose Tray (page 5-6)
NOTE
If [Show Paper Setup Message] is set to [On], the confirmation screen for the paper setting will be displayed when a
new paper is set. If a paper is changed, select [Change] and then change the settings of the paper.
Cassette 1 (to 5) (page 8-7)
MP Tray Setting (page 8-8)
10-9
Troubleshooting > Regular Maintenance
NOTE
If the Staple Unit runs out of staples, contact your dealer or service representative.
10-10
Troubleshooting > Regular Maintenance
1 2
10-11
Troubleshooting > Regular Maintenance
NOTE
If the Staple Unit runs out of staples, contact your dealer or service representative.
1 2
10-12
Troubleshooting > Regular Maintenance
NOTE
If the Staple Unit runs out of staples, contact your dealer or service representative.
10-13
Troubleshooting > Regular Maintenance
2
1
10-14
Troubleshooting > Regular Maintenance
NOTE
If the Staple Unit runs out of staples, contact your dealer or service representative.
2
1
10-15
Troubleshooting > Regular Maintenance
NOTE
If the Staple Unit runs out of staples, contact your dealer or service representative.
10-16
Troubleshooting > Regular Maintenance
C
B
1 1
10-17
Troubleshooting > Regular Maintenance
NOTE
Take care not to spill the staple waste when removing the box.
10-18
Troubleshooting > Regular Maintenance
10-19
Troubleshooting > Regular Maintenance
Inner Finisher
NOTE
Take care not to spill the waste hole punch scraps when removing the box.
10-20
Troubleshooting > Regular Maintenance
10-21
Troubleshooting > Regular Maintenance
1,000-sheet Finisher
NOTE
Take care not to spill the waste hole punch scraps when removing the box.
10-22
Troubleshooting > Regular Maintenance
10-23
Troubleshooting > Regular Maintenance
NOTE
Take care not to spill the waste hole punch scraps when removing the box.
10-24
Troubleshooting > Regular Maintenance
10-25
Troubleshooting > Troubleshooting
Troubleshooting
Solving Malfunctions
The table below provides general guidelines for problem solving.
If a problem occurs with your machine, look into the checkpoints and perform procedures indicated on the following
pages. If the problem persists, contact your Service Representative.
NOTE
When contacting us, the serial number will be necessary.
To check the serial number, refer to the following:
Display for Device Information (page 2-18)
Reference
Symptom Checkpoints Corrective Actions
Page
An application does not Is the Auto Panel Reset time short? Set the Auto Panel Reset time to 30 page 8-77
start. seconds or more.
The screen does not Is the machine plugged in? Plug the power cord into an AC ―
respond when the power outlet.
switch is turned on.
Is the machine powered on? Turn on the main power switch. page 2-2
Pressing the [Start] key Is there a message on the screen? Determine the appropriate response page 10-36
does not produce copies. to the message and respond
accordingly.
Is the machine in Sleep mode? Select any key on the operation page 2-41
panel to recover the machine from
Sleep mode.
Blank sheets are ejected. Are the originals loaded correctly? When placing originals on the page 5-2
platen, place them face-down and
align them with the original size
indicator plates.
10-26
Troubleshooting > Troubleshooting
Reference
Symptom Checkpoints Corrective Actions
Page
Paper often jams. Is the paper loaded correctly? Load the paper correctly. page 3-4
Is the paper of the supported type? Remove the paper, turn it over, and page 3-4
Is it in good condition? reload it.
Is the paper curled, folded or Replace the paper with new paper. page 3-4
wrinkled?
Are there any loose scraps or Remove any jammed paper. page 10-58
jammed paper in the machine?
Printouts are wrinkled. Is the paper loaded correctly? Load the paper correctly. page 3-4
Is the paper damp? Replace the paper with new paper. page 3-4
Printouts are curled. Is the paper damp? Replace the paper with new paper. page 3-4
Printing System Driver Is the driver installed with the host Specify the IP address instead of page 2-48
cannot be installed. name while Wi-Fi or Wi-Fi Direct the host name.
function is available?
10-27
Troubleshooting > Troubleshooting
Reference
Symptom Checkpoints Corrective Actions
Page
Cannot print. Is the machine plugged in? Plug the power cord into an AC ―
outlet.
Is the machine powered on? Turn on the main power switch. page 2-2
Are the USB cable and network Connect the correct USB cable and page 2-7
cable connected? network cable securely.
When the wired or Wi-Fi network is The number of host name and ―
configured using the name domain name which can be used
resolution, does the IP address with the machine is one
(private address) of the other respectively. Configure the network
network which can not access under this restriction.
coexists?
Change the settings of name Embedded
resolution such as NetBEUI and Web Server
DNS, or network environment RX Guide
settings.
Cannot print with USB Is the USB host blocked? Select [Unblock] in the USB host page 8-69
drive. settings.
USB drive not ― Check that the USB drive is ―
recognized. securely plugged into the machine.
While "Auto-IP" is already Is a value other than "0.0.0.0" Enter "0.0.0.0" for the IP address of page 2-30
set to [On], the IP entered for the link local address of TCP/IP(v4).
address is not assigned TCP/IP(v4)?
automatically.
10-28
Troubleshooting > Troubleshooting
Reference
Symptom Checkpoints Corrective Actions
Page
Cannot send via SMB. Is the network cable connected? Connect the correct network cable page 2-7
securely.
Have the network settings for the Configure the TCP/IP settings page 8-56
equipment been configured properly.
properly?
Have the folder sharing settings Check sharing settings and access page 3-24
been configured properly? privileges under the folder
properties.
Is the selected interface selected as Specify the host name or IP address page 8-68
the Primary Network? of the interface selected as the
Primary Network, or set the
interface to be used again.
Has the SMB protocol been set to Set the SMB protocol setting to page 8-58
[On]? [On].
Has [Host Name] been entered Check the name of the computer to page 5-24
properly? *1 which data is being sent.
Has [Path] been entered properly? Check the share name for the page 5-24
shared folder.
Has [Login User Name] been Check the domain name and login page 5-24
entered properly? *1 *2 user name.
Has the same domain name been Delete the domain name and page 5-24
used for [Host Name] and [Login backslash
User Name]? ("/") from [Login User Name].
Has [Login Password] been Check the login password. page 5-24
entered properly?
Have exceptions for Windows Configure exceptions for Windows page 3-27
Firewall been configured properly? Firewall properly.
Do the time settings for the Set the equipment, domain server, ―
equipment, domain server, and data and data destination computer to
destination computer differ? the same time.
Is the screen displaying Send error? Refer to Responding to Send Error. page 10-50
Cannot send via the e- Is the E-mail send size limit set in Check the limit value is entered to "E- page 2-66
mail. the SMTP server registered on the mail Size Limit" of [E-mail] setting in
machine? Embedded Web Server RX and
change the value as necessary.
The machine is emitting Check the room temperature to see Depending on the printing ―
steam in the area around if it is low, or if damp paper was environment and the paper's
the paper ejection slot. used. condition, the heat generated during
printing will cause the moisture in
the paper to evaporate, and the
steam emitted may look like smoke.
This is not a problem, and you can
continue printing. If the steam
concerns you, raise the room
temperature, or replace the paper
with a newer, dryer paper.
10-29
Troubleshooting > Troubleshooting
Reference
Symptom Checkpoints Corrective Actions
Page
Cannot create Is the proper language selected? Check the language to extract. page 6-75
Searchable PDF file.
Can the texts on the original not be Check the following: page 6-75
recognized as texts, or is the PDF • The original orientation is
creation time taken? correct.
• When setting the originals with
the mixed orientation at once,
[On] is selected for [Auto Image
Rotation].
Cannot search a text that Have you set [OCR Text Set [OCR Text Recognition] in page 6-75
you want to search on the Recognition] in [File Format]? [File Format].
PDF file.
Are the texts of the scanned original Set [Density] to darker level. page 6-32
fainted or too light?
Is the background of the scanned Set [Background Density Adj.] to page 6-32
original too dark and the texts are [On] or [Manual] and manually page 6-37
difficult to recognize? adjust the density lighter. Otherwise,
set [Density] to darker level.
Is the text or image on the back of Set [Prevent Bleed-through] to page 6-37
the original visible on the front? [On].
Cannot find the machine Did you search by specifying the For security reasons, [HTTP] ―
with WSD. machine’s IP address or host protocol is set to [Off], and therefore
name? you cannot search by IP address or
host name.
*1 You can also enter a full computer name as the host name (for example, pc001.abcdnet.com).
*2 You can also enter login user names in the following formats:
Domain_name/user_name (for example, abcdnet/james.smith)
User_name@domain_name (for example, james.smith@abcdnet)
10-30
Troubleshooting > Troubleshooting
Reference
Symptom Checkpoints Corrective Actions
Page
Printed images are totally Is the paper damp? Replace the paper with new paper. page 3-2
too light.
Have you changed the density? Select appropriate density level. page 6-32
page 8-80
White background parts Have you changed the density? Select appropriate density level. page 6-32
of the image appear to page 8-80
have a slight overall
coloration. ― Run [Calibration]. page 10-56
Copies have a moire Is the original a printed photograph? Set the original image to page 6-33
pattern (dots grouped [Printer Output] or [Book/
together in patterns and Magazine] in [Photo].
not aligned uniformly).
Texts are not clearly Did you choose appropriate image Select appropriate image quality. page 6-33
printed. quality for the original?
10-31
Troubleshooting > Troubleshooting
Reference
Symptom Checkpoints Corrective Actions
Page
Black dots appear on the Is the original holder or the glass Clean the original holder or the page 10-2
white background when platen dirty? glass platen.
white original is scanned.
― Run [Developer Refresh]. page 10-57
Printed images are fuzzy. Is the device used in an Use in an environment that has ―
Printed images are cut environment with high humidity or suitable humidity.
off. where the temperature or humidity
changes suddenly? Set [Drum Heater] to [On]. page 8-80
Printed images are Are the originals placed correctly? When placing originals on the platen, page 5-2
skewed. align them with the original size
indicator plates.
Is the paper loaded correctly? Check the position of the paper page 3-4
width guides.
Printed images have Is the slit glass dirty? Clean the slit glass. page 10-3
vertical lines.
― Run [Laser Scanner Cleaning]. page 10-56
Dirt on the top edge or Is the interior of the machine dirty? Open the right cover. If the machine page 10-2
back of the paper. interior is dirty with toner, clean it
using soft, dry, lint-free cloth.
10-32
Troubleshooting > Troubleshooting
Reference
Symptom Checkpoints Corrective Actions
Page
Part of the image is ― Open and then close the right cover. ―
periodically faint or shows
white lines. ― Run [Drum Refresh]. page 10-56
10-33
Troubleshooting > Troubleshooting
Remote Operation
This function enables the system administrator to explain how to operate the panel and troubleshoot to user, by
accessing operation panel of the machine at remote using browser and VNC software.
NOTE
To execute Remote Operation using other browsers, refer to the following:
Embedded Web Server RX User Guide
NOTE
You can configure the protocol settings using Embedded Web Server RX.
Embedded Web Server RX User Guide
NOTE
You can configure settings for remote operation using Embedded Web Server RX
Embedded Web Server RX User Guide
10-34
Troubleshooting > Troubleshooting
NOTE
• If the user is logged in to the device, the permission confirmation screen will be displayed
on the operation panel. Select [Yes].
• If pop-up blocking of the browser occurs during connection of the Remote Operation,
select Always allow pop-ups from https:// [host name], and click Done. Perform Remote
Operation after waiting 1 minute or more.
When the Remote Operation is started up, the operation panel screen will be displayed on the
system administrator's or user's PC screen.
NOTE
• When setting "VNC (RFB) over SSL" to [On], the communication is encrypted.
• You can configure the protocol settings using Embedded Web Server RX.
Embedded Web Server RX User Guide
2 Enter the following format separated by a colon to start up the remote operation.
"IP address: port number"
NOTE
When setting "VNC (RFB)" to [On] in step 2, the default port number is 9062. When
setting "VNC (RFB) over SSL " to [On], the default port number is 9063.
Protocol Settings (page 8-58)
10-35
Troubleshooting > Troubleshooting
Responding to Messages
If the touch panel or the computer displays any of these messages, follow the corresponding procedure.
NOTE
When contacting us, the serial number will be necessary. To check the serial number, refer to the following:
Display for Device Information (page 2-18)
Reference
Message Checkpoints Corrective Actions
Page
Acceptable fold count Is the acceptable number of Select [Continue] to print using —
exceeded. sheets exceeded? Fold per acceptable number of
sheets. Select [Cancel] to
cancel the job.
― Expansion Authentication is ―
disabled. Turn the power switch
off and on. If the error exists,
contact administrator.
Add paper in cassette Is the indicated cassette out of Load paper. page 3-2
#. paper? Select the available paper.
Select [Continue] to print.
Are five or less envelopes Pull the cassette and loosen the ―
loaded in the cassette? paper length and width guides
slightly.
Add paper in Is the paper of the selected size Load paper. page 5-6
Multipurpose tray. loaded in the multipurpose tray? Select the available paper.
Select [Continue] to print.
*1 When Auto Error Clear is set to [On], processing resumes automatically after a set amount of time
elapses. For details on Auto Error Clear, refer to the following:
Auto Error Clear (page 8-77)
10-36
Troubleshooting > Troubleshooting
Reference
Message Checkpoints Corrective Actions
Page
Box limit exceeded.*1 Is [End] displayed on the The specified box is full, and no —
screen? further storage is available. Job
is canceled. Select [End]. Try to
perform the job again after
printing or deleting data from the
box.
*1 When Auto Error Clear is set to [On], processing resumes automatically after a set amount of time
elapses. For details on Auto Error Clear, refer to the following:
Auto Error Clear (page 8-77)
Reference
Message Checkpoints Corrective Actions
Page
10-37
Troubleshooting > Troubleshooting
Reference
Message Checkpoints Corrective Actions
Page
Cannot duplex print Did you select a paper size/type If the selected paper is not page 6-49
on this paper.*1 that cannot be duplex printed? changed and [Continue] is
selected, duplex is released.
Select the available paper.
Select [Continue] to print.
Cannot find the Is the machine and the PC to Check the network and SMB page 2-6
destination computer. which the scanned image is to settings.
Check the computer. be sent connected to the • The network cable is
network? connected.
• The hub is not operating
properly.
• The server is not operating
properly.
• Host name and IP address
• Port number
NOTE
If the sender is a domain user,
specify the domain name.
[Login User ID]@[Domain
Name]
Example: sa720XXXX@km
• Login password
• Folder share permissions of
the recipient
Cannot fold this Did you select a paper size/type If the selected paper is not page 6-25
paper. that cannot be folded? changed and [Continue] is
selected, fold is released.
Select the available paper.
Select [Continue] to print.
Cannot offset this Did you select a paper size/type If the selected paper is not page 6-26
paper.*1 that cannot be offset? changed and [Continue] is
selected, offset is released.
Select the available paper.
Select [Continue] to print.
Cannot output this Is the cassette you selected Select the available paper. —
paper to the tray. correct? Select [Continue] to print.
10-38
Troubleshooting > Troubleshooting
Reference
Message Checkpoints Corrective Actions
Page
Cannot punch at the Have you selected a position If the selected paper is not page 6-29
specified position. that cannot be punched? changed and [Continue] is
selected, punch is released.
Select the available paper.
Select [Continue] to print.
Cannot punch this Did you select a paper size/type If the selected paper is not page 6-29
paper. that cannot be punched? changed and [Continue] is
selected, punch is released.
Select the available paper.
Select [Continue] to print.
Cannot staple at the Have you selected a position If the selected paper is not page 6-27
specified position. that cannot be stapled? changed and [Continue] is
selected, staple is released.
Select the available paper.
Select [Continue] to print.
Cannot staple this Did you select a paper size/type If the selected paper is not page 6-27
paper.*1 that cannot be stapled? changed and [Continue] is
selected, staple is released.
Select the available paper.
Select [Continue] to print.
Check the document Is the top cover of the document Close the document processor ―
processor. processor open? cover.
10-39
Troubleshooting > Troubleshooting
Reference
Message Checkpoints Corrective Actions
Page
Check the paper in the — The paper size is different. Set page 5-6
multipurpose tray. selected size paper and select
[Continue].
Check the staple Is the staple waste box full? Follow the instructions on the page 10-18
waste box. screen, and empty the staple
waste box.
NOTE
If you select [Open Toner
Container Cover], you can
open the Toner Container Cover
that you closed accidentally.
Checking the waste Is the waste toner box full? Replace the toner container. ―
toner box. Reuse the black (K) toner
#### container as a waste toner box.
Handle the color toner
containers according to the
instructions supplied with them.
Select [Next]. The instructions
will be displayed.
NOTE
If you select [Open Toner
Container Cover], you can
open the Toner Container Cover
that you closed accidentally.
*1 When Auto Error Clear is set to [On], processing resumes automatically after a set amount of time
elapses. For details on Auto Error Clear, refer to the following:
Auto Error Clear (page 8-77)
10-40
Troubleshooting > Troubleshooting
Reference
Message Checkpoints Corrective Actions
Page
Empty the punch Is the punch waste box full? Follow the instructions on the page 10-20
waste box. screen. and empty the punch
waste box.
Reference
Message Checkpoints Corrective Actions
Page
Finisher tray is full of Is the acceptable storage Remove the paper. Printing then —
paper. capacity exceeded? resumes.
Folding tray is full of Is the acceptable storage Remove the paper. Printing then —
paper. capacity exceeded? resumes.
*1 When Auto Error Clear is set to [On], processing resumes automatically after a set amount of time
elapses. For details on Auto Error Clear, refer to the following:
Auto Error Clear (page 8-77)
10-41
Troubleshooting > Troubleshooting
Reference
Message Checkpoints Corrective Actions
Page
Reference
Message Checkpoints Corrective Actions
Page
Install the waste toner — The waste toner box is not page 10-7
box. installed correctly. Set it
correctly.
*1 When Auto Error Clear is set to [On], processing resumes automatically after a set amount of time
elapses. For details on Auto Error Clear, refer to the following:
Auto Error Clear (page 8-77)
10-42
Troubleshooting > Troubleshooting
Reference
Message Checkpoints Corrective Actions
Page
Job Accounting Is the acceptable printing count The printing count exceeded the —
restriction restricted by Job Accounting acceptable count restricted by
exceeded.*1 exceeded? Job Accounting. Cannot print
any more. The job is canceled.
Select [End].
Job separator tray is Is the acceptable storage Remove the paper and select —
full of paper. capacity exceeded? [Continue]. Printing then
resumes.
*1 When Auto Error Clear is set to [On], processing resumes automatically after a set amount of time
elapses. For details on Auto Error Clear, refer to the following:
Auto Error Clear (page 8-77)
Reference
Message Checkpoints Corrective Actions
Page
*1 When Auto Error Clear is set to [On], processing resumes automatically after a set amount of time
elapses. For details on Auto Error Clear, refer to the following:
Auto Error Clear (page 8-77)
Reference
Message Checkpoints Corrective Actions
Page
Mailbox tray is full of Is the acceptable storage Remove the paper. Printing then —
paper. capacity exceeded? resumes.
Main unit main tray is Is the acceptable storage Remove the paper. Printing then —
full of paper. capacity exceeded? resumes.
Maximum number of Is the acceptable scanning Cannot scan pages any more. —
scanned pages. count exceeded? Follow the instructions on the
screen.
10-43
Troubleshooting > Troubleshooting
Reference
Message Checkpoints Corrective Actions
Page
*1 When Auto Error Clear is set to [On], processing resumes automatically after a set amount of time
elapses. For details on Auto Error Clear, refer to the following:
Auto Error Clear (page 8-77)
Reference
Message Checkpoints Corrective Actions
Page
Non-genuine toner Is the installed toner container We will not be liable for any —
installed. our own brand? damage caused by the use of
third party supplies in this
machine.
Reference
Message Checkpoints Corrective Actions
Page
10-44
Troubleshooting > Troubleshooting
Reference
Message Checkpoints Corrective Actions
Page
Perform Tone Curve Over long periods of use, the Run [Tone Curve Adjustment]. page 10-54
Adjustment in the effects of the ambient
System Menu. temperature and humidity can
cause output hues to vary
slightly.
Reference
Message Checkpoints Corrective Actions
Page
Remove originals in Are there any originals left in the Remove originals from the ―
the document document processor? document processor.
processor.
Reference
Message Checkpoints Corrective Actions
Page
Scanner memory is — Scanning cannot be performed —
full.*1 due to insufficient memory of the
scanner. Follow the instructions
on the screen.
Scheduled sending — The number of jobs has —
jobs exceeded. exceeded the limit set for
delayed transmission. Select
[End]. The job is canceled.
Wait until the delayed
transmission is executed, or
cancel the delayed transmission
and then perform the job again.
10-45
Troubleshooting > Troubleshooting
Reference
Message Checkpoints Corrective Actions
Page
Select another Is the cassette you selected The specified cassette is a fax —
cassette. correct? special stage.
Select another valid cassette.
Select [Continue] to print.
Send Error.*1 — An error has occurred during page 10-50
transmission. The job is
canceled. Select [End]. Refer to
Responding to Send Error for
the error code and corrective
actions.
Skewed originals or — See the caution attached on the —
multi originals fed at document processor and check
once. the originals. If the originals are
jammed, follow the instructions
on the screen to remove the
originals.
SSD error. — An error has occurred on the —
SSD. Job is canceled. Select
[End].
The error cords are as follows.
01: The amount of data that can
be saved at once has been
exceeded. Restart the system or
turn the power OFF/ON. If the
error still occurs, divide the file
into smaller files. If the error
occurs after the file is divided,
the SSD is damaged. Execute
[System Initialization].
04: Insufficient space on the
SSD to complete this operation.
Move data or delete unneeded
data.
NOTE
Please be aware that when you
carry out initialization of the
system, the data saved in SSD
will be erased.
Staple is empty. *1 Has the staple cartridge holder If the staples are depleted, the page 10-10
run out of staples? machine will stop and the page 10-12
location of staple depletion will
page 10-13
be indicated on the screen.
Leave the machine on and page 10-15
follow the instructions to replace page 10-16
the staple case. Select
[Continue] to print without
stapling. Select [Cancel] to
cancel the job.
Staple is empty. Has staple cartridge holder A Add staples to staple cartridge page 10-13
(Manual Staple) run out of staples? holder A.
10-46
Troubleshooting > Troubleshooting
Reference
Message Checkpoints Corrective Actions
Page
Staple jam. — If a staple jam occurs, the page 10-
machine will stop and the 119
location of the jam will be
indicated on the screen. Leave
the machine on and follow the
instructions to remove the
jammed staple.
System error. — System error has occurred. —
Follow the instructions on the
screen.
*1 When Auto Error Clear is set to [On], processing resumes automatically after a set amount of time
elapses. For details on Auto Error Clear, refer to the following:
Auto Error Clear (page 8-77)
Reference
Message Checkpoints Corrective Actions
Page
The cover is open. Is there any cover which is Close the cover indicated on the ―
open? screen.
The device cannot be Are three handheld devices Cancel a connection to a page 8-51
connected because connected simultaneously? portable device that is not being
allowed connections used, or set the machine's auto
would be exceeded. disconnect time to break
portable device connections.
The password does Is the password expired? Change the login password. page 9-7
not meet password The job is canceled. Select page 9-8
policy. [End].
The slit glass requires — Clean the slit glass using the page 10-3
cleaning. cleaning cloth supplied with the
document processor.
10-47
Troubleshooting > Troubleshooting
Reference
Message Checkpoints Corrective Actions
Page
Tray # is full of paper. Is the acceptable storage Remove the paper. Printing then —
capacity exceeded? resumes.
Reference
Message Checkpoints Corrective Actions
Page
Unknown Toner Does the installed toner Install the specified container. —
Installed. PC container's regional
specification match the
machine's?
USB Drive error.*1 Is writing to a USB drive An error occurred in the USB ―
prohibited? drive. The job stopped. Select
[End].
The error cord is as follows.
01: Connect a USB drive that
can be written to.
USB Drive is not Is the USB drive formatted by Perform [Format] on this ―
formatted. this machine? machine.
10-48
Troubleshooting > Troubleshooting
*1 When Auto Error Clear is set to [On], processing resumes automatically after a set amount of time
elapses. For details on Auto Error Clear, refer to the following:
Auto Error Clear (page 8-77)
Reference
Message Checkpoints Corrective Actions
Page
Waste toner box is Is the waste toner box full? Replace the waste toner box. page 10-7
full.
Reference
Message Checkpoints Corrective Actions
Page
10-49
Troubleshooting > Troubleshooting
Error Reference
Message Corrective Actions
Code Page
1101 Failed to send the e-mail. Check the host name of the SMTP server on page 2-66
Failed to send i-FAX. the Embedded Web Server RX.
Failed to send via FTP. Check the host name of FTP. page 5-27
Failed to send via SMB. Check the host name of SMB. page 5-24
1102 Failed to send via SMB. Check the SMB settings. page 5-24
• Login user name and login password
NOTE
If the sender is a domain user, specify the
domain name.
• Host name
• Path
Failed to send the e-mail. Check the following on the Embedded Web page 2-66
Server RX.
• SMTP login user name and login password
• POP3 login user name and login password
• E-mail size limit
Failed to send i-FAX. Check the following on the Embedded Web Refer to
Server RX. FAX
• SMTP login user name and login password Operation
Guide
• POP3 login user name and login password
Failed to send via FTP. Check the FTP settings. page 5-27
• Login user name and login password
NOTE
If the sender is a domain user, specify the
domain name.
• Path
• Folder share permissions of the recipient
1103 Failed to send via SMB. Check the SMB settings. page 5-24
• Login user name and login password
NOTE
If the sender is a domain user, specify the
domain name.
• Path
• Folder share permissions of the recipient
Failed to send via FTP. Check the FTP settings. page 5-27
• Path
• Folder share permissions of the recipient
10-50
Troubleshooting > Troubleshooting
Error Reference
Message Corrective Actions
Code Page
1104 Failed to send the e-mail. Check the e-mail address. page 5-23
NOTE
If the address is rejected by the domain, you
cannot send the email.
1105 Failed to send via SMB. Check the following settings. page 8-56
[System Menu/Counter] key > [System/
Network] > [Network] > [TCP/IP Settings] >
[Protocol Detail] > [SMB Client
(Transmission)]
Failed to send the e-mail. Select [On] of the SMTP settings on page 2-66
the Embedded Web Server RX.
Failed to send via FTP. Check the following settings. page 8-56
[System Menu/Counter] key > [System/
Network] > [Network] > [TCP/IP Settings] >
[Protocol Detail] > [FTP Client
(Transmission)]
Failed to send i-FAX. Select [On] of the i-FAX settings on page 2-66
the Embedded Web Server RX.
1106 Failed to send the e-mail. Check the sender address of SMTP on page 2-66
Failed to send i-FAX. the Embedded Web Server RX.
1131 Failed to send via FTP. Enable the SSL. page 8-63
[System Menu/Counter] key > [System/
Network] > [Network] > [Secure Protocol] >
[SSL]
1132 Failed to send the e-mail. Check the following of the SMTP server. Refer to the
• Is SMTP over SSL available? Embedded
• Is the encryption available? Web Server
RX Guide
Failed to send via FTP. Check the following of the FTP server. —
• Is FTPS available?
• Is the encryption available?
10-51
Troubleshooting > Troubleshooting
Error Reference
Message Corrective Actions
Code Page
2101 Failed to send via SMB. Check the network and SMB settings. —
• The network cable is connected.
• The hub is not operating properly.
• The server is not operating properly.
• Host name and IP address
• Port number
Failed to send via FTP. Check the network and FTP settings. —
• The network cable is connected.
• The hub is not operating properly.
• The server is not operating properly.
• Host name and IP address
• Port number
Failed to send the e-mail. Check the network and Embedded Web Server RX. page 2-66
Failed to send i-FAX. • The network cable is connected.
• The hub is not operating properly.
• The server is not operating properly.
• POP3 server name of the POP3 user
• SMTP server name
2204 Failed to send the e-mail. Check the e-mail size limit of the SMTP page 2-66
Failed to send i-FAX. settings on the Embedded Web Server RX.
3101 Failed to send the e-mail. Check the authentication methods of both the —
sender and the recipient.
10-52
Troubleshooting > Troubleshooting
Error Reference
Message Corrective Actions
Code Page
3201 Failed to send the e-mail. Check the SMTP user authentication method of —
Failed to send i-FAX. the recipient.
0007 — Turn the power switch off and back on. If this page 2-9
4201 error occurs several times, make a note of the
displayed error code and contact your service
4701
representative.
5101
5102
5103
5104
7101
7102
7103
720f
10-53
Troubleshooting > Adjustment/Maintenance
Adjustment/Maintenance
Overview of Adjustment/Maintenance
If there is an image problem and the message to run adjustment or maintenance menu appears, run Adjustment/
Maintenance in the system menu.
The table below lists the item you can carry out.
Tone Curve Adjustment When the printed output tone may differ from the original, perform page 10-54
this function to ensure consistency with the original tone.
Drum Refresh Remove image blur and white dots from the printout. page 10-56
Calibration Calibrate the device to ensure consistency with the original tone. page 10-56
Laser Scanner Cleaning Remove vertical white lines from the printout. page 10-56
Developer Refresh Adjust the printed image that is too light or incomplete, even though page 10-57
there is enough toner.
1 Load paper.
10-54
Troubleshooting > Adjustment/Maintenance
IMPORTANT
• Load the paper with the print side facing up.
• After removing new paper from its packaging, fan the paper before loading it in the
cassette.
Loading in Cassette 1 (page 3-4)
• Before loading the paper, be sure that it is not curled or folded. Paper that is curled
or folded may cause paper jams.
• Ensure that the loaded paper does not exceed the level indicator (see illustration
above).
• If paper is loaded without adjusting the paper length guide and paper width guide,
the paper may skew or become jammed.
2 As shown in the illustration, place the printed side down on the platen with the edge with
the arrows toward the back.
4 Check that the number "2" is printed at the bottom of the pattern and repeat steps 2 to 3 to
read pattern 2.
10-55
Troubleshooting > Adjustment/Maintenance
Drum Refresh
Remove image blur and white dots from the printout.
NOTE
Drum Refresh cannot be performed while printing. Execute Drum Refresh after the printing is done.
Calibration
Calibrate the device to ensure consistency with the original tone.
NOTE
When consistency with the original tone is not ensured even after performing calibration,
refer to the following:
Tone Curve Adjustment (page 10-54)
10-56
Troubleshooting > Adjustment/Maintenance
Developer Refresh
Adjust the printed image that is too light or incomplete, even though there is enough toner.
NOTE
Waiting time may be longer when the toner is refilled during developer refresh.
10-57
Troubleshooting > Clearing Paper Jams
2 1/12
3 4
≧ἣ e011001
If a paper jam occurs, the location of the jam will be displayed on the touch panel as well as the clearing instructions.
Paper jam.
1. Open main unit right cover 1.
2. Open cover (A3) and
remove the paper.
L
3. Close the main unit right cover.
4. Open cassette 1.
5. Remove the paper.
JAM
To remove paper which is difficult
to get access to, the cassette
can be removed.
6. Close the cassette.
1/12
≧ἣ e011001
K
M
Q
O J H N
P P H N
N N
P P H
H
H G
A
H
B F
E C
R I
S D
10-58
Troubleshooting > Clearing Paper Jams
After you remove the jam, the machine will warm up again and the error message will be cleared. The machine resumes
with the page that was printing when the jam occurred.
10-59
Troubleshooting > Clearing Paper Jams
CAUTION
• Do not reuse jammed papers.
• If the paper tears during removal, be sure to remove any loose scraps of paper from inside the machine.
Scraps of paper left in the machine could cause subsequent jamming.
A3
10-60
Troubleshooting > Clearing Paper Jams
10-61
Troubleshooting > Clearing Paper Jams
NOTE
To remove paper which is difficult to get access to, the cassette can be removed.
10-62
Troubleshooting > Clearing Paper Jams
CAUTION
• Do not reuse jammed papers.
• If the paper tears during removal, be sure to remove any loose scraps of paper from inside the machine.
Scraps of paper left in the machine could cause subsequent jamming.
A5
10-63
Troubleshooting > Clearing Paper Jams
10-64
Troubleshooting > Clearing Paper Jams
NOTE
To remove paper which is difficult to get access to, the cassette can be removed.
10-65
Troubleshooting > Clearing Paper Jams
CAUTION
• Do not reuse jammed papers.
• If the paper tears during removal, be sure to remove any loose scraps of paper from inside the machine.
Scraps of paper left in the machine could cause subsequent jamming.
10-66
Troubleshooting > Clearing Paper Jams
NOTE
To remove paper which is difficult to get access to, the cassette can be removed.
10-67
Troubleshooting > Clearing Paper Jams
CAUTION
• Do not reuse jammed papers.
• If the paper tears during removal, be sure to remove any loose scraps of paper from inside the machine.
Scraps of paper left in the machine could cause subsequent jamming.
10-68
Troubleshooting > Clearing Paper Jams
10-69
Troubleshooting > Clearing Paper Jams
CAUTION
• Do not reuse jammed papers.
• If the paper tears during removal, be sure to remove any loose scraps of paper from inside the machine.
Scraps of paper left in the machine could cause subsequent jamming.
10-70
Troubleshooting > Clearing Paper Jams
B1
10-71
Troubleshooting > Clearing Paper Jams
B2
10-72
Troubleshooting > Clearing Paper Jams
11 Ifthetheoriginal
optional side feeder is installed, return the side feeder to
position.
CAUTION
• Do not reuse jammed papers.
• If the paper tears during removal, be sure to remove any loose scraps of paper from inside the machine.
Scraps of paper left in the machine could cause subsequent jamming.
10-73
Troubleshooting > Clearing Paper Jams
10-74
Troubleshooting > Clearing Paper Jams
CAUTION
• Do not reuse jammed papers.
• If the paper tears during removal, be sure to remove any loose scraps of paper from inside the machine.
Scraps of paper left in the machine could cause subsequent jamming.
10-75
Troubleshooting > Clearing Paper Jams
CAUTION
The fixing unit is extremely hot. Take sufficient care when working in this area, as there is a danger of getting
burned.
A5
10-76
Troubleshooting > Clearing Paper Jams
A1
A2
10-77
Troubleshooting > Clearing Paper Jams
A3
A4
10-78
Troubleshooting > Clearing Paper Jams
A5
10-79
Troubleshooting > Clearing Paper Jams
17 Ifthetheoriginal
optional side feeder is installed, return the side feeder to
position.
CAUTION
• Do not reuse jammed papers.
• If the paper tears during removal, be sure to remove any loose scraps of paper from inside the machine.
Scraps of paper left in the machine could cause subsequent jamming.
10-80
Troubleshooting > Clearing Paper Jams
CAUTION
• Do not reuse jammed papers.
• If the paper tears during removal, be sure to remove any loose scraps of paper from inside the machine.
Scraps of paper left in the machine could cause subsequent jamming.
10-81
Troubleshooting > Clearing Paper Jams
10-82
Troubleshooting > Clearing Paper Jams
CAUTION
• Do not reuse jammed papers.
• If the paper tears during removal, be sure to remove any loose scraps of paper from inside the machine.
Scraps of paper left in the machine could cause subsequent jamming.
10-83
Troubleshooting > Clearing Paper Jams
CAUTION
• Do not reuse jammed papers.
• If the paper tears during removal, be sure to remove any loose scraps of paper from inside the machine.
Scraps of paper left in the machine could cause subsequent jamming.
10-84
Troubleshooting > Clearing Paper Jams
CAUTION
• Do not reuse jammed papers.
• If the paper tears during removal, be sure to remove any loose scraps of paper from inside the machine.
Scraps of paper left in the machine could cause subsequent jamming.
10-85
Troubleshooting > Clearing Paper Jams
CAUTION
If the paper tears during removal, be sure to remove any loose scraps of paper from inside the machine.
Scraps of paper left in the machine could cause subsequent jamming.
10-86
Troubleshooting > Clearing Paper Jams
C1
C2
C1
10-87
Troubleshooting > Clearing Paper Jams
CAUTION
If the paper tears during removal, be sure to remove any loose scraps of paper from inside the machine.
Scraps of paper left in the machine could cause subsequent jamming.
10-88
Troubleshooting > Clearing Paper Jams
CAUTION
• Do not reuse jammed papers.
• If the paper tears during removal, be sure to remove any loose scraps of paper from inside the machine.
Scraps of paper left in the machine could cause subsequent jamming.
10-89
Troubleshooting > Clearing Paper Jams
D2
10-90
Troubleshooting > Clearing Paper Jams
D1
10-91
Troubleshooting > Clearing Paper Jams
CAUTION
• Do not reuse jammed papers.
• If the paper tears during removal, be sure to remove any loose scraps of paper from inside the machine.
Scraps of paper left in the machine could cause subsequent jamming.
D1
10-92
Troubleshooting > Clearing Paper Jams
CAUTION
• Do not reuse jammed papers.
• If the paper tears during removal, be sure to remove any loose scraps of paper from inside the machine.
Scraps of paper left in the machine could cause subsequent jamming.
10-93
Troubleshooting > Clearing Paper Jams
D6
10-94
Troubleshooting > Clearing Paper Jams
D4
D5
10-95
Troubleshooting > Clearing Paper Jams
D1
10-96
Troubleshooting > Clearing Paper Jams
CAUTION
• Do not reuse jammed papers.
• If the paper tears during removal, be sure to remove any loose scraps of paper from inside the machine.
Scraps of paper left in the machine could cause subsequent jamming.
D2
10-97
Troubleshooting > Clearing Paper Jams
D3
D1
10-98
Troubleshooting > Clearing Paper Jams
10-99
Troubleshooting > Clearing Paper Jams
CAUTION
• Do not reuse jammed papers.
• If the paper tears during removal, be sure to remove any loose scraps of paper from inside the machine.
Scraps of paper left in the machine could cause subsequent jamming.
D7
10-100
Troubleshooting > Clearing Paper Jams
D8
10-101
Troubleshooting > Clearing Paper Jams
10-102
Troubleshooting > Clearing Paper Jams
D9
10-103
Troubleshooting > Clearing Paper Jams
D9
10-104
Troubleshooting > Clearing Paper Jams
CAUTION
• Do not reuse jammed papers.
• If the paper tears during removal, be sure to remove any loose scraps of paper from inside the machine.
Scraps of paper left in the machine could cause subsequent jamming.
10-105
Troubleshooting > Clearing Paper Jams
D9
10-106
Troubleshooting > Clearing Paper Jams
D9
10-107
Troubleshooting > Clearing Paper Jams
10-108
Troubleshooting > Clearing Paper Jams
CAUTION
• Do not reuse jammed papers.
• If the paper tears during removal, be sure to remove any loose scraps of paper from inside the machine.
Scraps of paper left in the machine could cause subsequent jamming.
10-109
Troubleshooting > Clearing Paper Jams
D7
D8
10-110
Troubleshooting > Clearing Paper Jams
10-111
Troubleshooting > Clearing Paper Jams
D9
10-112
Troubleshooting > Clearing Paper Jams
D9
10-113
Troubleshooting > Clearing Paper Jams
10-114
Troubleshooting > Clearing Paper Jams
CAUTION
• Do not reuse jammed papers.
• If the paper tears during removal, be sure to remove any loose scraps of paper from inside the machine.
Scraps of paper left in the machine could cause subsequent jamming.
D9
10-115
Troubleshooting > Clearing Paper Jams
D9
10-116
Troubleshooting > Clearing Paper Jams
10-117
Troubleshooting > Clearing Paper Jams
10-118
Troubleshooting > Clearing a Staple Jam
10-119
Troubleshooting > Clearing a Staple Jam
10-120
Troubleshooting > Clearing a Staple Jam
D2
10-121
Troubleshooting > Clearing a Staple Jam
D1
10-122
Troubleshooting > Clearing a Staple Jam
10-123
Troubleshooting > Clearing a Staple Jam
D4
D5
10-124
Troubleshooting > Clearing a Staple Jam
10-125
Troubleshooting > Clearing a Staple Jam
D4
10-126
Troubleshooting > Clearing a Staple Jam
D5
10-127
Troubleshooting > Clearing a Staple Jam
10-128
Troubleshooting > Clearing a Staple Jam
C
B
10-129
Troubleshooting > Clearing a Staple Jam
10-130
Troubleshooting > Clearing a Staple Jam
D9
10-131
Troubleshooting > Clearing a Staple Jam
D9
10-132
Troubleshooting > Clearing a Staple Jam
10-133
Troubleshooting > Clearing a Staple Jam
10-134
Troubleshooting > Clearing a Staple Jam
D9
10-135
Troubleshooting > Clearing a Staple Jam
D9
10-136
Troubleshooting > Clearing a Staple Jam
10-137
11 Appendix
This chapter explains the following topics:
Optional Equipment .......................................................................................................................................... 11-2
Overview of Optional Equipment ............................................................................................................ 11-2
Applications ....................................................................................................................................................... 11-8
Starting Application Use .......................................................................................................................... 11-8
Checking Details of Application .............................................................................................................. 11-9
Character Entry Method .................................................................................................................................. 11-10
Entry Screens ....................................................................................................................................... 11-10
Entering Characters .............................................................................................................................. 11-12
Paper .............................................................................................................................................................. 11-13
Basic Paper Specifications ................................................................................................................... 11-13
Choosing the Appropriate Paper .......................................................................................................... 11-14
Special Paper ........................................................................................................................................ 11-16
Specifications .................................................................................................................................................. 11-20
Machine ................................................................................................................................................ 11-20
Copy Functions ..................................................................................................................................... 11-22
Printer Functions ................................................................................................................................... 11-23
Scanner Functions ................................................................................................................................ 11-24
Document Processor ............................................................................................................................ 11-24
Paper Feeder (500-sheet×2) ................................................................................................................ 11-25
Large Capacity Feeder (1,500-sheet×2) ............................................................................................... 11-25
Side Feeder (3,000-sheet) .................................................................................................................... 11-25
Inner Finisher ........................................................................................................................................ 11-26
Punch Unit (For Inner Finisher) ............................................................................................................ 11-26
1,000-sheet Finisher ............................................................................................................................. 11-27
4,000-sheet Finisher ............................................................................................................................. 11-28
100-sheet Staple Finisher ..................................................................................................................... 11-29
Punch Unit (For 1,000-sheet/4,000-sheet/100-sheet Staple Finisher) .................................................. 11-29
Mailbox (For 4,000-sheet Finisher) ....................................................................................................... 11-30
Folding Unit (For 4,000-sheet Finisher) ................................................................................................ 11-30
Folding Unit (For 100-sheet Staple Finisher) ........................................................................................ 11-31
Job Separator Tray ............................................................................................................................... 11-32
Banner Tray .......................................................................................................................................... 11-32
Glossary .......................................................................................................................................................... 11-33
11-1
Appendix > Optional Equipment
Optional Equipment
Overview of Optional Equipment
The following optional equipment is available for the machine.
(2) MT-730(B)
(12) DF-7100
(15) JS-7100
(10) PF-7120*
(6) BF-730
(5) DF-7120
* If the following option is installed, toppling prevention kit must be installed: PF-7100, PF-7110, PF-7120
11-2
Appendix > Optional Equipment
(16) NK-7120, NK-7130 (17) DT-730(B) (19) FAX System 12 (23) Card
Authentication Kit(B)
(20) IB-50
(22) IB-35
(21) IB-51
Software option
(25) UG-33
(26) UG-34
11-3
Appendix > Optional Equipment
(1) DP-7130 "Document Processor (Dual Scan with Skewed and Multifeed Detection)"
DP-7110 "Document Processor (Dual Scan)"
DP-7100 "Document Processor (Reverse Automatic)"
PLATEN COVER TYPE E "Original Cover"
Automatically scans originals. Also you can perform duplex copying and split copying.
For document processor operation, refer to the following:
Loading Originals in the Document Processor (page 5-4)
When the document processor is not used, please use the PLATEN COVER TYPE E.
NOTE
To deliver output to the mail box, change the Paper Output selection on the operation panel or in the Printing
System Driver, or change in the default settings.
Paper Output (page 6-31)
11-4
Appendix > Optional Equipment
NOTE
To ensure that paper is delivered to the Job Separator, select the output destination or change the default setting.
Paper Output (page 6-31)
11-5
Appendix > Optional Equipment
11-6
Appendix > Optional Equipment
11-7
Appendix > Applications
Applications
Overview of the Applications
The applications listed below are installed on this machine.
Application
Data Encryption/Overwrite
ThinPrint Option*1
NOTE
• Restrictions such as the number of times the application can be used during the trial period differ depending on the
application.
• If you change the date/time while using the trial version of an application, you will no longer be able to use the
application.
NOTE
If the user authentication screen appears, enter your login user name and login
password and select [Login]. For this, you need to login as an administrator or as a user
with privileges to carry out this setting. The factory default login user name and login
password are set as shown below.
11-8
Appendix > Applications
NOTE
Icons of activated application are displayed in the Home screen.
NOTE
If the user authentication screen appears, enter your login user name and login
password and select [Login]. For this, you need to login as an administrator or as a user
with privileges to carry out this setting. The factory default login user name and login
password are set as shown below.
Item
Function Name
License
Remaining Counts
Expiration Date
Status
11-9
Appendix > Character Entry Method
NOTE
Keyboard Layout
"QWERTY", "QWERTZ" and "AZERTY" are available as keyboard layouts the same as a PC keyboard. Select the
[System Menu/Counter] key, [Common Settings] and then [Keyboard Layout] to choose the desired layout.
"QWERTY" layout is used here as an example. You may use another layout following the same steps.
Entry Screens
Lower-case Letter Entry Screen
11
Use the keyboard to enter.
1
Limit: 128 characters
Input: 0 characters
10
Backspace
9
! @ # $ % ^ & * ( ) _ +
Q W E R T Y U I O P { } |
A S D F G H J K L : " 8
Z X C V B N M < > ?
2 Upper-case
Lower-case
Lower-case No./Symbol Space
Cancel OK
Status k0101_01_al
3 4 5 6 7
No. Display/Key Description
7 [OK] Select to finalize entry and return to the screen before the
entry.
11-10
Appendix > Character Entry Method
Backspace
! @ # $ % ^ & * ( ) _ +
Q W E R T Y U I O P { } |
A S D F G H J K L : "
Z X C V B N M < > ?
Lower-case
Upper-case Lower-case No./Symbol Space
Cancel OK
Status k0101_01_al
Backspace
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 ! " #
$ % & ( ) * + , - . / :
12
; < = > ? @ [ \ ] ^ _ ` {
| }
Lower-case Space
Upper-case Lower-case No./Symbol
Cancel OK
Status k0101_02_al
11-11
Appendix > Character Entry Method
Entering Characters
Follow the steps below to enter 'List A-1' for an example.
1 Select [Upper-case].
Backspace
! @ # $ % ^ & * ( ) _ +
Q W E R T Y U I O P { } |
A S D F G H J K L : "
Z X C V B N M < > ?
Upper-case Lower-case
Lower-case No./Symbol Space
Cancel OK
Status k0101_03_al
3 Select [Lower-case].
Backspace
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 ! =`
q w e r t y u i o p [ ] \
a s d f g h j k l ;
z x c v b n m , . / @ _
Cancel OK
Status k0101_04_al
5 Select [Upper-case].
6 Select [A].
7 Select [No./Symbol].
Backspace
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 ! " #
$ % & ( ) * + , - . / :
; < = > ? @ [ \ ] ^ _ ` {
| }
Upper-case Lower-case
Lower-case No./Symbol Space
Cancel OK
Status k0101_05_al
11-12
Appendix > Paper
Paper
This section explains the paper sizes and types that can be used in the paper source.
For details on the sizes, types, and number of sheets of paper that can be loaded in each paper tray, refer to the
following:
Specifications (page 11-20)
Supported Paper
Use standard copy paper for regular copiers or laser printers. The printing quality will be affected by the quality of paper.
Poor quality paper may result in unsatisfactory output.
Criteria Specifications
Moisture content 4 to 6%
NOTE
Some recycled paper does not meet requirements for use with this machine as listed in the Basic Paper Specifications
shown below, such as moisture or pulp content. For this reason, we recommend purchasing a small amount of
recycled paper as a sample for testing prior to use. Choose recycled paper that gives the best printing results and
contains low levels of paper dust.
We are not responsible for the problems occurred from the use of paper that does not conform to our specifications.
11-13
Appendix > Paper
Condition
Avoid using paper with bent corners or that is curled, dirty, or torn. Do not use paper that has a rough surface or paper
fiber lint, or that is especially delicate. Use of paper in any of these conditions will not only deliver poor copies but may
also cause jams and shorten the useful life of the machine. Choose paper with a smooth and even surface; however,
avoid coated paper or paper with a treated surface as it may damage the drum or fusing unit.
Ingredients
Do not use paper such as paper that has been coated or surface-treated or paper that contains plastic or carbon. Those
types of paper may produce harmful fumes from the heat of printing and may damage the drum.
Be sure to use the standard paper that contains at least 80% pulp, i.e., not more than 20% of the total paper content
consists of cotton or other fibers.
Smoothness
The paper surface should be smooth, but it must be uncoated. With paper that is too smooth and slippery, several
sheets may accidentally be supplied at once, causing jams.
Basis Weight
In countries that use the metric system, basis weight is the weight in grams of one sheet of paper one square meter in
area. In the United States, basis weight is the weight in pounds of one ream (500 sheets) of paper cut to the standard
size (or trade size) for a specific grade of paper. Paper that is too heavy or too light may be supplied incorrectly or cause
paper jams, which may cause excessive wear of the machine. Mixed paper weight (i.e., thickness) may cause several
sheets to be supplied at once accidentally and may also cause blurring or other printing problems if the toner fails to
adhere correctly.
Moisture Content
Paper moisture content is the ratio of moisture to dryness expressed as a percentage. Moisture affects how the paper is
supplied, the electrostatic chargeability of the paper, and how the toner adheres.
Paper moisture content varies depending on the relative humidity in the room. High relative humidity causes paper to
become damp, making the edges expand so it appears wavy. Low relative humidity causes paper to lose moisture,
making the edges tighten and weakening print contrast.
Wavy or tight edges may cause the paper to slip when it is supplied. Try to keep the moisture content between 4 to 6%.
To maintain the right level of moisture content, bear in mind the following considerations.
• Store paper in a cool, well-ventilated place.
• Store paper flat and unopened in the package. Once the package is opened, reseal it if the paper is not to be used for
a while.
• Store paper sealed in the original package and box. Put a pallet under the carton to keep it raised above the floor.
Especially during rainy seasons keep the paper a sufficient distance away from wooden or concrete floors.
• Before using paper that has been stored, keep it at the proper moisture level for at least 48 hours.
• Do not store paper where it is exposed to heat, sunlight, or dampness.
11-14
Appendix > Paper
11-15
Appendix > Paper
Special Paper
This section describes printing onto special paper and print media.
Transparencies
Transparencies must be able to withstand the heat of printing. Transparencies must meet the following conditions.
Material Polyester
Dimensional ±0.7 mm
accuracy
To avoid problems, use the multipurpose tray for transparencies and load transparencies with the long side facing the
machine.
If transparencies jam frequently at output, try pulling the leading edge of sheets gently as they are ejected.
11-16
Appendix > Paper
Label
Be sure to feed labels from the multipurpose tray.
For selecting labels, use extreme care so that the adhesive may not come in direct contact with any part of the machine
and that the labels are not easily peeled from the carrier sheet. Adhesives that stick to the drum or rollers and peeled
labels remaining in the machine may cause a failure.
When printing onto labels, you must be liable for the print quality and possible trouble.
Top sheet
Adhesive
Carrier sheet
Labels consist of three layers as shown in the illustration. The adhesive layer contains materials that are easily affected
by the force applied in the machine. The carrier sheet bears the top sheet until the label is used. This composition of
labels may cause more problems.
The label surface must be covered completely with the top sheet. Gaps between labels may cause peeling of labels,
resulting in a serious failure.
Some label paper has large margins on the top sheet. When using such paper, do not peel these margins from the
carrier sheet before completing output.
Top sheet
Carrier
11-17
Appendix > Paper
Hagaki (Cardstock)
Burrs
Burrs
Before loading Hagaki (Cardstock), fan them and align the edges. Hagaki (Cardstock) should be fed from the MP tray
with the print-side down or the cassette and the optional paper feeder with the print-side up. If the Hagaki (Cardstock)
paper is curled, straighten it before loading. Printing onto curled Hagaki (Cardstock) may cause jams.
Use unfolded Oufuku hagaki (Return postcard) (available at post offices). Some Hagaki (Cardstock) may still have rough
edges developed by a paper cutter on the back side. Remove any such rough edges by placing the Hagaki (Cardstock)
on a flat surface and rubbing the edges gently a few times with a ruler.
Envelopes
Envelopes should be fed from the MP tray with the print-side down or the cassette and the optional paper feeder with the
print-side up.
NOTE
Do not load paper above the load limits located on the paper width guide of the cassette and the optional paper
feeder.
Due to the structure of envelopes, printing evenly over the entire surface may not be possible in some cases. Thin
envelopes in particular may be wrinkled by the machine in some cases as they pass through. Before purchasing
envelopes in volume, try testing a sample to ensure the print quality.
Storing envelopes for a long period may cause them to become wrinkled. Thus, keep the package sealed until you are
ready to use them.
Keep the following points in mind.
• Do not use envelopes with exposed adhesive. In addition, do not use the type of envelope in which the adhesive is
exposed after the top layer is peeled off. Serious damage may be caused if the paper covering the adhesive comes
off in the machine.
• Do not use envelopes with certain special features. For example, do not use envelopes with a grommet for winding a
string to close the flap or envelopes with an open or film-covered window.
• If paper jams occur, load fewer envelopes at once.
Thick Paper
Before loading thick paper, fan it and align the edges. Some thick paper may still have rough edges developed by a
paper cutter on the back side. Remove any such rough edges just as with Hagaki (Cardstock) by placing the paper on a
flat surface and rubbing the edges gently a few times with a ruler. Printing onto paper with rough edges may cause jams.
NOTE
If the paper is not supplied correctly even after it is smoothed, load the paper with the leading edge raised a few
millimeters.
11-18
Appendix > Paper
Colored Paper
Colored paper must conform to the specifications.
Basic Paper Specifications (page 11-13)
In addition, the pigments in the paper must be able to withstand the heat of printing (up to 200°C or 392°F).
Preprinted Paper
Preprinted paper must conform to the specifications.
Basic Paper Specifications (page 11-13)
The colored ink must be able to withstand the heat of printing. It must be resistant to silicone oil as well. Do not use
paper with a treated surface such as glossy paper used for calendars.
Recycled Paper
Recycled paper must conform to the specifications; however, its whiteness may be considered separately.
Basic Paper Specifications (page 11-13)
NOTE
Before purchasing recycled paper in volume, try testing a sample to ensure satisfactory print quality.
Coated Paper
Coated paper is created by treating the surface of the base paper with a coating that provides higher printing quality than
plain paper. Coated paper is used for particularly high quality printing.
The surface of high-quality or medium-quality paper is coated with special agents that improve ink adhesion by making
the paper surface smoother. These agents are used either to coat both sides of the paper or just one side. The coated
side appears slightly glossy.
IMPORTANT
When printing on coated paper in very humid environments, ensure that the paper is kept dry as moisture
may cause sheets to stick together when they are fed into the machine. If printing in very humid
environments, set coated paper for one sheet each.
11-19
Appendix > Specifications
Specifications
IMPORTANT
Specifications are subject to change without notice.
NOTE
For more information on using the FAX, refer to the following:
FAX Operation Guide
Machine
Item Description
Type Desktop
Paper Type Cassette Plain, Rough, Vellum, Recycled, Preprinted, Bond, Cardstock, Color,
Prepunched, Letterhead, Envelope, Thick, High Quality, Custom 1 to 8
(Duplex: Same as Simplex)
Multipurpose Plain, Transparency (OHP film), Rough, Vellum, Labels, Recycled, Preprinted,
Tray Bond, Cardstock, Color, Prepunched, Letterhead, Envelope, Thick, High
Quality, Coated, Index Tab Dividers, Custom 1 to 8
Paper Size Cassette 1 A4, A5, A6, B5, B6, 216×340 mm, Letter, Legal, Statement, Executive, Oficio II,
Folio, 16K, ISO B5, Envelope #10, Envelope #9, Envelope #6, Envelope
Monarch, Envelope DL, Envelope C5, Hagaki (Cardstock), Oufuku Hagaki
(Return postcard), Youkei 4, Youkei 2, Nagagata 3, Custom (98 × 148 mm to
297 × 356 mm)
Cassette 2 A3, A4, A5, A6, B4, B5, B6, 216×340 mm, SRA3, Ledger, Letter, Legal,
Statement, Executive, 12×18", Oficio II, Folio, 8K, 16K, ISO B5, Envelope #10,
Envelope #9, Envelope #6, Envelope Monarch, Envelope DL, Envelope C5,
Envelope C4, Hagaki (Cardstock), Oufuku Hagaki (Return postcard),
Kakugata 2, Youkei 4, Youkei 2, Nagagata 3, Custom (98 × 148 mm to
320 × 457 mm)
Multipurpose A3, A4, A5, A6, B4, B5, B6, 216×340 mm, SRA3, Ledger, Letter, Legal,
Tray Statement, Executive, 12×18", Oficio II, Folio, 8K, 16K, ISO B5, Envelope #10,
Envelope #9, Envelope #6, Envelope Monarch, Envelope DL, Envelope C5,
Envelope C4, Hagaki (Cardstock), Oufuku Hagaki (Return postcard),
Kakugata 2, Youkei 4, Youkei 2, Younaga 3, Nagagata 3, Nagagata 4, Custom
(98 × 148 mm to 320 × 457 mm)
Banner sheet (210 × 488.1 to 304.8 × 1,220 mm/8.26" × 19.22" to
12" × 48.03")
Printable Area Print margin for top, bottom and both sides is 4 mm or less
11-20
Appendix > Specifications
Item Description
The power consumption of the The information is available at the website below:
product in networked standby (If www.olivetti.com
all network ports are connected.)
11-21
Appendix > Specifications
Copy Functions
Item Description
First Copy Black and White d-COPIA 5001MF 3.7 seconds or less
Time (A4, d-COPIA 6001MF 3.4 seconds or less
place on the
platen, feed
from
Cassette)
Supported Original Types Sheet, Book, 3-dimensional objects (maximum original size: A3/Ledger)
11-22
Appendix > Specifications
Printer Functions
Item Description
Printing Speed
Other than the above size, specifications are the same as those of Copy
Speed.
First Print Black and White d-COPIA 5001MF 4.3 seconds or less
Time (A4, d-COPIA 6001MF 3.8 seconds or less
feed from
Cassette)
Operating System Windows 7, Windows 8.1, Windows 10, Windows Server 2008/R2, Windows
Server 2012/R2, Windows Server 2016, Mac OS 10.9 or later
11-23
Appendix > Specifications
Scanner Functions
Item Description
Resolution 600 dpi, 400 dpi, 300 dpi, 200×400 dpi, 200 dpi, 200×100 dpi
File Format TIFF, JPEG, XPS, Open XPS, PDF (MMR/JPEG compression), High
compressive PDF, OCR Text Recognition (Option), MS Office file (Option),
OOXML (Option), OOXML (OCR) (Option)
Scanning Speed*1 (A4 landscape, 300 dpi, Image quality: Text/Photo original)
Transmission System SMB, SMTP, FTP, FTP over SSL, USB, TWAIN*2, WIA*2, WSD
*1 When using the document processor (Dual Scan with Skewed and Multifeed Detection) (except TWAIN and WIA
scanning)
*2 Available Operating System: Windows Server 2008/Windows Server 2008 R2/Windows 7/Windows 8.1/
Windows 10/Windows Server 2012/Windows Server 2012 R2/Windows Server 2016
Document Processor
Description
Item Document Processor Document Processor
(Automatic 2-Sided) (Dual scan DP)
Minimum: A6-R/Statement-R
4.13" × 5.82"/105 × 148 mm
11-24
Appendix > Specifications
Paper Size A3, A4, A5, A6, B4, B5, B6, 216×340 mm, SRA3, Ledger, Letter, Legal,
Statement, Executive, 12×18", Oficio II, Folio, 8K, 16K, ISO B5, Envelope #10,
Envelope #9, Envelope #6, Envelope Monarch, Envelope DL, Envelope C5,
Envelope C4, Hagaki (Cardstock), Oufuku Hagaki (Return postcard),
Kakugata 2, Youkei 4, Youkei 2, Nagagata 3, Custom (98 × 148 mm to
320 × 457 mm)
11-25
Appendix > Specifications
Inner Finisher
Item Description
Paper Size (80 g/m2) A3, B4, 216×340 mm, SRA3, Ledger, Legal, 12×18", Oficio II, Folio, 8K,
Finisher tray (no stapling) Envelope C4: 250 sheets
A4-R, A4, A5-R, A5, A6, B5-R, B5, B6, Letter-R, Letter, Statement, Executive,
16K-R, 16K, ISO B5, Envelope #10, Envelope #9, Envelope #6 3/4,
Envelope Monarch, Envelope DL, Envelope C5, Hagaki (Cardstock), Oufuku
hagaki (Return postcard), Youkei 4, Youkei 2: 500 sheets
Stapling Number of A3, B4, 216×340 mm, 30 sheets (52 to 105 g/m2)
Sheets Ledger, Legal, Oficio II, 2 cover sheet only (106 to 300 g/m2)
8K
Media types Plain, Recycled, Prepunched, Preprinted, Bond, Letterhead, Color, Coated,
Thick, High Quality, Custom
11-26
Appendix > Specifications
1,000-sheet Finisher
Item Description
Number of Trays 1 tray
Paper Size Finisher tray A3, A5-R, B4, B5-R, B6-R, 216×340 mm, SRA3, Ledger, Legal, Statement-R,
(80 g/m2) (Non-stapling) Executive, 12×18", Oficio II, Folio, 8K, 16K-R: 500 sheets
A4-R, A4, B5, Letter-R, Letter, 16K: 1,000 sheets
Supported Paper Weight Stapling: 90 g/m2 or less
Stapling Number of A3, B4, B5-R, 30 sheets (52 to 105 g/m2)
Sheets 216×340 mm, Ledger, 2 cover sheet only (106 to 300 g/m2)
Legal, 12×18", Oficio II,
16K-R, 8K
A4-R, A4, B5, Letter-R, 50 sheets (52 to 90 g/m2)
Letter, 16K 40 sheets (91 to 105 g/m2)
2 cover sheet only (106 to 300 g/m2)
Media types Plain, Recycled, Prepunched, Preprinted, Bond, Letterhead, Color, Coated,
Thick, High Quality, Custom 1 to 8
Dimensions (W × D × H) 21.58" × 24.36" × 41.34"
548 × 618.5 × 1,050 mm
Weight Approx. 66.2 lbs. or less / Approx. 30 kg or less
Space Required (W × D) 26.23" × 24.36"
(When pulling the tray) 666 × 618.5 mm
11-27
Appendix > Specifications
4,000-sheet Finisher
Item Description
Number of Trays 2 trays
Paper Tray A (Non-Stapling) A3, B4, B5-R, 216×340 mm, SRA3, Ledger, Legal, Executive, 12×18",
Size Oficio II, Folio, 8K: 1,500 sheets
(80 g/m2) A4-R, A4, B5, Letter-R, Letter, 16K-R, 16K: 4,000 sheets
A5-R, B6-R, Statement-R: 500 sheets
Tray B A3, A4-R, A4, A5-R, A6-R, B4, B5-R, B5, B6-R, 216×340 mm, SRA3,
Ledger, Letter-R, Letter, Legal, Statement-R, Executive, 12×18", Oficio II,
Folio, 8K, 16K-R, 16K, ISO B5, Envelope C4, Cardstock, Oufuku hagaki
(Return postcard), Youkei 4, Youkei 2: 200 sheets
Supported Paper Weight Stapling: 90 g/m2 or less
Stapling Maximum Number A3, B4, 216×340 mm, 30 sheets (52 to 105 g/m2)
Ledger, Legal, 12×18", 2 cover sheet only (106 to 300 g/m2)
Oficio II, 8K
A4-R, A4, B5-R, B5, 65 sheets (52 to 90 g/m2)
Letter-R, Letter, 16K-R, 55 sheets (91 to 105 g/m2)
16K 2 cover sheet only (106 to 300 g/m2)
Media types Plain, Preprinted, Bond, Recycled, Letterhead, Color, Prepunched, Thick,
Coated, High Quality, Custom 1 to 8
Dimensions (W × D × H) 23.91" × 26.32" × 41.79"
607.2 × 668.5 × 1,061.3 mm
Weight Approx. 88.2 lbs. or less / Approx. 40 kg or less
Space Required (W × D) 28.55" × 26.32"
(When pulling the tray) 725 × 668.5 mm
11-28
Appendix > Specifications
11-29
Appendix > Specifications
Sizes Bi-Fold A3, B4, A4-R, Ledger, Legal, Letter-R, Oficio II, 8K
Saddle Stitch A3, B4, A4-R, Ledger, Letter-R, Legal, Oficio II, 8K
Maximum Number for Storage Bi-Fold 5 sheets or less per set: 30 sets
(80 g/m )2 6 to 10 sheets per set: 20 sets
11 to 20 sheets per set: 10 sets
11-30
Appendix > Specifications
11-31
Appendix > Specifications
Banner Tray
Item Description
Max. number of sheets 10 sheets (Multipurpose tray)
Paper length 210 to 304.8 mm (8.26" to 12")
Paper width Max. 1,220.0 mm (48.03")
Paper Type Paper weight: 136 to 163 g/m2
Paper type: Heavy 2
Dimensions (W × D × H) 15.78" × 15.67" × 7.63"
400.6 × 397.8 × 193.6 mm
Weight Approx. 1.2 lbs. / Approx. 0.5 kg
NOTE
Consult your dealer or service representative for recommended paper types.
11-32
Appendix > Glossary
Glossary
Accessibility
The machine is designed featuring good accessibility even for the elderly and those who are physically challenged or
visually impaired. The angle of the touch panel is adjustable.
Apple Talk
AppleTalk offers file sharing and printer sharing and it also enables you to utilize application software that is on another
computer on the same AppleTalk network.
Auto-IP
Auto-IP is a module that enables dynamic IPv4 addresses to be assigned to a device on startup. However, DHCP
requires a DHCP server. Auto-IP is a server-less method of choosing an IP address. IP addresses between 169.254.0.0
to 169.254.255.255 are reserved for Auto-IP and assigned automatically.
Auto Sleep
A mode designed for electrical power saving, activated when the machine is left unused or there is no data transfer for a
specific period. In Sleep mode, power consumption is kept to a minimum.
Bonjour
Bonjour, also known as zero-configuration networking, is a service that automatically detects computers, devices and
services on an IP network. Bonjour, because an industry-standard IP protocol is used, allows devices to automatically
recognize each other without an IP address being specified or DNS server being set. Bonjour also sends and receives
network packets by UDP port 5353. If a firewall is enabled, the user must check that UDP port 5353 is left open so that
Bonjour will run correctly. Some firewalls are set up so as to reject only certain Bonjour packets. If Bonjour does not run
stably, check the firewall settings and ensure that Bonjour is registered on the exceptions list and that Bonjour packets
are accepted. If you install Bonjour on Windows XP Service Pack 2 or later, the Windows firewall will be set up correctly
for Bonjour.
Custom Box
The Custom Box function stores print data for each individual user on the printer and allows the user to print single or
multiple copies of the stored data later using the printer's operation panel.
Default Gateway
This indicates the device, such as a computer or router, that serves as the entrance/exit (gateway) for accessing
computers outside the network that you are on. When no specific gateway is designated for a destination IP address,
data is sent to the host designated as the Default Gateway.
11-33
Appendix > Glossary
DHCP (IPv6)
DHCP (IPv6) is the next-generation of the Internet's Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol and supports IPv6. It extends
the BOOTP startup protocol that defines the protocols used for transferring configuration information to hosts on the
network. DHCP (IPv6) permits the DHCP server to use its expanded functionality to send configuration parameters to an
IPv6 node. Because the network addresses that can be used are allocated automatically, the IPv6 node management
workload is reduced in systems where the administrator has to exercise close control over IP address allocation.
EcoPrint Mode
A printing mode that helps save toner. Copies made in this mode are thus lighter than normal.
Emulation
The function to interpret and execute other printers' page description languages. The machine emulates operation of
PCL6, KPDL3 (PostScript 3 compatible).
Enhanced WSD
Proprietary web services.
Grayscale
A computer color expression. Displayed images of this sort are typically composed of shades of gray, varying from black
at the weakest intensity to white at the strongest, without any other colors. Gray levels are displayed in numerical levels:
that is, white and black only for 1 bit; 256 gray levels (including white and black) for 8 bits; and 65,536 gray levels for 16
bits.
Help
A ? (Help) key is provided on this machine's operation panel. If you are unsure of how to operate the machine, would like
more information on its functions or are having problems getting the machine to work properly, press the ? (Help) key to
view a detailed explanation on the touch panel.
IP Address
An Internet protocol address is a unique number that represents a specific computer or related device on the network.
The format of an IP address is four sets of numbers separated by dots, e.g. 192.168.110.171. Each number should be
between 0 and 255.
11-34
Appendix > Glossary
IPP
IPP (Internet Printing Protocol) is a standard that uses TCP/IP networks such as the Internet to enable print jobs to be
sent between remote computers and printers. IPP is an extension of the HTTP protocol used to view websites and
enables printing to be carried out via routers on printers in remote locations. It also supports the HTTP authentication
mechanisms along with SSL server and client authentication as well as encryption.
Job Box
The Job Box function stores print data on the printer and allows users to print single or multiple copies of the stored data
later using the printer's operation panel.
Outline font
With outline fonts, character outlines are represented with numerical expressions and fonts can be enlarged or reduced
in different ways by changing the numeric values of those expressions. Printing remains clear even if you enlarge fonts,
since the characters are defined with outlines represented with numerical expressions. You can specify the font size in
steps of 0.25 points up to 999.75 points.
PDF/A
This is "ISO 19005-1. Document management - Electronic document file format for long-term preservation - Part 1: Use
of PDF (PDF/A)", and is a file format based on PDF 1.4. It has been standardized as ISO 19005-1, and is a
specialization of PDF, which has been mainly used for printing, for long-term storage. A new part, ISO 19005-2 (PDF/A-
2), is currently being prepared.
PostScript
A page description language developed by Adobe Systems. It enables flexible font functions and highly-functional
graphics, allowing higher quality printing. The first version called Level 1 was launched in 1985, followed by Level 2 that
enabled color printing and two-byte languages (e.g. Japanese) in 1990. In 1996, Level 3 was released as an update for
the Internet access and PDF format as well as gradual improvements in implementation technologies.
11-35
Appendix > Glossary
RAM Disk
Using part of the printer's memory as a virtual disk, you can set any amount of memory from overall printer memory as a
RAM disk in order to use features such as electronic sorting (shortening print time).
Send as E-mail
A function to send the image data stored in the machine as an E-mail attachment. E-mail addresses can be selected
from the list or entered at each time.
Status Page
The page lists machine conditions, such as the memory capacity, total number of prints and scans, and paper source
settings.
Subnet Mask
The subnet mask is a way of augmenting the network address section of an IP address.
A subnet mask represents all network address sections as 1 and all host address sections as 0. The number of bits in
the prefix indicates the length of the network address. The term "prefix" refers to something added to the beginning and,
in this context, indicates the first section of the IP address. When an IP address is written, the length of the network
address is indicated by the prefix length after a forward slash (/). For example, "24" in the address "133.210.2.0/24". In
this way, "133.210.2.0/24" denotes the IP address "133.210.2.0" with a 24-bit prefix (network section). This new network
address section (originally part of the host address) made possible by the subnet mask is referred to as the subnet
address. When you enter the subnet mask, be sure to set the "DHCP" setting to "Off".
TCP/IP (IPv6)
TCP/IP (IPv6) is based on the current Internet protocol, TCP/IP (IPv4). IPv6 is the next-generation Internet protocol and
expands the available address space, which resolves the problem of the lack of addresses under IPv4, while also
introducing other improvements such as additional security functionality and the capacity to prioritize data transmission.
11-36
Appendix > Glossary
11-37
Index Bates Stamp 6-64
Bluetooth Settings 8-73
Bonjour 11-33
Numerics Settings 8-58
1,000-sheet Finisher 11-4 Booklet 6-46
100-sheet Staple Finisher 11-4 Border Erase, Border Erase/Full Scan 6-44
2-sided/Book Original 6-72
4,000-sheet Finisher 11-4 C
Cables 2-6
A Calibration 8-81, 10-56
Canceling Jobs 5-21, 5-42
Accessibility 11-33
Canceling Printing 4-15
Accessibility Functions 2-26
Card Authentication Kit 11-6
Address Book 3-35
Cardstock 11-18
Adding 3-35
Cassette
Contact 3-35
Loading Envelopes or Cardstock 3-10
Deleting 3-41
Loading Paper 3-4, 3-7
Editing 3-40
Paper Size and Media Type 8-7
Group 3-39
Cassette 1 2-2
Adjusting the Operation Panel Angle 2-10
Cassette 2 2-2
Adjustment/Maintenance 8-80, 10-54
Cassette 3 2-5
Auto Color Correction 8-81
Cassette 4 2-5
Auto Drum Refresh 8-82
Cassette 5 2-5
Background Density Adjustment 8-80
Cassette/MP Tray Settings 8-7
Calibration 8-81, 10-56
Centering 6-43
Calibration Cycle 8-81
Character Entry Method 11-10
Contrast 8-82
Checking and Editing Destinations 5-47
Correcting Black Lines 8-81
Checking the Counter 2-59
Density Adjustment 8-80
Checking the Remaining Amount of Toner 7-14
Developer Refresh 8-82, 10-57
Cleaning 10-2
Display Brightness 8-81
Document Processor 10-2
Drum Heater 8-80
Glass Platen 10-2
Drum Refresh 8-80, 10-56
Slit Glass 10-3
Laser Scanner Cleaning 8-82, 10-56
Clear Set. after Job Started 8-34
Memory Diagnostics 8-81
Coated Paper 11-19
Sharpness Adjustment 8-80
Collate/Offset 6-26
Silent Mode 8-81
Default 8-20
System Initialization 8-81
Color
Tone Curve Adjustment 8-81, 10-54
Calibration 10-56
AirPrint 4-16
Color Selection 6-35
Apache License (Version 2.0) 1-13
Default 8-19
AppleTalk 11-33
Colored Paper 11-19
Applications 5-13, 11-8
Combine 6-41
Auto Error Clear 8-77
Common Settings 8-10
Auto Form Feed Timeout 11-33
Auto Image Rotation 6-67 Clear Set. after Job Started 8-34
Default 8-20 Customize Status Display 8-31
Auto Panel Reset 8-77 Default Screen 8-10
Auto Paper Selection 11-33 Direct Printing from Web 8-34
Auto Sleep 2-41, 11-33 Display Status/Log 8-31
Auto-IP 11-33 Error Handling 8-16
Settings 8-54, 8-56 Function Defaults 8-19
Automatic 2-Sided Print Function 1-16 Function Key Assignment 8-33
Keyboard Layout 8-11
B Language 8-10
Background Density Adjustment 6-37, 8-80 Low Toner Alert Level 8-30
Default 8-19 Manual Staple 8-29
Banner Printing 4-9 Measurement 8-15
Banner Tray 11-5 Message Banner Print 8-31
Using 4-12 Message Board Settings 8-32
Index-1
Numeric Keypad Settings 8-33 D
Offset Documents by Job 8-29 Data Sanitization 8-71
Offset One Page Documents 8-30 Data Security 8-70
Orientation Confirmation 8-19 Date Format 8-76
Original/Paper Settings 8-11 Date/Time 8-76
Paper Output 8-18 Date/Timer/Energy Saver 8-76
Prevent Light Reflection 8-33 Auto Error Clear 8-77
Remote Printing 8-32 Auto Panel Reset 8-77
Show Power Off Message 8-33 Date Format 8-76
Sound 8-10 Date/Time 8-76
System Stamp 8-23 EnergySaver RecoveryLevel 8-78
Toner Waste Full Alert 8-30 Error Clear Timer 8-78
USB Keyboard Type 8-23 Error Job Skip 8-77
Confirmation Screen of Destinations 5-48 Interrupt Clear Timer 8-77
Connecting Low Power Timer 8-77
LAN Cable 2-7 Panel Reset Timer 8-77
Power Cable 2-8 Ping Timeout 8-79
USB cable 2-8 Sleep Level 8-78
Connection Method 2-6 Sleep Rules 8-78
Continuous Scan 6-67 Sleep Timer 8-77
Default 8-22 Time Zone 8-76
Contrast 6-36, 8-82 Unusable Time 8-78
Control Section of the Finisher 2-5 Weekly Timer Settings 8-79
Conventions Used in This Guide xxiv Default
Copy 5-18 Auto Image Rotation (Copy) 8-20
Copy Settings 8-35 Backgrnd Density (Copy) 8-19
Auto % Priority 8-35 BackgrndDens.(Send/Store) 8-19
Auto Image Rotation Action 8-35 Border Erase Default 8-20
Auto Paper Selection 8-35 Border Erase to Back Page 8-20
Org. Size of Undetected Org. 8-35 Collate/Offset 8-20
Paper Selection 8-35 Color Selection 8-19
Paper Size for Small Original 8-35 Color TIFF Compression 8-20
Preset Limit 8-35 Cont. Scan (Copy) 8-22
Quick Setup Registration 8-35 Continuous Scan (Copy) 8-22
Reserve Next Priority 8-35 Continuous Scan (FAX) 8-22
Copy Speed 11-22 Continuous Scan (Send/Store) 8-22
Counting the Number of Pages Printed DP Read Action 8-21
Count by Paper Size 9-45 EcoPrint 8-20
Counter 2-59 E-mail Subject/Body 8-21
Each Job Account 9-47 Erase Shadowed Areas-Copy 8-22
Print Accounting Report 9-48 Erase Shadowed Areas-Send 8-22
Total Accounting 9-47 Erase Shadowed Areas-Store 8-22
Unknown ID Job 9-52 FAX TX Resolution 8-19
Cover 6-52 File Format 8-19
Custom Box 5-51, 11-33 File Name Entry 8-21
Copying Documents 5-63, 5-64 File Separation 8-22
Creating a New Custom Box 5-56 High Comp. PDF Image 8-20
Deleting Custom Box 5-58 i-FAX Subject/Body 8-21
Deleting Documents 5-65 Image Quality (File Format) 8-20
Editing Custom Box 5-57 JPEG/TIFF Print 8-21
Joining Documents 5-64 Margin 8-20
Moving Documents 5-63 OCR Output Format 8-22
Printing Documents 5-59 OCR Text Recognition 8-21
Saving Scanned Documents 5-60 Org. Image (Send/Store) 8-19
Send to Me from BOX (E-mail) 5-61 Orig. Orient.(Send/Store) 8-19
Sending Documents 5-60 Orig. Orientation (Copy) 8-19
Storing Documents 5-58 Original Image (Copy) 8-19
Customize Status Display 8-31 PDF/A 8-21
Prevent Bleed(Send/Store) 8-20
Prevent Bleed-thru (Copy) 8-19
Index-2
Primary OCR Language 8-21 FAX Box 8-41
Repeat Copy 8-22 FAX Memory RX Box 8-41
Scan Resolution 8-19 Job Box 8-41
Separator Paper Source 8-22 Polling Box 8-41
Skip Blank Page (Copy) 8-22 Quick Setup Registration 8-42
Skip Blank Page (Send/Store) 8-22 Document Processor 2-2
Toner Save Level (EcoPrint) 8-20 Loading Originals 5-4
XPS Fit to Page 8-21 Originals Supported by the Document
Zoom 8-20 Processor 5-4
Default Gateway 11-33 Part Names 2-2
Settings 8-54, 8-56 Document Processor (Dual Scan with Skewed and
Default Screen 8-10 Multifeed Detection) 11-4
Delete after Printed 6-81 Document Processor (Dual Scan) 11-4
Delete after Transmitted 6-81 Document Processor (Reverse Automatic) 11-4
Density 6-32 Document Table 11-5
Density Adjustment 8-80 DP Read Action 6-71, 8-21
Destination dpi 11-34
Adding a Destination 3-35 Drum Refresh 8-80, 10-56
Address Book 3-35 DSM Scan 5-35
Address Book Type 8-75 Protocol Settings 8-59
Check before Send 5-48, 8-36 Duplex 6-49
Checking and Editing 5-47
Choosing from the Address Book 5-43 E
Choosing from the Destination History 5-46 EcoPrint 6-34, 11-34
Choosing from the One Touch Key 5-45 Default 8-20
Choosing from the Speed Dial 5-45 Printer 8-43
Confirmation Screen of Destinations 5-48 Edit Destination
Entry Check for New Dest. 8-36 Address Book 3-35
Multi Sending 5-38 Address Book Defaults 8-75
Narrow Down 8-75 Contact 3-35 Group 3-39
One Touch Key 3-42 One Touch Key 3-42
Recall 5-49 Embedded Web Server RX 2-62
Search 5-44 E-mail Settings 2-66
Sort 8-75 E-mail Subject/Body 6-80
Developer Refresh 8-82, 10-57 Default 8-21
Device 7-13 Emulation 11-34
Device Information 2-18 Selection 8-42
DHCP 11-34 Emulation Upgrade Kit 11-6
Settings 8-54, 8-56 Encrypted PDF Password 6-83
DHCP (IPv6) 11-34 Energy Saver Recovery Level 2-42, 8-78
Settings 8-55, 8-57 Energy Saving Control Function 1-16
Display Setting Screen 2-18 Enhanced VNC over SSL
Display Status/Log 8-31
Protocol Settings 8-62
Disposing of the Punch Waste
Enhanced WSD 11-34
1,000-sheet Finisher 10-22
Protocol Settings 8-61
100-sheet Staple Finisher 10-23
Enhanced WSD over SSL
4,000-sheet Finisher 10-23 Protocol Settings 8-61
Inner Finisher 10-20
Enter key 2-24
Disposing of the Staple Waste 10-18
Entering Numbers 2-23
DNS Server (IPv4)
Entry
Settings 8-54, 8-56
File Name 6-69
DNS Server (IPv6)
Subject 6-80
Settings 8-55, 8-57
Envelope Feed Guide 3-10
Document Box
Envelope Stack Guide 3-18
Basic Operation 5-52
Envelopes 11-18
Custom Box 5-51
Environment 1-3
Job Box 4-18, 5-51
Erase Colors 6-37
USB Drive Box 5-51
Erase Shadowed Areas 6-54
Document Box/USB Drive
Default 8-22
Custom Box 8-41
Index-3
Error Clear Timer 8-78 Group Authorization 9-19
Error Handling 8-16 Group List 9-20
Continue or Cancel Err. Job 8-17 Guest Authorization Set. 9-22
Duplexing Error 8-16 Guest Authorization 9-22
Finished Pages Exceeded 8-16 Guest Property 9-23
Finishing Error 8-16 Guides Provided with the Machine xxi
No Staple Error 8-16
Paper Jam before Staple 8-17 H
Paper Mismatch Error 8-16 Handles 2-2
Punch Waste Full Error 8-16 Hard Disk/SSD Initialization 8-70
Skewed or Multi Originals 8-17 Help 11-34
Staple Waste Full Error 8-17 Help Screen 2-25
Wrong Size Paper Loaded 8-16 Highlighter 6-33
eSCL Home 8-34
Protocol Settings 8-61 Customize Desktop 2-13
eSCL over SSL Customize Taskbar 2-13
Protocol Settings 8-61 Wallpaper 2-13
Home Screen 2-12
F Host Name 8-51
FAX 8-42 HTTP
FAX Kit 11-6 Protocol Settings 8-60
FAX RX Result Report 8-46 HTTPS
FAX Server Settings 8-72 Protocol Settings 8-60
File
Format 6-74 I
PDF 6-76 ID Card Copy 6-32
Separation 6-79 i-FAX
File Format 6-74 Protocol Settings 8-59
Default 8-19 Image Repeat 6-60
File Management Utility 5-37 Inner Finisher 11-5
File Name Entry 6-69 Inner Tray 2-2
Default 8-21 Insert Sheets/Chapters 6-57
File Separation 6-79 Install
Default 8-22 Macintosh 2-54
File Size Confirmation 6-81 Software 2-46
Finisher Tray 2-5 Uninstalling 2-53
First Copy Time 11-22 Windows 2-47
First Print Time 11-23 Interface Block Setting 8-69
FMU Connection 5-37 Internet 8-83
Fold 6-25 Proxy 8-63
Folding Tray 2-5 Internet Browser 5-72
Folding Unit 11-4 Internet FAX Kit 11-6
Form Overlay 6-53 Interrupt Copy 5-21
Storing a Form 5-66 IP Address 11-34
Front Cover 2-2 Settings 8-54, 8-56
FTP 11-34 IP Filter (IPv4) 8-64
FTP Client (Transmission) IP Filter (IPv6) 8-64
Protocol Settings 8-58 IPP 11-35
FTP Encrypted TX 6-81 Protocol Settings 8-60
FTP Server (Reception) IPP over SSL
Protocol Settings 8-58 Protocol Settings 8-60
Function Key Assignment 2-16, 8-33 IPSec 8-58
Functions Key 2-19
J
G Job
Glossary 11-33 Available Status 7-2
Google Cloud Print 4-16 Canceling 7-11
GPL/LGPL 1-11 Checking History 7-9
Grayscale 11-34 Checking Status 7-2
Group Authorization Settings 9-19
Index-4
Detailed Information 7-8 Laser Scanner Cleaning 8-82, 10-56
Detailed Information of Histories 7-10 LDAP
Details of the Status Screens 7-3 Protocol Settings 8-61
Displaying History Screen 7-10 Legal Information 1-10
Displaying Status Screens 7-2 Legal Restriction on Copying 1-8
Pause and Resumption 7-11 Legal Restriction on Scanning 1-8
Priority Override 7-11 Limited Use of This Product 1-9
Reordering Print Jobs 7-12 Loading Originals 5-2
Sending the Log History 7-10, 8-47 Loading Originals in the Document Processor 5-4
Job Accounting 9-33 Placing Originals on the Platen 5-2
Adding an Account 9-36 Loading Paper 10-9
Apply Limit 9-50 Local Authorization 9-18
Copy/Printer Count 9-51 Login 2-27
Counting the Number of Pages Printed 9-46 Logout 2-28
Default Setting 9-44 Long Original 6-82
Deleting an Account 9-39 Low Power Mode 2-40
Editing an Account 9-38 Low Power Timer 8-77
Enabling Job Accounting 9-34 Low Toner Alert Level 8-30
FAX Driver 9-43 LPD
Job Accounting Access 9-35 Protocol Settings 8-60
Login 9-49
Logout 9-49 M
Overview of Job Accounting 9-33 Magnifying the View 2-26
Print Accounting Report 9-48 Mailbox 11-4
Printing 9-40 Main Power Switch 2-2
Restricting the Use of the Machine 9-37 Management 9-1
TWAIN 9-41 Manual Setting (IPv6) 8-55, 8-57
WIA 9-42 Manual Staple 5-74, 8-29
Job Box 4-18, 5-66, 11-35 Margin 6-43
Deletion of Job Retention 8-41 Default 8-20
Form for Form Overlay 5-66 Margin/Centering 6-43
Private Print Box 4-19 Measurement 8-15
Proof and Hold Box 4-22 Media Type Setting 8-15
Quick Copy Box 4-21 Memo Page 6-58
Quick Copy Job Retention 8-41 Memory Diagnostics 8-81
Repeat Copy Job Retention 8-41 Message Banner Print 8-31
Specifying the Job Box from a Computer and Storing Message Board Settings 8-32
the Job 4-18 Mirror Image 6-68
Stored Job Box 4-20 Mixed Size Originals 6-21
Job Finish Notice 6-68 Combinations 6-22
Job Finish Notice Setting 8-46 Copy Size 6-23
Job Separator 11-5 Mixed Size Stapling 6-29
Job Separator Tray 2-5 Monotype Imaging License Agreement 1-12
JPEG/TIFF Print 6-83 Motion Sensor 2-2, 2-39
Default 8-21
Settings 8-74
MP Tray Setting
K Paper Size and Media Type 8-8
Keyboard Holder 11-5
Multi Sending 5-38
Keyboard Layout 8-11
Multipurpose Tray 2-2, 2-3, 11-35
Knopflerfish License 1-13
Loading Envelopes or Cardstock 5-8
KPDL 11-35
Loading Index Paper 5-8
Loading Paper 5-6
L Paper Size and Media Type 8-8
Label 11-17
LAN Cable 2-6
Connecting 2-7 N
LAN Interface 8-58 Negative Image 6-68
Language 8-10 NetBEUI 11-35
Large Capacity Feeder (1,500-sheet×2) 11-5 Protocol Settings 8-59
Loading Paper 3-14 NetWare
Index-5
Settings 8-65 Settings 8-11
Network Interface 2-6 Size xxvi, 6-18
Network Interface Connector 2-4 Original Eject Table 2-2
Network Interface Kit 11-6 Original Image 6-33
NFC Default 8-19
Printing 4-17 Original Orientation 6-24
Settings 2-38, 8-73 Default 8-19
Notice 1-2 Original Preview 2-20
Numeric Keypad Settings 8-33 Original Size 6-18
Original Size Indicator Plates 2-2
O Original SSLeay License 1-11
OCR Scan Activation Kit 11-6 Original Stopper 2-2, 5-5
Offset Documents by Job 8-29 Original Table 2-2
Offset One Page Documents 8-30 Original Width Guides 2-2
One Touch Key Original/Paper Settings 8-11
Adding 3-42 Outline font 11-35
Deleting 3-43
Editing 3-43 P
OpenSSL License 1-11 Page # 6-55
Operation Panel 2-2 Panel Reset Timer 8-77
Option Paper
1,000-sheet Finisher 11-4 Checking the Remaining Amount of Paper 7-14
100-sheet Staple Finisher 11-4 Appropriate Paper 11-14
4,000-sheet Finisher 11-4 Custom Paper Size 8-12
Banner Tray 11-5 Default Paper Source 8-12
Card Authentication Kit 11-6 Loading Cardstock 3-10, 5-8
Document Processor (Dual Scan with Skewed and Loading Envelopes 3-10, 5-8
Multifeed Detection) 11-4 Loading in the Large Capacity Feeder 3-14
Document Processor (Dual Scan) 11-4 Loading in the Side Feeder 3-16
Document Processor (Reverse Automatic) 11-4 Loading Index Paper 5-8
Document Table 11-5 Loading Paper 3-2, 5-6
Emulation Upgrade Kit 11-6 Loading Paper in the Cassette 1 3-4
FAX Kit 11-6 Loading Paper in the Cassette 2 3-7
Folding Unit 11-4 Loading Paper in the Multipurpose Tray 5-6
Inner Finisher 11-5 Media for Auto 8-13
Internet FAX Kit 11-6 Media Type Setting 8-12
Job Separator 11-5 Paper Source for Cover 8-13
Keyboard Holder 11-5 Precaution for Loading Paper 3-2
Large Capacity Feeder (1,500-sheet×2) 11-5 Selecting the Paper Feeder Units 3-3
Mailbox 11-4 Separator Paper Source 8-22
Network Interface Kit 11-6 Settings 8-11
OCR Scan Activation Kit 11-6 Show Paper Setup Message 8-14
Optional Numeric Keypad 11-5 Size and Media Type 8-7, 11-13
Overview 11-2 Special Paper 11-16
Paper Feeder (500-sheet×2) 11-4 Special Paper Action 8-14
Punch Unit 11-5 Specifications 11-13
Side Feeder (3,000-sheet) 11-5 Weight 8-15
ThinPrint Option 11-6 Paper Feed Mode 8-43
Wireless Network Interface Kit 11-6 Paper Feeder (500-sheet×2) 11-4
Option Interface Slot 2-4 Paper Jams 10-58
Optional Function 8-73 1,000-sheet Finisher 10-89
Optional Network 100-sheet Staple Finisher (Inner) 10-92
Basic 8-65 100-sheet Staple Finisher (Tray A) 10-93
Wireless Network 8-66 100-sheet Staple Finisher (Tray B) 10-97
Optional Numeric Keypad 11-5 4,000-sheet Finisher (Inner) 10-92
Orientation Confirmation 8-19 4,000-sheet Finisher (Tray A) 10-93
Original 4,000-sheet Finisher (Tray B) 10-97
Auto Detect 8-13 Bridge Unit 10-83
Custom Original Size 8-11 Cassette 1 10-60
Loading Originals 5-2 Cassette 2 10-63
Index-6
Cassette 3 (1,500-sheet×2) 10-68 EcoPrint 8-43
Cassette 3 and 4 (500-sheet×2) 10-66 Emulation 8-42
Cassette 4 (1,500-sheet×2) 10-70 Form Feed TimeOut 8-43
Cassette 5 (Side Feeder) 10-73 Job Name 8-43
Document Processor (Dual Scan) 10-88 KIR 8-44
Document Processor (Reverse Automatic) 10-86 LF Action 8-43
Folding Tray (100-sheet Staple Finisher) 10-115 MP Tray Priority 8-44
Folding Tray (4,000-sheet Finisher) 10-105 Orientation 8-43
Folding Unit (100-sheet Staple Finisher) 10-109 Override A4/Letter 8-43
Folding Unit (4,000-sheet Finisher) 10-100 Paper Feed Mode 8-43
Inner Finisher 10-85 Print Setting 4-2
Jam Location Indicators 10-58 Printing Job Terminator 8-44
Mailbox 10-84 Resolution 8-44
Multipurpose Tray 10-75 Toner Save Level (EcoPrint) 8-43
Right Cover 1 10-76 User Name 8-43
Right Cover 2 (1,500-sheet×2) 10-81 Wide A4 8-44
Right Cover 2 (500-sheet×2) 10-80 Printing System Driver 11-36
Paper Length Guide 2-3, 3-4, 3-7 Changing the Default Printing System Driver
Paper Output 6-31, 8-18 Settings 4-3 Help 4-3
Paper Selection 6-19 Print Settings 4-2
Paper Stopper 2-2, 3-18 Printing Documents Stored in Removable USB
Paper Width Adjusting Tab 2-3 Drive 5-68
Paper Width Guide 2-3, 3-5, 3-8 Printing from PC 4-4
Part Names 2-2 Banner Printing 4-9
PDF/A 11-35 Non-standard Sized Paper 4-6
PIN Code Authorization 9-31 Standard Sized Paper 4-4
Ping 8-64 Printing Speed 11-23
Platen 2-2 Priority Override 6-69, 7-11
POP3 11-35 Product Library xxii
POP3 (E-mail RX) Program 5-10
Protocol Settings 8-58 Deleting 5-12
PostScript 11-35 Editing 5-12
Power Cable Recalling 5-11
Connecting 2-8 Registering 5-11
Power Management 1-16 Proof Copy 5-20
Power Off 2-9 Punch 6-29
Power On 2-9 Punch Unit 11-5
Power Switch 2-2
PPM 11-35 Q
Precaution for Loading Paper 3-2 Quick No. Search key 2-24
Precautions for Use 1-4 Quick Setup Registration 8-35, 8-36, 8-42
Preprinted Paper 11-19 Quick Setup Wizard 2-43
Prevent Bleed-thru 6-37
Default 8-19, 8-20
Prevent Light Reflection 8-33 R
Primary Network (Client) 8-68 RA (Stateless) 11-36
Print Report Settings 8-55, 8-57
Configuration List 8-46 RAM Disk 11-36
Data Sanitization Report 8-46 Raw
Font List 8-45 Protocol Settings 8-60
Network Status 8-45 Recycled Paper 11-19
Optional Network Status 8-46 Regarding Trade Names 1-10
Service Status 8-45 Regular Maintenance 10-2
Status Page 8-45 Remote Operation
Print Settings 4-2 Settings 8-74
Printer 8-42 Remote Printing 8-32
Auto Cassette Change 8-44 Repeat Copy 6-70
Copies 8-43 Default 8-22
CR Action 8-43 Printing 5-66
Duplex 8-43 Repeat Copy Job Retention 8-41
Replace the Waste Toner Box 10-7
Index-7
Replacing Staples Sending 5-22
1,000-sheet Finisher 10-12 Preparation for Sending a Document to a PC 3-22
100-sheet Staple Finisher 10-15 Sending Document to Desired Shared Folder on a
4,000-sheet Finisher 10-13 Computer 5-24
Folding Unit 10-16 Sending Size 6-73
Inner Finisher 10-10 Setting Date and Time 2-29
Report 8-45 Sharpness 6-36
Admin Report Settings 8-46 Shortcuts 5-16
Device Log History Settings 8-49 Adding 5-16
Login History Settings 8-48 Deleting Shortcuts 5-17
Print Report 8-45 Editing Shortcuts 5-17
Result Report Settings 8-46 Show Power Off Message 8-33
Secure Comm. Error Log 8-50 Side Feeder (3,000-sheet) 11-5
Sending Log History 8-47 Loading Paper 3-16
Resolution 6-79, 8-44, 11-22, 11-23 Silent Mode 8-81
Resource Saving - Paper 1-16 Simple Login 2-28
Responding to Messages 10-36 Simple Login Settings
REST Simple Login 9-27
Protocol Settings 8-62 Simple Login Setup 9-28
REST over SSL Skip Blank Page 6-71
Protocol Settings 8-63 Default 8-22
Restart Entire Device 8-73 Sleep 2-41
Restart Network 8-55, 8-64 Sleep Level 2-42, 8-78
Right Cover 1 2-3 Energy Saver 8-78
Right Cover 1 Lever 2-3 Quick Recovery 8-78
RX Result Report Type 8-46 Sleep Rules 2-41, 8-78
Sleep Timer 8-77
S Slit Glass 2-2
Safety Conventions in This Guide 1-2 SMB Client (Transmission)
Saving Documents to USB Drive 5-70 Protocol Settings 8-59
Scan Resolution 6-79 SMTP 11-36
Default 8-19 SMTP (E-mail TX)
Scan to Folder (FTP) 5-27 Protocol Settings 8-58
Scan to Folder (SMB) 5-24 SNMPv1/v2c
Scan to Folder Setup Tool for SMB 3-31 Protocol Settings 8-61
Security Level 8-68 SNMPv3
Security Precautions when Using Wireless LAN 1-8 Protocol Settings 8-61
Send and Forward Software Verification 8-71
File format 8-38 Solving Malfunctions 10-26
PDF Encryption Functions 8-39 Sound 8-10
Send and Print 6-80 Specifications 11-20
Send and Store 6-80 1,000-sheet Finisher 11-27
Send as E-mail 5-23, 11-36 100-sheet Staple Finisher 11-29
Send Result Report 8-46 4,000-sheet Finisher 11-28
Send Settings 8-36 Banner Tray 11-32
Broadcast 8-37 Copy Functions 11-22
Color Type 8-36 Document Processor 11-24
Default Screen 8-36 Folding Unit (For 100-sheet Staple Finisher) 11-31
Delete Destination History 8-38 Folding Unit (For 4,000-sheet Finisher) 11-30
Dest. Check before Send 8-36 Inner Finisher 11-26
Destination History Usage 8-38 Job Separator Tray 11-32
E-mail Settings 8-38 Large Capacity Feeder (1,500-sheet×2) 11-25
Entry Check for New Dest. 8-36 Machine 11-20
HighCompressionPDF Mode 8-37 Mailbox (For 4,000-sheet Finisher) 11-30
New Destination Entry 8-37 Paper Feeder (500-sheet×2) 11-25
OCR Text Recognition Act. 8-38 Printer Functions 11-23
Quick Setup Registration 8-36 Punch Unit (For 1,000-sheet/4,000-sheet/100-sheet
Recall Destination 8-37 Staple Finisher) 11-29
Send and Forward 8-37 Punch Unit (For Inner Finisher) 11-26
Send to Me (E-mail) 5-39 Scanner Functions 11-24
Index-8
Side Feeder (3,000-sheet) 11-25 Security Level 8-68
SSL
Security Settings 8-63 T
Stack Level Adjuster 3-19 TCP/IP 11-36
Staple Jam Settings 8-54, 8-56
1,000-sheet Finisher 10-121 TCP/IP (IPv4)
100-sheet Staple Finisher 10-126 Settings 2-30, 8-54, 8-56
4,000-sheet Finisher 10-124 TCP/IP (IPv6) 11-34
Folding Unit (100-sheet Staple Finisher) 10-133 Settings 8-55, 8-57
Folding Unit (4,000-sheet Finisher) 10-129 Text Stamp 6-61
Inner Finisher 10-119 Thick Paper 11-18
Staple/Punch 6-27 Thin Print over SSL
Status Monitor 4-23 Protocol Settings 8-59
Accessing 4-23 ThinPrint
Exiting 4-23 Protocol Settings 8-59
Notification Settings 4-26 ThinPrint Option 11-6
Status Page 11-36 Time Zone 8-76
Status/Job Cancel 7-1 Tone Curve Adjustment 8-81, 10-54
Storing Size 6-82 Toner Container (Black) 2-4
Subnet Mask 11-36 Toner Container Replacement 10-4
Settings 8-54, 8-56 Toner Waste Full Alert 8-30
Supplies Touch Panel 2-11
Checking the Remaining Amount 7-14 Transparencies 11-16
Support Tray Section of the Multipurpose Tray 2-3 Tray 1 to 7 2-5
Symbols 1-2 Tray A 2-5
System Initialization 8-81 Tray B 2-5
System Menu 8-2 Troubleshooting 10-26
Adjustment/Maintenance 8-80 Machine Operation Trouble 10-26
Application 8-83 Printed Image Trouble 10-31
Cassette/MP Tray Settings 8-7 Solving Malfunctions 10-26
Common Settings 8-10 TWAIN 11-37
Copy 8-35 Scanning 5-29
Counter 2-59 Setting TWAIN Driver 2-56
Date/Timer/Energy Saver 8-76
Document Box/USB Drive 8-41
Edit Destination 8-75 U
FAX 8-42 USB 11-37
Home 2-12 USB Cable 2-6
Internet 8-83 Connecting 2-8
Operation Method 8-2 USB Drive
Printer 8-42 Check the Information 5-71
Quick Setup Wizard 2-43 Printing 5-68
Report 8-45 Remove 5-71
Send 8-36 Save 5-70
System/Network 8-51 USB Interface 2-6
User Login/Job Accounting 8-76 USB Interface Connector 2-4
User Property 8-76, 9-12 USB Keyboard Type 8-23
System Stamp 8-23 USB Memory Slot 2-2
System/Network 8-51 USB Port 2-4
Bluetooth Settings 8-73 User Login Administration 9-2
Data Security 8-70 Adding a User 9-8
Interface Block Setting 8-69 Changing User Properties 9-11
Motion Sensor 8-74 Enabling User Login Administration 9-3
Network 8-51 FAX Driver 9-17
NFC 8-73 Group Authorization Settings 9-19
Optional Function 8-73 Guest Authorization Set. 9-22
Optional Network 8-65 ID Card Settings 9-30
Primary Network (Client) 8-68 Local Authentication 9-18
Remote Operation 8-74 Login 2-27
Restart Entire Device 8-73 Logout 2-28
Obtain NW User Property 9-25
Index-9
Overview of User Login Administration 9-2
Password Policy Settings 9-7
PIN Code Authentication 9-31
Printing 9-14
Simple Login Settings 9-27
TWAIN 9-15
User Account Lockout Setting 9-5
WIA 9-16
User Login/Job Accounting 8-76
Job Accounting 9-33
Unknown User Settings 9-52
User Login 9-2
User Property 8-76
V
VNC (RFB)
Protocol Settings 8-62
VNC (RFB) over SSL
Protocol Settings 8-62
W
Waste Toner Box 2-4
Waste Toner Box Cover 2-2, 2-4
Weekly Timer Settings 2-42, 8-79
White space 6-58
WIA 11-37
Scanning 5-29
Setting WIA Driver 2-58
Wide A4 8-44
Wi-Fi
Settings 2-32, 8-52
Wi-Fi Direct
Printing 4-16
Settings 2-36, 8-51
Wireless Connection 1-8
Wireless Network
Settings 2-32, 8-66
Wireless Network Interface Kit 11-6
WPS (Wi-Fi Protected Setup) 11-37
WSD Print
Protocol Settings 8-59
WSD Scan 5-32
Protocol Settings 8-59
X
XPS Fit to Page 6-83
Default 8-21
Z
Zoom 6-38
Default 8-20
Index-10
DIRECTIVE 2012/19/EU ON THE TREATMENT, COLLECTION, RECYCLING AND
DISPOSAL OF ELECTRIC AND ELECTRONIC DEVICES AND THEIR COMPONENTS